2018 F150
User Manual: Pdf 2018-f150
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 639
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2018 F-150 Owner’s Manual 2018 F-150 Owner’s Manual owner.ford.com ford.ca May 2018 Fourth Printing Owner’s Manual F-150 Litho in U.S.A. JL3J 19A321 AC 3456711_18a_F-150_OM_051017.indd 1 4/25/18 11:30 AM The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2018 All rights reserved. Part Number: 201709 20180419162906 California Proposition 65 WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling. Table of Contents Introduction Supplementary Restraints System About This Manual ..........................................7 Symbols Glossary ............................................7 Data Recording .................................................9 Perchlorate ........................................................11 Ford Credit .........................................................11 Replacement Parts Recommendation ............................................................................12 Special Notices ...............................................12 Mobile Communications Equipment ............................................................................13 Export Unique Options ................................14 Principle of Operation ..................................47 Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................48 Front Passenger Sensing System ...........49 Side Airbags .....................................................51 Safety Canopy™ ............................................52 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator .......54 Airbag Disposal ..............................................54 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio Frequencies .................................................55 Remote Control .............................................55 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control ...........................................................................6 1 Environment Protecting the Environment .......................15 At a Glance MyKey™ Instrument Panel Overview .......................16 General Information ......................................18 Installing Child Restraints ...........................19 Booster Seats ..................................................31 Child Restraint Positioning ........................33 Child Safety Locks ........................................35 Principle of Operation .................................62 Creating a MyKey ..........................................63 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................64 Checking MyKey System Status .............64 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems ........................................................65 MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................65 Seatbelts Doors and Locks Child Safety Locking and Unlocking ................................67 Keyless Entry ...................................................70 Principle of Operation .................................36 Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................37 Seatbelt Height Adjustment ......................41 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime .............................................................41 Seatbelt Reminder ........................................42 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance ...............................................44 Seatbelt Extension .......................................44 Tailgate Tailgate Lock ....................................................72 Manual Tailgate ..............................................72 Electronic Tailgate .........................................72 Removing the Tailgate .................................73 Tailgate Step ...................................................74 Bed Extender ...................................................75 Personal Safety System™ Security Personal Safety System™ ........................46 Passive Anti-Theft System .........................77 1 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Table of Contents Exterior Mirrors ...............................................98 Interior Mirror ..................................................101 Sliding Windows ..........................................102 Sun Visors .......................................................102 Moonroof ........................................................102 Anti-Theft Alarm ..........................................80 Power Running Boards Using Power Running Boards ....................81 Steering Wheel Instrument Cluster Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Manual Adjustable Steering Column .........................................................83 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Power Adjustable Steering Column .........................................................83 Audio Control .................................................84 Voice Control ..................................................85 Cruise Control .................................................85 Information Display Control .....................86 Heated Steering Wheel ..............................86 Gauges ............................................................104 Warning Lamps and Indicators ..............107 Audible Warnings and Indicators .............111 Information Displays General Information ....................................112 Information Messages ...............................124 Climate Control Manual Climate Control ............................142 Automatic Climate Control ......................143 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate .........................................................................145 Heated Windshield .....................................148 Heated Rear Window .................................148 Heated Exterior Mirrors .............................148 Cabin Air Filter ..............................................148 Remote Start ................................................148 Pedals Adjusting the Pedals ....................................87 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers .......................................88 Autowipers ......................................................88 Windshield Washers ....................................89 Lighting Seats General Information ....................................90 Lighting Control .............................................90 Autolamps ........................................................91 Instrument Lighting Dimmer .....................91 Daytime Running Lamps ............................92 Automatic High Beam Control .................92 Front Fog Lamps ...........................................93 Direction Indicators ......................................94 Spot Lamps ....................................................94 Interior Lamps ................................................95 Sitting in the Correct Position .................150 Head Restraints ...........................................150 Manual Seats ................................................152 Power Seats ...................................................153 Memory Function ........................................156 Rear Seats .......................................................157 Heated Seats .................................................157 Ventilated Seats ..........................................159 Front Seat Armrest .....................................159 Rear Seat Armrest ......................................160 Windows and Mirrors Power Windows .............................................97 2 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Table of Contents Universal Garage Door Opener Fuel Consumption .......................................192 Universal Garage Door Opener ...............161 Engine Emission Control Emission Law ................................................193 Catalytic Converter .....................................194 Selective Catalytic Reductant System ........................................................................196 Diesel Particulate Filter ............................200 Auxiliary Power Points Auxiliary Power Points ...............................165 Storage Compartments Center Console .............................................167 Overhead Console ......................................168 Transmission Starting and Stopping the Engine Four-Wheel Drive Automatic Transmission .........................206 Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................212 General Information ...................................169 Ignition Switch ..............................................169 Keyless Starting ...........................................170 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without: Push Button Start ...................................170 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With: Push Button Start ...................................170 Starting a Gasoline Engine ........................171 Starting a Diesel Engine ............................174 Switching Off the Engine ..........................178 Engine Block Heater ...................................178 Brakes Unique Driving Characteristics Traction Control Auto-Start-Stop ..........................................180 Principle of Operation ...............................226 Using Traction Control ..............................226 Fuel and Refueling Stability Control Safety Precautions .....................................183 Fuel Quality - Diesel ...................................183 Fuel Quality - E85 .......................................186 Fuel Quality - Gasoline ..............................187 Fuel Filler Funnel Location - Regular Cab ........................................................................188 Fuel Filler Funnel Location - SuperCab/ SuperCrew .................................................188 Running Out of Fuel ...................................188 Refueling ........................................................189 Principle of Operation ................................227 Using Stability Control ..............................228 Rear Axle Electronic Locking Differential ..............220 General Information ...................................222 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes ........................................................................222 Electric Parking Brake ................................223 Hill Start Assist ............................................224 Hill Descent Control Principle of Operation ...............................230 Using Hill Descent Control ......................230 Parking Aids Principle of Operation ...............................232 Rear Parking Aid ..........................................232 3 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Table of Contents Active Park Assist .......................................233 Rear View Camera ......................................237 360 Degree Camera ..................................240 Roadside Emergencies Principle of Operation ...............................243 Using Cruise Control ..................................243 Using Adaptive Cruise Control ..............244 Roadside Assistance .................................320 Hazard Flashers ............................................321 Fuel Shutoff ...................................................321 Jump Starting the Vehicle ........................322 Post-Crash Alert System .........................324 Transporting the Vehicle ..........................324 Towing Points ...............................................325 Driving Aids Customer Assistance Driver Alert ......................................................251 Lane Keeping System ................................252 Blind Spot Information System ............256 Cross Traffic Alert .......................................260 Steering ..........................................................263 Pre-Collision Assist ....................................264 Drive Control ................................................268 Load Retaining Fixtures ............................270 Load Limit .......................................................271 Bed Access ....................................................275 Bed Ramps ....................................................276 Getting the Services You Need ..............327 In California (U.S. Only) ...........................328 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................329 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only) ......................330 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada .......................................................330 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature ........................................................................332 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) ........................................................................332 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only) ........................................................................332 Towing Fuses Towing a Trailer ............................................279 Trailer Reversing Aids .................................281 Trailer Sway Control ...................................291 Recommended Towing Weights ...........291 Essential Towing Checks .........................303 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......310 Maintenance Cruise Control Load Carrying Fuse Specification Chart .........................334 Changing a Fuse ..........................................342 General Information ..................................344 Opening and Closing the Hood .............344 Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................345 Under Hood Overview - 3.0L V6, Diesel ........................................................................346 Under Hood Overview - 3.3L Duratec V6 .................................................................347 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ........................................................................348 Under Hood Overview - 5.0L Modular V8 .................................................................348 Driving Hints Breaking-In .....................................................313 Economical Driving .....................................313 Off-Road Driving ..........................................314 Driving Through Water ...............................315 Floor Mats ......................................................316 Snowplowing .................................................317 4 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Table of Contents Engine Oil Dipstick - Gasoline ...............349 Engine Oil Dipstick - Diesel .....................350 Engine Oil Check - Gasoline ...................350 Engine Oil Check - Diesel ..........................351 Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................352 Engine Coolant Check ...............................353 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check ........................................................................357 Transfer Case Fluid Check .......................357 Brake Fluid Check .......................................358 Power Steering Fluid Check ...................358 Washer Fluid Check ...................................358 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap ......358 Fuel Filter - Diesel .......................................359 Fuel Filter - Gasoline .................................359 Changing the 12V Battery ........................359 Checking the Wiper Blades .....................361 Changing the Wiper Blades .....................361 Adjusting the Headlamps ........................362 Changing a Bulb ..........................................363 Bulb Specification Chart ..........................367 Changing the Engine Air Filter - Gasoline .......................................................................369 Changing the Engine Air Filter - Diesel .......................................................................369 Cleaning the Wheels .................................378 Vehicle Storage ............................................378 Body Styling Kits ........................................380 Wheels and Tires General Information ...................................381 Tire Care .........................................................383 Using Snow Chains ....................................397 Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........398 Changing a Road Wheel .........................404 Technical Specifications ...........................412 Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™ .........................................................................414 Engine Specifications - 3.0L V6, Diesel .........................................................................414 Engine Specifications - 3.3L Duratec V6 ..................................................................415 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .........................................................................415 Engine Specifications - 5.0L Modular V8 ..................................................................416 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ......417 Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L V6, Diesel .........417 Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L Duratec - V6 .........................................................................418 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ......419 Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L Modular - V8 .........................................................................419 Vehicle Identification Number ..............420 Vehicle Certification Label .......................421 Transmission Code Designation ...........422 Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™ ...............................................423 Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L V6, Diesel ...........................................................427 Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L Duratec - V6 ..............................................431 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ...............................................436 Vehicle Care General Information ...................................372 Cleaning Products .......................................372 Cleaning the Exterior ..................................372 Waxing ............................................................374 Cleaning the Engine ...................................374 Cleaning the Exhaust ................................374 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades ........................................................................375 Cleaning the Interior ...................................375 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens .......................376 Cleaning Leather Seats .............................377 Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............378 5 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Table of Contents Capacities and Specifications - 5.0L Modular - V8 .............................................441 Ford Protect Ford Protect .................................................558 Audio System Scheduled Maintenance General Information ..................................447 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD .......................................................................448 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ SYNC Without Touchscreen ..............453 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ Touchscreen Display .............................454 Digital Radio .................................................456 Satellite Radio .............................................458 USB Port .........................................................461 General Maintenance Information ......560 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........563 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance ............................................566 Scheduled Maintenance Record ...........573 Appendices Electromagnetic Compatibility .............584 End User License Agreement ................586 Type Approvals .............................................612 SYNC™ General Information ..................................462 Using Voice Recognition ..........................463 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........465 SYNC™ Applications and Services ......466 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player ........................................................................470 SYNC™ Troubleshooting ..........................471 SYNC™ 3 General Information ..................................479 Home Screen ...............................................490 Using Voice Recognition ...........................491 Entertainment .............................................498 Climate ..........................................................508 Phone ..............................................................510 Navigation ......................................................516 Apps ................................................................524 Settings ...........................................................527 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ......................541 Accessories Accessories ...................................................555 6 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E154903 A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Air conditioning system Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased. E162384 E231157 Air conditioning system lubricant type Anti-lock braking system Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Battery Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle. Battery acid This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum based Brake system 7 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction Brake system Flammable E231160 E270480 Cabin air filter Front airbag E67017 Check fuel cap Front fog lamps Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers Cruise control Heated rear window Do not open when hot Windshield defrosting system Engine air filter Interior luggage compartment release Engine coolant Jack Engine coolant temperature Keep out of reach of children E71340 E161353 Lighting control Engine oil Low tire pressure warning Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level Fan warning Note operating instructions Fasten seatbelt E71880 8 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction Horn control Shield the eyes E270945 E167012 Panic alarm Stability control E138639 Hill descent control Parking aid E139213 E163957 Trail control Parking brake E271982 Windshield wiping system Power steering fluid E270969 Windshield wash and wipe Power windows front/rear Power window lockout DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Requires registered technician Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada in Canada), and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, (for example, your contact information), to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such E231159 Safety alert See Owner's Manual See Service Manual E231158 Service engine soon Passenger airbag activated E270849 Passenger airbag deactivated E270850 Side airbag 9 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data. We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you products and services that may interest you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to legal requirements in Canada, the United States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries. See SYNC™ 3 (page 479). The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and • How fast the vehicle was traveling; and • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read 10 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ 3 (page 479). PERCHLORATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See SYNC™ 3 (page 479). For more information visit: Web Address www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate FORD CREDIT US Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. We offer a number of convenient ways for you to contact us, and to manage your account. Call 1-800-727-7000. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want For more information about Ford Credit and access to Account Manager, go to www.ford.com/finance. 11 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford parts. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual. One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. Collision Repairs WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back. 12 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector Using your vehicle with a snowplow See Snowplowing (page 317). Using your vehicle as an ambulance WARNING: Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector. Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle does not have the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Using a Slide-In Camper For information regarding the use of slide-in campers, consult the Truck Camper Loading document supplied with your vehicle. Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming services. Installing an aftermarket device that uses the DLC during normal driving for purposes such as remote insurance company monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to other devices or entities, or altering the performance of the vehicle, may cause interference with or even damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will not cover damage caused by an aftermarket plug-in device. Note: We do not recommend using a slide-in camper on an F-150 SuperCrew. MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate your vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death. 13 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Introduction communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. 14 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Environment PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT You should play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. For details about Ford Motor Company's sustainability progress and initiatives visit: Web Address www.sustainability.ford.com 15 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing At a Glance INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW E178396 A Wiper lever. See Windshield Wipers (page 88). G Information and entertainment display. B Information display controls. See General Information (page 112). H 360 degree parking aid camera button. See 360 Degree Camera (page 240). C Instrument cluster. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 107). I Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 142). J D Audio controls. See Audio Control (page 84). Auxiliary power point. See Auxiliary Power Points (page 165). E Audio system. See Audio System (page 447). K F Hill descent control. See Using Hill Descent Control (page 230). Integrated trailer brake controller. See Essential Towing Checks (page 303). L Four-wheel drive control. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 212). 16 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing At a Glance M Start button. See Keyless Starting (page 170). N Voice control. See Voice Control (page 85). O Cruise control switches. See Cruise Control (page 85). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). P Electric parking brake switch. See Electric Parking Brake (page 223). Q Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 90). Front fog lamps. See Front Fog Lamps (page 93). Instrument Lighting Dimmer See Instrument Lighting Dimmer (page 91). Spot Lamps See Spot Lamps (page 94). 17 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION Technician (CPST) to make sure that you properly install the child restraint in your vehicle and that you consult your pediatrician to make sure you have a child restraint appropriate for your child. To locate a child restraint fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in child restraints made especially for their height, age and weight, may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, base their recommendations for child restraints on probable child height, age and weight thresholds, or on the minimum requirements of the law. We recommend that you check with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. 18 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Infants or toddlers Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than Larger children 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer). • • • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada. Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 49). Recommended restraint type Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seatback upright. INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Child Seats E142594 19 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child restraint and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. • Place the vehicle seat upon which the child restraint will be installed in the upright position. • Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking mode. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab) WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. Perform the following steps when installing the child restraint with combination lap and shoulder belts: Note: Although the child restraint illustrated is a forward facing child restraint, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child restraint. WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. E142528 1. 20 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Child Safety E142529 E142531 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Make sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E142875 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until you pull all of the seatbelt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 21 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety 7. Try to pull the seatbelt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. E142533 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle helps to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab) WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 22 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. E162708 2. Slide the tongue up the webbing. WARNING: Always use both the lap and shoulder portion of the seatbelt in the center seating position. The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. The seatbelt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. E142530 3. While holding both shoulder and lap portions next to the tongue, route the tongue and webbing through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure that the belt webbing is not twisted. E142528 1. Position the child safety seat in the front center seat. E142531 23 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. 9. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the lap and shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt tight during a crash. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. E142533 Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear Seat Outermost Positions) (If 5. While pushing down with your knee on the child restraint, pull up on the shoulder belt portion to tighten the lap belt portion of the combination lap and shoulder belt. 6. Allow the seatbelt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle. 7. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). Equipped) E142528 1. E142534 24 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. Child Safety E146523 E146522 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E146524 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the lap portion of the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward until you pull all of the belt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. 25 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks the child restraint for installation. The ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely is normal, even after the lap belt has been put into the automatic locking mode. Note: The lock-off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock-off device. In some instances, these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with seatbelt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. E146525 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling down on the lap belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is 26 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors where the vehicle seat backrest and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor behind that seating position. WARNING: Do not attach two child safety restraints to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety restraint attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint. However, the seatbelt can still be used to attach the child restraint if the lower anchors are not used. For forward-facing child restraints, the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with your child restraint. WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child restraint installation at the following seating positions (LATCH is not available on Regular Cab): Crew Cab and Super Cab E166694 27 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety compatible child restraints (with attachments on belt webbing) can only be used at this seating position provided that the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent child restraint is attached to that anchor. Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child restraint from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation. E166695 The lower LATCH anchors are at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat backrest. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child restraint with LATCH attachments. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child restraint only to the anchors shown. When used in combination, either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child restraint. Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outermost Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) Using Tether Straps WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child restraint for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle. The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 25.7 in (652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. You cannot install achild restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the center seating position. LATCH 28 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety The passenger seats of your vehicle may have built-in tether strap anchors behind the seats. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the seat backrest or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the seat cushion. Regular Cab The rear seat in the Crew Cab and Super Cab has three straps along the top of the seat back that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops. E166696 Crew Cab and Super Cab E166697 Once you have installed the child safety seat using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Regular Cab) If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child restraint off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping the child restraint just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. 1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat and under the head restraint. Note: For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seat backrest. 29 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew Cab and Super Cab) 2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. You may need to pull the seat backrest forward to access the tether anchors. Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before installing the child restraint. 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor. 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. Regular Cab passenger and center seats (on back panel) E167009 There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat (along the bottom edge of the rear window). Use these loops as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child safety seat tether straps. For example, you can use the center loop as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child restraints installed in the outermost rear seats. E175295 If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a crash. Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child restraint. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. To provide a tight tether strap: If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. E162715 30 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). 1. Route the vehicle tether loop between the head restraint posts, then route the child restraint tether strap through the loop, forward of the head restraint. 2. Hook the strap to the vehicle tether anchor loop in the adjacent seating position. If using the driver side, pass the strap behind the shoulder belt for the center seat. Always put the tether strap through the routing loop. The head restraint support post holds the child restraint tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong enough to hold the child restraint during a crash. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. BOOSTER SEATS E142595 • WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. • • • Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. • Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat backrest with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. 31 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety Types of Booster Seats E70710 • E68924 • High back booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat backrest or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat backrest or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat. Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E142596 32 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety E142597 If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child's height. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 33 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Child Safety WARNING: Properly secure child restraints or booster seats when they are not in use. They could become projectiles in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X Restraint Type Combined Weight of Child and Child Restraint LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor) Rear facing Up to 65 lb child (29.5 kg) restraint LATCH (Lower Anchors Only) Seatbelt and Top Tether Anchor Seatbelt and LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor) X X Rear facing Over 65 lb child (29.5 kg) restraint Forward facing child restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) Forward facing child restraint Over 65 lb (29.5 kg) Seatbelt Only X X 34 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing X X X X Child Safety Note: The child restraint must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 150). CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped) When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. E112197 The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 35 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death. WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident. WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. The safety belt system consists of: • Lap and shoulder safety belts. • Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver safety belt). • Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions. • Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions. 36 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts E71880 • Safety belt warning light and chime. E67017 • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. The safety belt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts when activated. In frontal and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt pretensioners may be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. In side crashes and rollovers, the pretensioners will be activated when the Safety Canopy is activated. E142588 2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue (Front Center Seat) The cinch tongue slides up and down the seatbelt webbing when you stow the belt or when you put the seatbelts on. When you buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt, the cinch tongue allows you to shorten the lap portion, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always wear the shoulder belt properly and do not allow any slack in either the lap or shoulder portions. FASTENING THE SEATBELTS Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. Before you can reach and latch a lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it. E142587 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue in the buckle. 37 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts While you are fastened in the seatbelt, the lap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the seatbelt locks and helps reduce your forward movement. Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and properly fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the seatbelt snugly and low across the hips. Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant women must follow this practice. See the following figure. E162708 1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some seatbelt webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor. 2. While holding the webbing below the tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue up. 3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle. Fastening the Cinch Tongue WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. 1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt crosses your shoulder and chest. 2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist. 3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. 4. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue to the buckle by pulling on the tongue. E142590 Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. 38 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts Seatbelt Locking Modes Automatic Locking Mode In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically pre-locks. The belt still retracts to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seatbelt. WARNING: If your vehicle is involved in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use this mode any time you install a child safety seat in a front outboard passenger seating position in a Regular Cab, SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seating position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The optional front seat center seatbelt has a cinch mechanism. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in a rear seat whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 18). All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver seatbelt has the first type of locking mode, and the front outboard passenger and rear seat seatbelts have both types of locking modes described as follows: Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly, turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination seatbelts lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Non-inflatable seatbelts In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat backrest or push the seat backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. E142591 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until you pull the entire belt out. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. 39 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the second-row outboard seating positions. Rear Outboard Inflatable Seatbelts Second Row Only– If Equipped Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are compatible with most infant and child safety car seats and belt positioning booster seats when properly installed. This is because they are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a slower rate than traditional airbags. After inflation, the shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool to the touch. The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the following: • An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt webbing. • Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic locking mode. • The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front seatbelts. • Impact sensors in various parts of the vehicle. E146363 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull upward until you pull the entire belt out. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. How does the rear inflatable seatbelt system work? How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped) The rear inflatable seatbelts function like standard restraints in everyday usage. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 40 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjuster so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a crash. E146364 During a crash of sufficient force, the inflatable belt inflates from inside the webbing. E145664 Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. To adjust the shoulder belt height: E146365 1. Pull the button and slide the height adjuster up or down. 2. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. The fully inflated belt's increased diameter more effectively holds the occupant in the appropriate seating position, and spreads crash forces over more area of the body than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on the chest and helps control head and neck motion for passengers. SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes, rollovers and some side impact crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the E71880 driver seatbelt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. 41 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts Conditions of operation If Then The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe warning chime sounds for a few tion... seconds. The driver seatbelt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding... The seatbelt warning light and warning chime turn off. The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position... The seatbelt warning light and indicator chime remain off. The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place in the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system. SEATBELT REMINDER Belt-Minder™ This feature supplements the seatbelt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the seatbelt warning light when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is unbuckled. If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder feature to turn on. 42 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts If Then You and the front seat passenger buckle your seatbelts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. The Belt-Minder feature activates, the You or the front seat passenger do not seatbelt warning light illuminates and a buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every minutes elapse after you switch the ignition 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger on... buckle your seatbelts. The Belt-Minder feature activates, the The seatbelt for the driver or front seatbelt warning light illuminates and a passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger elapse after you switch the ignition on... buckle your seatbelts. Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure. WARNING: While the system allows you to deactivate it, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P). • The ignition is off. • The driver and front passenger seatbelt is unbuckled. 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the engine. 2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light turns off (about one minute). After Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 30 seconds. Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process. Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the Belt-Minder has been previously disabled, it will be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 62). 43 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts 3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light turns on. 4. While the seatbelt warning light is on, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt. After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light flashes for confirmation. • This switches the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on. • This switches the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off. We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle Care (page 372). SEATBELT EXTENSION CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT MAINTENANCE WARNING: Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash. Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child restraint seatbelts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat backrest (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. WARNING: Only use extensions provided free of charge by Ford Motor Company dealers. The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt restraint system. WARNING: Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints. WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt extension with an inflatable seatbelt. WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the belt across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach. 44 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seatbelts If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelts manufacturer should be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint system. 45 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Personal Safety System™ The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations. The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists of: • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. • Front seat outboard seatbelts with pretensioners, energy management retractors and seatbelt usage sensors. • Driver seat position sensor. • Front passenger sensing system. • Passenger airbag status indicator. • Front crash severity sensors. • Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. • Restraint system warning lamp and tone. • The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights. How Does the Personal Safety System Work? The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of the safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions. 46 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To avoid risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation. WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 47 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • driver and passenger airbag modules. • front passenger sensing system. DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS · crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury. WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. E151127 48 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System Children and Airbags FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system. This could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. E142846 Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving your vehicle. This provides lap and shoulder belt protection for all occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. A child or infant properly restrained in the center front seat should not incur risk of serious injury from the airbags. E181984 The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator which illuminates indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either on (enabled) or off (disabled). The indicator lamp is in the center stack of the instrument panel. Note: When you first switch the ignition on, the passenger airbag status indicator off and on lamps illuminate for a short period to confirm it is functional. 49 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions: • The front passenger seat is unoccupied. • The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint. • A passenger takes their weight off of the seat for a period of time. • If there is a problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the passenger airbag status indicator off lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Switch your vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in an upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended. • Restart your vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This allows the system to detect that person and enable the passenger frontal airbag. • If the indicator off lamp remains lit even after this, you should advise the person to ride in the rear seat. Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. • • When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the off lamp and stays lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. If you have installed the child restraint and the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the on lamp, then switch your vehicle off, remove the child restraint from your vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Note: When the passenger airbag status indicator off lamp illuminates, the passenger side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment issues. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases. The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and seatbelt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled. • If you think that the state of the passenger airbag status indicator lamp is incorrect, check for the following: • Objects lodged underneath the seat. • Objects between the seat cushion and the center console. When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger airbag status indicator illuminates the on lamp and remains illuminated. 50 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System • • • • • • • Objects hanging off the seat backrest. Objects stowed in the seat backrest map pocket. Objects placed on the occupant's lap. Cargo interference with the seat Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat. Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat. • Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster is no longer illuminated. If the airbag readiness light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated, this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system. Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer. The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the previous list. If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact your Customer Relationship Center. SIDE AIRBAGS Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the following: The driver and adult passengers should check for objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat. If objects are lodged or cargo is interfering with the seat, please take the following steps to remove the obstruction: • Pull your vehicle over. • Switch your vehicle off. • Driver or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat. • Remove the obstruction(s) (if found). • Restart your vehicle. WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. 51 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. E67017 • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat. WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes. SAFETY CANOPY™ WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. E152533 WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. • Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seatbacks. • Front passenger sensing system. 52 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag. E75004 WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The system consists of the following: • Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment The Safety Canopy deploys during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with a readiness E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 54). Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening. The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). 53 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Supplementary Restraints System If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including hood, bumper system, frame, front end body structure, tow hooks and hood pins) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify or add equipment to the front end of your vehicle. The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration). • The design of the seatbelt pretensioners and rear inflatable seatbelts is to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. • The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. • The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors that provide information to the restraints control module which deploys (activates) the front seatbelt pretensioners, optional rear inflatable seatbelts, driver airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy®. Based on the type of crash, the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices. The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See Instrument Cluster (page 104). Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: E67017 • • The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after you switch the ignition on. AIRBAG DISPOSAL The readiness light either flashes or stays lit. A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern repeats periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. 54 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Keys and Remote Controls Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES Note: If you are in range, the remote control still operates if you press any button unintentionally. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Intelligent Access (If Equipped) The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met: • You touch the inside of the front exterior door handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an intelligent access key. • You press the tailgate release button. • You press a button on the remote control. Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the remote control battery is low, you may need to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. See Remote Control (page 55). The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range: • Weather conditions. • Nearby radio towers. • Structures around the vehicle. • Other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If Other short-distance radio transmitters, such as amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems may operate on the same frequency as your remote control. If other transmitters are operating on those frequencies, you may not be able to use your remote control. Using your remote control near some types of electronic equipment, such as USB devices, computers or cell phones can interfere with remote operation. Operating your remote control near metal or metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can interfere with remote operation. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Equipped) Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside your vehicle. The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts your vehicle, as well as a remote control. 55 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Keys and Remote Controls E191532 Press the button to release the key blade. Press and hold the button to fold the key blade back in when not in use. E218399 The intelligent access keys operate the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in your vehicle to use the push button start. Removable Key Blade E151795 The intelligent access key also contains a removable key blade that you can use to unlock your vehicle. Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped) Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle. 56 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Keys and Remote Controls A message appears in the information display when the remote control battery is low. See General Information (page 112). Integrated Keyhead Transmitter The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery. Press the button to release the key blade before beginning the procedure. E218400 Press the release button and pull the key blade out. E191533 1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and gently push the clip. 2. Press the clip down to release the battery cover. E151795 Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Replacing the Battery Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. E151799 3. Carefully remove the cover. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally. 57 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Keys and Remote Controls E151800 Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to release the battery. E218400 1. E151801 5. Remove the battery. 6. Install a new battery with the + facing up. 7. Replace the battery cover. Intelligent Access Key The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery. 58 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Push the release button and pull the key blade out. Keys and Remote Controls E218402 3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and carefully remove the battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + facing upward. 5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter and install the key blade. E218401 2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover. Car Finder Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn sounds and the direction indicators flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm. E138623 Sounding a Panic Alarm Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off. Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again or E138624 switch the ignition on to deactivate. 59 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Keys and Remote Controls Remote Start (If Equipped) WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that are not well ventilated. Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low. The remote start button is on the transmitter. E138625 LED Status Solid green Remote start successful Solid red Remote stop successful Blinking red Request failed or status not received Blinking green Status incomplete Remote Starting your Vehicle This feature allows you to start your vehicle from the outside. The transmitter has an extended operating range. Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. If you do not follow this sequence, your vehicle does not start remotely, the direction indicators do not flash twice and the horn does not sound. If your vehicle has automatic climate control, you can configure it to operate when you remote start your vehicle. See Climate Control (page 142). A manual climate control system will run at the setting it was set to when you switched your vehicle off. Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems. E138626 The remote start system does not work if: • The ignition is on. • The alarm system triggers. • You disable the feature. • The hood is open. • The transmission is not in park (P). • The vehicle battery voltage is too low. • The service engine soon light is on. To remote start your vehicle: 1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors. 2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps flash twice. The horn sounds if the system fails to start. Note: You must press the push button ignition switch on the instrument panel once while applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped) The power windows do not work during remote start and the radio does not turn on automatically. An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands. 60 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Keys and Remote Controls The parking lamps remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on the setting. Extending the Engine Running Time To extend the engine running time duration of your vehicle during remote start, repeat steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the duration extends by another 15 minutes. For example, if your vehicle had been running from the first remote start for 10 minutes, your vehicle continues to run now for a total of 30 minutes. You can extend the engine running time duration to a maximum of 30 minutes. Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after the engine stops running. Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote Starting E138625 Press the button once. Your vehicle and the parking lamps turn off. You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of your running vehicle. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. Memory Feature You can program your intelligent access key to recall memory positions. See Memory Function (page 156). REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77). 61 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing MyKey™ (If Equipped) PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. • Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as administrator keys or admin keys. They can be used to: • Create a MyKey. • Program configurable MyKey settings. • Clear all MyKey features. Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid, blind spot information system (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane departure warning and forward collision warning system. Satellite radio adult content restrictions (available only in some markets). Note: When you switch lane departure warning off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle. Configurable Settings When you have programmed a MyKey, you can access the following information using the information display: • How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle. • The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey. With an admin key, you can configure certain MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the vehicle. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key: • A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings will be shown in the display, followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal or by setting cruise control. Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings. You cannot program them individually. Note: For vehicles equipped with a push-button start switch: When both a MyKey and an admin key are present when you start your vehicle, the system recognizes the admin key only. WARNING: Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury. Non-configurable Settings The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user: • Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. You cannot disable this feature. The audio system will mute when the front seat occupants’ safety belts are not fastened. • Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is activated earlier, giving the MyKey user more time to refuel. 62 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing MyKey™ (If Equipped) • • • You can program the configurable features now or at any time. You can advance through the settings without programming them by pressing the OK button. MyKey then keeps all of the default settings. Various vehicle speed reminders so you know when your vehicle approaches the limits. Warnings appear in the information display and an audible warning sounds when you exceed the limit. Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be disabled. Always on setting. When this is selected, you will not be able to turn off Advance Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is equipped with these features). When you finish programming your MyKey, the Type 3 information display adds a confirmation screen, New MyKey Has Been Created. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close the driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. Programming/Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to program or change your configurable MyKey settings. 1. Place your admin key into the ignition or, if your vehicle is equipped with keyless start, place your admin transmitter into the backup position. Details on the backup position's location are in another chapter. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77). 2. Depending on your display options, select either Settings or Advanced Settings, then MyKey and finally to various configurable features. 3. Scroll down through the choices, and then highlight the feature you want to configure. CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey. To create a MyKey: 1. Place your key into the ignition or, if your vehicle is equipped with keyless start, place your transmitter into the backup position. Details on the backup position's location are in another chapter. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77). 2. Switch the ignition on. 3. Access the main menu using your left-hand-side steering wheel controls. 4. Depending on your display options, select either Settings or Advanced Settings, then MyKey and finally Create MyKey. 5. When the menu reads Hold OK to Create MyKey, press and hold the OK button to program a MyKey. 6. The display then prompts you to program the Configurable settings. Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you have switched the engine off, however, you will need an admin key to change or clear your MyKey settings. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close the driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. 63 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing MyKey™ (If Equipped) To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display and the left-hand-side steering wheel controls: 1. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey and finally Clear MyKeys. 2. Press and hold OK. 3. When you finish clearing all MyKeys, the Type 3 information display adds a confirmation screen, MyKey Cleared. CLEARING ALL MYKEYS You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you switch your ignition off, however, you will need to use an admin key to clear your MyKeys. Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once. CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS You can find information on programmed MyKey(s) using the information display control on the steering wheel. See Information Displays (page 112). To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to: Message Description Settings Press the OK button. MyKey Press the OK button. Select one of the following: MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey. {0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted. {0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed. 64 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing MyKey™ (If Equipped) Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system. USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS MyKey is not compatible with non MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Condition I cannot create a MyKey. Potential Causes • • • • I cannot program the configurable settings. • • I cannot clear the MyKeys. • • I lost the only admin key. The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at least one admin key). Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup position. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77). SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 63). The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 63). Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer. 65 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing MyKey™ (If Equipped) Condition Potential Causes I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 77). MyKey distances do not accumulate. • • • No MyKey functions with the keyless entry transmitter. • • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey. An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. The key system has been reset. An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start. No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 63). 66 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Doors and Locks Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking allows your entire vehicle to unlock with one press of the button. LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your doors and tailgate. See Tailgate (page 72). Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks your entire vehicle when you disable two-stage unlocking. Power Door Locks (If Equipped) The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. Locking the Vehicle E138623 Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators flash. Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors lock again, the horn sounds and the direction indicators flash if all the doors are closed. E138628 A Unlock. Mislock B Lock. If any door is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice and the direction indicators do not flash. Remote Control (If Equipped) You can use the remote control at any time your vehicle is not running. Activating Intelligent Access (If Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-Stage Unlock) General Information Equipped) You can unlock and lock the vehicle without taking the keys out of your pocket or purse when your intelligent access key is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access uses a sensor on the back of the door handle for unlocking and a separate sensor on the face of each door handle for locking. Press the button to unlock the driver door. Press the button E138629 again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators flash. The direction indicators flash twice to confirm the change. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent access. The system does not function if: • Your vehicle battery has no charge. • The key battery has no charge. • The key frequencies are jammed. 67 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Doors and Locks Note: The system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. At the Electronic Tailgate (If Equipped) Note: If the system does not function, use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. See Remote Control (page 55). Unlocking Using Intelligent Access E187693 E248555 Press the exterior tailgate release button inside of the tailgate handle. The tailgate unlocks and opens. See Electronic Tailgate (page 72). With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle for a brief period and then pull on the door handle to unlock, being careful to not touch the lock sensor at the same time or pulling the door handle too quickly. The intelligent access system requires a brief delay to authenticate your intelligent access key fob. Smart Unlock (If Equipped) This feature helps to prevent you from locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. If you leave your key in the ignition, when you open the driver door and lock your vehicle with the power door lock control, the doors lock then unlock. Locking Using Intelligent Access You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition by: • Using the manual lock on the inside of the door. • Locking the driver door with a key. • Using the keyless entry keypad. • Using the lock button on the remote control. E248556 With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock sensor for approximately one second to lock, being careful to not touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle at the same time. After locking, you can immediately pull on the door handle to confirm locking occurred without inadvertently unlocking. Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) This feature helps to prevent you from locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. Note: Do not use the outside door handle as a roof cargo strap. 68 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Doors and Locks Autounlock When you lock your vehicle using the power door lock control (with the door open, vehicle in park and ignition off), your vehicle searches for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment after you close the door. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors immediately unlock. Autounlock unlocks all the doors when: • The ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to the accessory position. • You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to accessory. In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle, you can lock your vehicle after all doors are closed by using the keyless entry keypad, pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key or touching the locking area on the handle with another intelligent access key in your hand. Note: The doors do not autounlock if you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door. When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors lock then unlock if the ignition is on. Enabling or Disabling Autounlock You can enable or disable the autounlock feature in the information display or an authorized dealer can do it for you. See General Information (page 112). Autolock (If Equipped) Autolock locks all the doors when: • All doors are closed. • The ignition is on. • You shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote entry system. The illuminated entry system turns off the lights if: • The ignition is on. • You press the remote control lock button. • After 25 seconds of illumination. Autolock repeats when: • You open then close any door while the ignition is on and your vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). The dome lamp does not turn on if the control is set to the off position. The lights do not turn off if: • You switch them on with the dimmer control. • Any door is open. 69 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Doors and Locks Battery Saver You can operate the keypad with the factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of your own five-digit personal entry codes. The battery saver turns off the interior lamps 30 minutes after you switch off the ignition if a door is open and the dome lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp switch is off. Programming a Personal Entry Code Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) To create your own personal entry code: SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD (if Equipped) 1. Enter the factory-set code. 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You must enter each number within five seconds of each other. 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal code one. The keypad is near the driver window and illuminates when you touch it. The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful. Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock function may not work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly. To Program additional personal entry codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step4: • Press 3·4 to save personal code two. • Press 5·6 to save personal code three. • Press 7·8 to save personal code four. • Press 9·0 to save personal code five. If you leave the ignition on after leaving your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after you close all of the doors. KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped) Tips: • Do not set a code that uses five of the same number. • Do not use five numbers in sequential order. • The factory-set code will work even if you have set your own personal code. E190936 Erasing a Personal Code You can use the keypad to: • Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. • Program and erase user codes. • Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2. 70 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Doors and Locks All personal codes erase and only the factory-set five-digit code will work. Anti-Scan Feature The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash. The anti-scan feature will turn off after: • One minute of keypad inactivity. • Pressing the unlock button on the remote control. • Switching the ignition on. • Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access. Unlocking and Locking the Doors To Unlock the Driver Door Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your personal code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other. The interior lamps illuminate. Note: All doors unlock if you disable the two-stage unlocking feature. See General Information (page 112). To Unlock All Doors Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 3·4 control within five seconds. To Lock All Doors Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time with the driver door closed. You do not need to enter the keypad code first. To Release the Tailgate (If Equipped) Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 5·6 control within five seconds. 71 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Tailgate ELECTRONIC TAILGATE (If TAILGATE LOCK Equipped) The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of the tailgate. WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a safety belt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. E224958 The electronic tailgate release will not operate when: • The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. • The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h). Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock. Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turn it to the right to unlock the tailgate. MANUAL TAILGATE (If Equipped) With the Remote Control Press the remote control button twice within three seconds. E191530 With the Outside Control Button 1. E187692 1. Unlock the tailgate. 2. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle to release the tailgate. 72 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or power door unlock control. If an intelligent access transmitter is within 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, the tailgate will unlock when you press the tailgate release button. Tailgate E187693 E189556 2. Press the button in the top of the tailgate handle. 3. Push the tailgate up to close the tailgate. Note: The electronic tailgate is not a powered tailgate. The use of a tonneau cover or other aftermarket accessories, freezing conditions or being parked downhill may stop your tailgate from opening automatically after it is unlatched. You may need to pull the handle to open the tailgate if the tailgate does not automatically lower after being unlatched. 1. Locate and disconnect the power door locks in-line connector. It is under the pickup box on the right-hand side of the vehicle near the spare tire. 2. There is a protective cap in the glove box. Install it on the in-line connector that remains under the pickup box. 3. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully feed the tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup box and the bumper and place it out of the way under the pickup box. 4. Lower the tailgate. REMOVING THE TAILGATE WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling from the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle occupants or others. You can remove the tailgate for more loading room. E163092 5. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw. Disconnect the cable. 6. Disconnect the other cable. Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does not have power door locks. 73 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Tailgate 7. Lift the tailgate to 45 degrees from horizontal. 8. Lift the right side off its hinge. 9. Lift the tailgate to 80 degrees from horizontal. 10. Remove the tailgate from the left side hinge by sliding it to the right. Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate. TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped) E187718 3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the step to its lowest position. Use the step to make entering the truck bed easier. To reduce the risk of falling: • Only operate the step when your vehicle is on a level surface. • Only operate the step in areas with sufficient lighting. • Always open the step panel to widen the step. • Always use the grab handle when climbing on the step. • Do not use the step with bare feet. • Make sure the step is clean before use. • Keep the step load, you plus the load, below 350 lb (159 kg). E189557 4. Pull the yellow handle stop backward out of the tailgate until it fully extends. 5. Rotate the handle up from horizontal to vertical until you hear a click. You have locked the handle in place. Note: Do not tow with the step or grab handle. Opening the Step Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the step before moving your vehicle. Do not drive with the step or grab handle open. 1. Lower the tailgate. 2. Push the button in the center of the step molding. The step pops out slightly. Replace the slip resistance tape or grab handle molding if it appears as worn or damaged. 74 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Tailgate Closing the Step 1. Press the yellow button on the telescoping handle to lower the handle, then press the yellow lever at the bottom of the handle to unlock the handle. Rotate the handle down from vertical to horizontal and push it into the tailgate. 2. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal, then push it back into the tailgate until the step is secure. E163096 2. Open the latches to release the panels. BED EXTENDER (If Equipped) Note: Do not use the bed extender when driving off road. Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins and knobs fully before driving your vehicle. Note: Make sure to secure all cargo. Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on the tailgate when your vehicle is moving. Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the tailgate mode when you are not using it for restraining cargo. Always keep the bed extender in the grocery mode or the stowed position with the tailgate closed. E163097 3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate. Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of your vehicle. Tailgate Mode E163098 E163095 1. 4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels. Pull the locking pin toward the center of your vehicle. 75 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Tailgate E163099 5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage both sides of the locking pins into their holes in the pick-up box. Reverse the steps to store the bed extender. Grocery Mode E163100 Follow Steps 1-4 of the Tailgate Mode instructions by rotating the panels away from the tailgate. Close the tailgate. 76 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Security PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (If Equipped) Replacement Keys Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key. It operates all the locks, starts the vehicle and acts as a remote control. Note: Your vehicle may have two integrated keyhead transmitters. If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys. Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting problems if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine if a problem occurs. Store an extra programmed key away from your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. Contact an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter SecuriLock™ Note: You can program a maximum of six coded keys to your vehicle. All six can be integrated keyhead transmitters. The system is an engine immobilization system. It helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded key programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting. A message may appear in the information display. You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure programs both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle. If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, the system has malfunctioned. A message may appear in the information display. Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys. Automatic Arming You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available. The system arms immediately after you switch the ignition off. Automatic Disarming Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the system. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 77 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Security 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds until you hear the door locks cycle. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition. Note: If your programmed transmitters are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys. Store an extra programmed key away from your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconvenience. Contact an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys. You must have two previously programmed intelligent access keys inside your vehicle and the new unprogrammed intelligent access keys readily accessible. Contact an authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed keys are not available. Make sure that your vehicle is off before beginning this procedure. Make sure that you close all the doors before beginning and that they remain closed throughout the procedure. Perform all steps within 30 seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and wait for at least one minute before starting again if you perform any steps out of sequence. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. The key starts the engine if programming is successful. You can operate the remote entry system if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter. If programming was not successful, wait 20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer. Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key Note: You can program a maximum of four intelligent access keys to your vehicle. 78 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Security Type One 2. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. 3. Remove the intelligent access key. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition. 4. Within 10 seconds, place a second programmed intelligent access key in the backup slot. Press the push button ignition switch. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition. 5. Wait five seconds and then press the push button ignition switch again. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. 6. Remove the intelligent access key. Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition. 7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent access key in the backup slot and press the push button ignition switch. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition. E244507 Type Two Programming is now complete. Verify the remote control functions operate and your vehicle starts with the new intelligent access key. If programming was not successful, wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer. E187577 1. Place the first programmed key in the backup slot (A) in the center console, then press the push button ignition switch. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition. 79 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Security Note: For correct operation of the interior motion detection system, make sure you close all the windows prior to arming the system. This helps prevent accidental alarm activation due to external influences. Additionally, the interior motion sensing system does not arm if any door is ajar. ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped) The active anti-theft system is designed to warn you in the event of unauthorized vehicle entry and is also designed to help prevent unwanted towing of your vehicle. You can choose what is monitored by arming the system in different ways. See Information Displays (page 112). Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicle using the remote control or keyless entry keypad. You can also lock your vehicle using the lock sensor on the exterior door handle if your vehicle is equipped with intelligent access. See Locking and Unlocking (page 67). The direction indicators flash and the horn sounds if the system triggers while the alarm is armed. Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle. Using the System The direction indicators flash once after you lock your vehicle. This indicates the alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fully arms after 20 seconds. You can select two levels of alarm security. You can change the level of security when the ignition is switched off through the information display with the two options below: Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions: • Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed mode. • Unlock the doors with the remote control or keyless entry keypad. If equipped with intelligent access, you can use the unlock sensor on the exterior door handle. See Locking and Unlocking (page 67). • Switch the ignition on or start your vehicle. • Use a key in the driver door lock cylinder to unlock your vehicle, then switch the ignition on within 12 seconds. Reduced Guard (If Equipped) Reduced guard monitors the following: • Doors. • Hood. • Tailgate. Full Guard (If Equipped) Full guard monitors the following: • Doors. • Hood. • Tailgate. • Movement inside your vehicle. • Change in vehicle inclination, for example, unwanted towing. Note: Pressing the panic button on the remote control stops the horn and direction indicators, but does not disarm the system. Note: Do not choose full monitor mode when the vehicle is in transport or if movement within the vehicle is likely to occur. 80 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Power Running Boards (If Equipped) Automatic Power Deploy USING POWER RUNNING BOARDS WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Make sure that the running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before attempting to step on them. The running boards will resume normal function once the blockage is cleared. E166682 WARNING: Switch off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under your vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended running board and your vehicle. A moving running board may cause injury. The running boards automatically extend down and out when you open the door. This can help you enter and exit your vehicle. Automatic Power Stow Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies, running board motors, or the running board underbody mounts to lift your vehicle when jacking. Always use proper jacking points. When you close the doors, the running boards return to the stowed position after a two-second delay. Note: The running boards may operate more slowly in cool temperatures. You can manually operate the running boards in the information display. Note: The running board mechanism may trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. This may cause unwanted noise. If this happens, manually set the running boards to the deployed position. Then, wash the system, in particular the front and rear hinge arms, with a high-pressure car wash wand. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Manual Power Deploy Select Settings. Select Advanced Settings. Select Vehicle. Select Power Running Boards. Select your desired power running board setting. Set the running boards in the deployed position to access the roof. The running boards return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). 81 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Power Running Boards (If Equipped) Enabling and Disabling You can enable and disable the power running board feature in the information display. • • When disabled, the running boards move to the stowed position regardless of the door position. When enabled, the running boards move back to the correct positions based on the door position. Bounce-back The running board will reverse direction and move to the end of travel if it encounters an object while moving. 82 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 150). E261503 3. Lock the steering column. ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: POWER ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. E261502 Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 150). 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 83 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Steering Wheel Note: The steering column may begin to move again. 4. When the steering column stops, continue holding the control for a few seconds. 5. Repeat for each direction as necessary. A new stopping position sets. The next time you tilt or telescope the steering column, it stops just short of the end of the column position. Memory Feature You can save and recall the steering column position with the memory function. See Memory Function (page 156). E261582 Pressing the adjustment control during a memory recall cancels the operation. Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position. Easy Entry and Exit Feature To adjust: • Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the control. • Telescope: Press the front or rear of the control. The column moves up when you switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. See Information Displays (page 112). End of Travel Position Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column may move up and in. The steering column sets a stopping position just short of the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering column. A new stopping position sets if the steering column encounters an object when tilting or telescoping. AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped) You can operate the following functions with the control: To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position: 1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the motion of the steering column. 2. Press and hold the steering column control until the steering column stops moving. 3. Press the steering column control again. 84 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Steering Wheel VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped) E191327 A Volume up. B Media. C Seek up or next. D Volume down. E Seek down or previous. E191328 Media A Mute. B Voice recognition. C End call. D Answer or make a call. See your SYNC information. Press repeatedly to scroll through available audio modes. CRUISE CONTROL Seek, Next or Previous Type One Press the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band. • Seek through a track. E191329 See Using Cruise Control (page 243). 85 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Steering Wheel Type Two Note: You can use the heated steering wheel only when the engine is running. Note: The system uses a sensor and is designed to control the temperature of the steering wheel and to prevent it from overheating. Note: In warm temperatures, the steering wheel quickly reaches its maximum temperature and the system reduces the current to the heating element. This could cause you to think that the system has stopped working but it has not. This is normal. E248613 See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL E191336 See Information Displays (page 112). HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped) Switch the heated steering wheel on and off using the touchscreen. Touch the button to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. 86 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Pedals Horizontal Control ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If Equipped) WARNING: Never use the pedal adjustment controls when your feet are on the accelerator or brake pedal when the vehicle is moving. A Note: Adjust the pedals only when your vehicle is in park (P). E162916 Depending on your vehicle and equipment level, the shape and location of your power-adjustable pedal control can vary. • • B If your control is vertical, then it is to the left of the steering column and on the instrument panel. If your control is horizontal, then it is on the left side of the steering column. A. Farther. B. Closer. Both horizontal and vertical controls operate the same way: 1. Press and hold A to move the pedals away from you. 2. Press and hold B to move the pedals closer to you. Vertical Control You can save and recall the pedal positions with the memory feature. See Memory Function (page 156). E176213 A. Farther. B. Closer. 87 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: The courtesy wipe feature turns on after using the windshield washers to remove any excess washer fluid and debris. You can adjust the courtesy wipe settings in the instrument display. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing. E172817 E172816 • • Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield. Rotate away from you for a long wipe interval. Rotate toward you for a short wipe interval. Speed Dependent Wipers When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases. Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped) Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. 88 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wipers and Washers In these conditions, you can do the following: • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. • Switch autowipers off. WINDSHIELD WASHERS E172818 • • • A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid. A brief press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid. A long press and hold turns on the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds. A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. See Information Displays (page 112). Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This could cause the washer pump to overheat. 89 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in the Exterior Front Lamps and Rear Lamps Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. E142449 A Lamps off. B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and rear lamps. C Headlamps. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. Headlamp High Beam Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. E167827 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 90 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Lighting Flashing the Headlamp High Beam The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on. Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you cannot switch the high beams on until the system turns the low beams on. Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps When you switch the autolamps on, the headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of switching the wipers on. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. E163268 Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps. The headlamps do not turn on with the wipers: • During a single wipe. • When using the windshield washers. • If the wipers are in intermittent mode. AUTOLAMPS WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for example daytime fog. Note: If you switch the autolamps and the autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER E142451 When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps turn on in low light situations, or when the wipers turn on. E231828 91 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Lighting Press repeatedly or press and hold until you reach the desired level. The other lighting control switch positions do not turn on the daytime running lamps. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS If the daytime running lamps are off in the information display, the lamps stay off in all switch positions. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL (If Equipped) WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the high beams on or off. Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable) The system turns on high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system turns off high beams before they can distract other road users. Low beams remain on. The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. Switching the ignition on. 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 3. The lighting control is in the off, parking lamp or autolamps positions. 4. The headlamps are off. Note: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction or damage. Note: The system may not operate properly in cold or inclement conditions. You can switch on the high beams by overriding the system. Type Two - Configurable Switch the daytime running lamps on or off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 112). Note: If the system detects a blockage, for example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice, the system goes into low beam mode until you clear the blockage. A message may appear in the information display if the camera is blocked. The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The lamps are on in the information display. 2. Switching the ignition on. 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps position. 5. The headlamps are off. Note: Using much larger tires or equipping vehicle accessories such as snowplows can modify your vehicle's ride height and degrade automatic high beam control performance. 92 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Lighting Overriding the System A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to turn the high beams on and off. When you switch on the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk provides a temporary override to low beam. Once the system is active, the high beams turn on if: • The ambient light level is low enough. • There is no traffic in front of your vehicle. • The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (51 km/h). Automatic High Beam Indicator (If Equipped) The indicator lamp illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist. The high beams turn off if: • The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not required. • The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps. • The vehicle speed falls below approximately 27 mph (44 km/h). • The system detects severe rain, snow or fog. • The camera is blocked. FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped) Switching the System On and Off Switch the system on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 112). E210814 Press the button to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except off. E142451 Switch the lighting control to the autolamps position. See Autolamps (page 91). 93 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Lighting Adjust the aim of the spot lamps by moving the position of the exterior mirrors. DIRECTION INDICATORS For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aim of the lamps by folding the exterior mirrors into or away from the windows. For power-folding mirrors, use the switch on the driver-side door. Note: The spot lamps turn off when you reach a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps (If Equipped) The cargo lamps are in the central high mounted stop lamp, and to either side of the cargo box. E163272 Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators. The trailer hookup lamp is on the tailgate next to the handle. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times. Pressing the button in the lighting control panel or the E189587 button in the cargo box near the lamp turns on both of these lamps. SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped) The spot lamps are on the forward-facing side of the exterior mirrors. Switch on the spot lamps by pressing the buttons above the lighting control with the parking lamps on. E176842 When switching on the spot lamps, the area in front of and to the side of your vehicle illuminates. E190880 94 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Lighting If you switch on the cargo lamps, the cargo and trailer hitch area illuminate. Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps turn off when you reach a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also turn off after 10 minutes, fading gradually to off. C. Door function. D. Passenger map lamp. Type Two INTERIOR LAMPS The lamps turn on under the following conditions: • You open any door. • You press a remote control button. Front Interior Lamps Note: The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console. The exact location of each button on the overhead console depends upon your vehicle features. Note: Press the button to switch the door function off when you open any door. When the door function is off and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps stay off. D Note: Press the button again to switch the door function back on. When the door function is on and you open a door, the courtesy and door lamps turn on. E230569 Driver map lamp. B. All lamps on. B E192153 Type One A. A 95 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing A. All lamps on. B. Door function. C. All lamps off. D. Map lamps. C D Lighting Press the button to switch the lamps on or off. Type Three E187342 A. All lamps on. B. Door function. E182517 Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped) Type One E187343 Type Two E187345 96 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing A. Driver map lamp. B. Passenger map lamp. Windows and Mirrors Restoring the One-Touch Up Function POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped) You may lose the one-touch function if the vehicle battery is low. WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves. To reset the function after the battery recharges: 1. Pull the switch all the way up. 2. Hold the switch until the glass stops and continue to hold for two seconds. 3. Press the switch down and operate the window to the full down position. One-touch up will now be functional. Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration with the door closed. Calibrating with the door open will cause the window to continuously bounce back. WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. Bounce-Back (If Equipped) The window will automatically stop and reverse some distance if it detects an obstacle while closing. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature E176215 WARNING: When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. Press the control to open the window. Lift the control to close the window. Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no bounce-back protection. The window will stop if you release the switch before the window closes fully. One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped) Press or lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. Note: The window may disable for up to five minutes if you cycle it up and down repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to the motor. Normal operation will resume once the motor cools. 97 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Windows and Mirrors Window Lock (If Equipped) E144073 E176216 A Left-hand mirror. Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. B Adjustment control. C Right-hand mirror. Accessory Delay (If Equipped) To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then: 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The control lights. 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror control again. The control light turns off. The window switches remain operational for several minutes when you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. 98 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Windows and Mirrors Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped) The left-hand and right-hand mirrors move at different rates. For example, one mirror may stop while the other one continues to move. This is normal. Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control down during full travel, may disable the system to protect the motors from overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for function to return to normal. E277400 Loose Mirror This feature lets you extend the mirror about 3 in (75 mm). It is useful when towing a trailer. You can manually pull out or push in the mirrors to the desired position. If your power-folding mirrors are manually folded, they may not work properly even after you re-position them. You need to reset them if: • The mirrors vibrate when you drive. • The mirrors feel loose. • The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position. • One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position. Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped) To reset the power-fold feature, use the power-folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this process as needed each time the mirrors are manually folded. E176218 PowerScope™ Power Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped) To fold both mirrors, switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then: 1. Press the control. 2. Press control again to unfold the mirrors. This feature lets you position both mirrors at the same time. Note: Do not stop the mirrors midway through their movement. Wait until the mirrors stop moving and press the control again. 99 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Windows and Mirrors Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped) The driver exterior mirror automatically dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns on. Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped) While the vehicle is running, the forward-facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you switch on the direction indicator. E176218 Puddle Lamps (If Equipped) To adjust your mirrors, make sure you switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then: 1. Press and release the control. It lights. 2. Press the adjustment control to position the mirrors. • Press the left arrow to extend the mirrors out. Press the right arrow to retract the mirrors in. • Press the up or down arrow to fold the mirrors toward the window glass. Press the up or down arrow again to fold the mirrors out. The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror housing light when you use your transmitter to unlock the doors or when you open a door. Clearance Lamps The lower, outer part of the mirror housings light when you switch the headlamps or parking lamps on. Spot Lamps (If Equipped) The area lights are on the forward-facing portion of the mirror housing. You can switch them on and off by using the controls located on the instrument panel. See Lighting (page 90). Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control down during full travel, may disable the system to protect the motors from overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running, and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for function to return to normal. Heated Exterior Mirrors 360-Degree Camera (If Equipped) Each mirror includes a camera. Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If Equipped) (If Equipped) WARNING: Objects in the mirror are closer than they appear. See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 148). Memory Mirrors (If Equipped) (If Equipped) You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function. See Memory Function (page 156). 100 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Windows and Mirrors Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They can assist you by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle. The blind spot mirror is only on the driver exterior mirror. The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance. The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions from the main mirror and begins to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C). Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change lanes. Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). INTERIOR MIRROR Manual Dimming Mirror C WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. B Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. A E138665 The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. It returns to normal when the bright light from behind is no longer present or if you shift into reverse (R). 101 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Windows and Mirrors Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. SUN VISORS Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint could prevent light from reaching the sensor. SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped) Power Sliding Back Window (If Equipped) WARNING: When operating the power sliding back window, you must make sure all rear seat occupants and cargo are not in the proximity of the back window. E138666 Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade. Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power sliding back window. They may seriously injure themselves. E162197 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. MOONROOF (If Equipped) E176217 The control is on the overhead console. Press and hold the control to open the window. Pull and hold the control to close the window. WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the moonroof. They may seriously injure themselves. 102 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Windows and Mirrors Moonroof Vent Press and release to vent the moonroof. WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening. Sunshade Open Press and release to open the sunshade. The sunshade opens automatically with the moonroof. You can also open the sunshade with the moonroof closed. The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its movement during one-touch operation, press the control a second time. Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully opened position for the comfort of rear passengers. To open the sunshade fully, press the control again. Opening and Closing the Moonroof Sunshade Close Press and release to close the sunshade. Moonroof Close Press and release to close the moonroof from either the open or vent positions. Bounce-Back The moonroof automatically reverses some distance if an obstacle is detected while closing. E191272 A Moonroof open. B Moonroof vent. C Sunshade open. D Sunshade close. E Moonroof close. To override this feature, press and hold (E) within two seconds after the roof comes to a stop following a bounce-back reversal. Moonroof Open Press and release to open the moonroof. Note: The moonroof stops short of the fully opened position to reduce wind noise or rumbling that may happen with the moonroof fully open. Press and release the control again to open the moonroof fully. 103 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type 1 and 2 E271241 A Engine oil pressure gauge E Speedometer B Engine coolant temperature gauge F C Fuel gauge Information display See General Information (page 112). D Transmission fluid temperature or Turbo boost gauge G Tachometer 104 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Type 3 E176091 A Engine oil pressure gauge B Engine coolant temperature gauge C Fuel gauge D Transmission fluid temperature, Turbo boost or Diesel exhaust fluid gauge E Speedometer F Information display See General Information (page 112). G Tachometer Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal operating range (between L and H). If the needle falls below the normal range, stop your vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. 105 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge (If Equipped) Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Indicates transmission fluid temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the transmission fluid temperature exceeds the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and verify the airflow is not restricted (snow or debris blocking airflow through the grille). WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Also, higher than normal operating temperature can be caused by special operation conditions (snowplowing, towing or off-road use). Refer to Special operating conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for instructions. Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. Operating the transmission for extended periods with the gauge in the higher than normal area may cause internal transmission damage. You need to alter the severity of your driving conditions to lower the transmission temperature into the normal range. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see an authorized dealer. Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Turbo Boost Gauge (If Equipped) Indicates the amount of manifold air pressure in the engine. Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a slope. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge Low Fuel Reminder (If Equipped) A low fuel level reminder displays and sounds when the distance to empty reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys. Indicates the current DEF level. Information Display Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled. Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal. Compass Displays the vehicle’s heading direction. 106 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Automatic Headlamp High Beam Indicator (If Equipped) Trip Computer See General Information (page 112). It illuminates when the system automatically turns the headlamp high beam on. Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information (page 112). See Automatic High Beam Control (page 92). WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS Automatic Regen Control Off (If Equipped) The following warning lamps and indicators alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. E252868 See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 200). Auto-Start-Stop Indicator (If Equipped) Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and operate the same as a warning lamp but do not illuminate when you start your vehicle. It illuminates when the engine has automatically stopped. It flashes to inform you when the engine needs to restart. The indicator is shown with a strikethrough if the system is not available. Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped) E144524 It illuminates if you manually switch off the automatic regen control. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 180). It illuminates when you switch the system on. Battery It illuminates white when the system is in standby mode. It illuminates green when you set the adaptive cruise speed. It illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. See Using Cruise Control (page 243). Anti-Lock Braking System If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle continues to have normal braking without the anti-lock brake system function. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) E151262 It illuminates when you switch the system off. See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). 107 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Brake System Warning Lamp Diesel Exhaust Fluid (If Equipped) With the key in the on position, illuminates when the DEF is E163176 contaminated, low or someone has tampered with the DEF system. See Selective Catalytic Reductant System (page 196). WARNING: Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It may take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. Direction Indicator Flashes when the left or right direction indicator or the hazard warning flasher turns on. An increase in the rate of flashing warns of a failed indicator bulb. Note: Indicators vary depending on region. This lamp is a dual function lamp and will illuminate when: • • Door Ajar Warning Lamp You apply the parking brake with the ignition on. Your vehicle has a brake fault or low brake fluid level, regardless of parking brake position. It illuminates when you switch the ignition on and remains on if any door or the hood is open. Electronic Locking Differential (If If the lamp illuminates while you are moving, you may have the parking brake applied. Be sure that the parking brake is off. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible if the lamp continues to illuminate. Equipped) E270480 Illuminates when using the electronic locking differential. E163170 Electric Park Brake (If Equipped) Check 4X4 (If Equipped) It illuminates or flashes when the electric parking brake has a malfunction. See Electric Parking Brake (page 223). Illuminates with the message Check 4x4 when a four-wheel drive fault is present. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 212). E146190 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp Cruise Control Indicator (If Equipped) If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, this indicates that the engine is overheating. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It illuminates when you switch the system on. E71340 See Using Cruise Control (page 243). See Engine Coolant Check (page 353). 108 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Hill Descent (If Equipped) Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp E71880 It illuminates and a chime sounds until you fasten the seatbelts. Illuminates when hill descent is switched on. E163171 Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If If it illuminates when you are driving, refuel as soon as possible. Equipped) Note: Some indicators will appear different depending on vehicle options. Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp Illuminates momentarily when you select two-wheel drive high. It illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. E181778 E181781 Illuminates when the automatic four-wheel drive system is engaged. Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged. It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by your authorized dealer. E181780 Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. E181779 Front Airbag Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Lamp If it fails to illuminate when you start your vehicle, continues to E67017 flash or remains on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked. It illuminates when the washer fluid is low. E132353 Front Fog Lamp Indicator (If Equipped) Oil Pressure Warning Lamp It illuminates when you switch the front fog lamps on. It illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. If the oil level is sufficient, this indicates a system malfunction. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Headlamp High Beam Indicator It illuminates when you switch the headlamp high beam on. It flashes when you use the headlamp flasher. See Engine Oil Check (page 350). 109 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Parking Lamps Stability Control and Traction Control Indicator It illuminates when you switch the parking lamps on. Flashes during operation. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or remains on when the engine is running, this indicates a malfunction. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. E138639 Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power/Electronic Throttle Control Illuminates when the system has detected a powertrain or a four-wheel drive fault. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Using Stability Control (page 228). Stability Control and Traction Control Off Warning Lamp Service Engine Soon It illuminates when you switch the system off. If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. The On Board Diagnostics system has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emission control system. E130458 Tow Haul Indicator (If Equipped) It illuminates when you switch the system on. If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring. Increased exhaust gas temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle immediately serviced. E161509 Wait To Start (If Equipped) Illuminates when you switch the ignition on as part of the pre-start system. Wait until the wait to start indicator turns off before attempting to start vehicle. See Starting a Diesel Engine (page 174). It illuminates when you switch the ignition on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. Water In Fuel (If Equipped) Normally, it illuminates until the engine is cranked and automatically turns off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds it flashes eight times, this indicates that your vehicle is not ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. See Emission Law (page 193). WARNING: Do not drain the water-in-fuel separator while the engine is running. Failure to follow this warning may result in fire, serious injury, death or property damage. Sport Mode Illuminates when you switch the sport mode on. E176099 110 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Instrument Cluster Headlamps On Warning During refueling, it is possible for you to pump water-contaminated diesel fuel into your fuel tank. Your vehicle’s fuel system is equipped with a fuel filter and water separator to remove water from the fuel. The water in fuel indicator lights when the fuel and water separator has a significant quantity of water in it and requires immediate draining. Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Key in Ignition Warning Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition. If the water in fuel indicator illuminates when the engine is running, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, shut off the engine, then drain the fuel and water separator. See Fuel Quality (page 183). Allowing water to stay in the fuel system, after the water in fuel indicator illuminates, could result in extensive damage or failure of the fuel injection system. Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped) Sounds the horn twice when you exit your vehicle with the intelligent access key, after the last door is closed and your keyless vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is still on. Rear Park Aid Warning (If Equipped) Note: Do not drain the fuel and water separator while the engine is running. Air will enter into the fuel system causing the engine not to operate properly. A detection warning sounds when obstacles are within a certain range of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Parking Brake On Warning Sounds if there is a malfunction with the safety belt warning lamp and there is a fault in the supplemental restraints system. Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Beltminder Warning Service AdvanceTrac Warning Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in an occupied seat and your vehicle is moving. Sounds when there is a malfunction with the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) or Rollover Stability Control (RSC) system. Airbag Secondary Warning Door Ajar Warning Sounds when any door is not completely closed and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). 111 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls (Type 1 and 2) GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is displayed in the information display. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Note: Trailer options are not available if your vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). • Note: Some MyKey menu options only appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one MyKey is programmed. • E176092 This icon gives you the ability to switch a feature on or off. A E204495 check in the box indicates the feature is switched on, and unchecked indicates the feature is switched off. • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting or messages. Main menu (Type 1) • • • • 112 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Trip 1 & 2 Fuel economy Driver assist Settings Information Displays Trip 1 & 2 Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip options. Trip 1 & 2 Digital Speed - Press OK for km/h Trip Odometer Trip Timer DTE Average Fuel • • • • • Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Trip Odometer - Registers the distance of individual journeys. Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys. DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information. Fuel Economy Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display. Fuel Economy Distance to E Instant Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy 113 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Fuel Economy Average Speed Auto StartStop • • • • • Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage. Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time. Press and hold OK to reset this value. Average Speed - Shows the average speed your vehicle travels. Auto StartStop - Shows the current status of the Auto StartStop system. Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Driver Assist Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different driver setting choices. Driver Assist Driver Assist Prog Range Sel DEF Gauge Exhaust Filter Engine Hours Tire Pressure Trans. Temp. Rear Park Aid Brake Type Brake Effort Trailer Sway 114 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Settings Settings Vehicle Auto Regen Enter the submenu and select your setting DTE Calculate Lighting Locks Neutral Tow Oil Life Reset Remote Start Wiper Controls MyKey MyKey Status Enter the submenu and select your setting Create MyKey 911 Assist Do Not Disturb AdvanceTrac Max Speed Speed Minder Vol. Limiter Clear MyKeys Enter the submenu and select your setting Display Setup Units Enter the submenu and select your setting Temperature Tire Pressure Language • • • Main menu (Type 2) • • Display Mode Trip/Fuel 115 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Off Road Settings Information Displays Display Mode Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options. Display Mode Distance to Empty DEF Status Exhaust Filter Status Tire Pressure Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h Engine Information Transmission Temp. • • • • • • Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. DEF Status - Shows DEF status on demand screen and DEF distance to empty. Exhaust Filter Status - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen. Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). Engine Information - Shows engine hours and engine idle hours. Hold OK to Reset Transmission Temp.- Shows the transmission temperature of your vehicle. Trip/Fuel Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options. Trip/Fuel Trip 1 Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer, DTE, odometer and avg fuel economy Trip 2 Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer, DTE, odometer and avg fuel economy Fuel Economy Enter the submenu and select your setting Fuel History Enter the submenu and select your setting Compass Enter the submenu and select your setting 116 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Trip/Fuel Average Speed Enter the submenu and select your setting Auto StartStop Trip 1 or 2 • Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys. • DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. • Odometer - Registers the distance of individual journeys. • Avg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average fuel economy. Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Average Speed - Shows the average speed your vehicle travels. Auto StartStop - Shows the current status of the Auto StartStop system. Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information. Towing Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices. Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle. Towing Trailer Status Trailer Connection Status BLIS with Trailer Ready/Not Available/Not Setup/Off Pro Trailer Backup Assist: Ready or Not Setup or Not Calibrated Active Trailer Name or Default Trailer Accumulated Trailer Miles Trailer Brake Gain Output Trailer Options Trailer Sway Control Select Trailer Enter the submenu and select your setting 117 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Towing Connection Checklist Change Trailer Settings Enter the submenu and select your setting Add Trailer Enter the submenu and select your setting Conventional Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Off Road Note: Use the arrow buttons to configure different off road choices. Off Road Off Road Status Pitch, Steering Angle, Roll, Elocker and 4X4 Power Distribution Settings Settings Auto Regen Blind Spot Cross Traffic Alert DTE Calculation Enter the submenu and select your setting Rear Park Aid Trailer Blind Spot Advanced Settings Vehicle Easy Entry/Exit Lighting Locks Remote Start Wiper Controls 118 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Settings MyKey Enter the submenu and select your setting Display Setup Units Temperature Tire Pressure Language • Information Display Controls (Type 3) (If Equipped) • Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm a setting or messages. Main menu You can access the menus using the information display control. My View E176094 Trip/Fuel E176095 Truck Info E163181 Towing E176096 Off Road E176097 Settings E176098 My View E176093 • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. E176094 119 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following My View options. Information Displays MyView Trip 1 Fuel Economy Tire Pressure Off Road Status Configure MyView Add/Remove Screens Enter the submenu for Trip/ Fuel, Truck Info, Towing and Off Road selections Reorder Screens Enter the submenu and select your setting Trip/Fuel E176095 Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options. Trip/Fuel Trip 1 Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer, DTE, odometer and avg fuel economy Trip 2 Enter the submenu for items such as trip timer, DTE, odometer and avg fuel economy Fuel Economy Enter the submenu and select your setting Fuel History Enter the submenu and select your setting Average Speed Enter the submenu and select your setting 120 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Trip/Fuel Navigation/Compass Enter the submenu and select your setting Auto StartStop Trip 1 or 2 • Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys. • DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. • Odometer - Registers the distance of individual journeys. • Avg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average fuel economy. Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving. Average Speed - Shows the average speed your vehicle travels. Navigation/Compass - Shows navigation turn by turn or compass direction when a route is not set. Auto StartStop - Shows the current status of the Auto StartStop system. Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information. Truck Info E163181 In this mode, off-road information depicted with graphics are available. Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options. Truck Info Gauge View Tire Pressure Digital Speedometer Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status Diesel Exhaust Filter Status 121 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Truck Info Engine Information Transmission Temperature • • • • • • • Gauge View - Shows the turbo boost or transmission temp value. Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Status - Shows diesel exhaust fluid status on demand screen and DEF distance to empty. Diesel Exhaust Filter Status - Shows exhaust filter on demand screen. Engine Information - Shows engine information. Transmission Temperature - Shows the transmission temperature of your vehicle. Towing E176096 Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following towing options. Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An active trailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle. Towing Towing Status Enter the submenu for items such as % Grade, steering angle, gain and output display Towing Information Enter the submenu for items such as Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Pro Trailer Backup Assist Status and Trailer BLIS Status - Press OK for Trailer Options Trailer Light Status Enter the submenu for items such as Running, Brake and Turn Signal Light Status or No Trailer Detected Trailer Setup Trailer Sway Control Select trailer Enter the submenu and select your setting Change Trailer Settings Enter the submenu and select your setting Add Trailer Enter the submenu and select your setting 122 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Towing ConnecConventional tion CheckFifth Wheel list Gooseneck Off Road E176097 Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following off road options. Off Road Off Road Status Pitch, Steering Angle, Roll, Elocker and 4X4 Power Distribution Settings E176098 Use the arrow buttons to configure different driver setting choices. Settings Auto Regen Cross Traffic Alert Driver Alert Rear Park Aid Trailer Blind Spot Pre-Collision Enter the submenu for items such as alert sensitivity, distance indication and active braking Cruise Control Enter the submenu and select your setting DTE Calcula- Enter the submenu and select your setting tion 123 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Settings Gauge Selec- Enter the submenu and select your setting tion Lane Keeping System Enter the submenu for items such as system modes and alert intensity Advanced Settings Vehicle Auto Engine Off Easy Entry/Exit Lighting Locks Alarm Power Running Boards Remote Start Wiper Controls MyKey Enter the submenu and select your setting Display Setup Units Temperature Tire Pressure Language INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on your vehicle options and instrument cluster type, not all of the messages will display or be available. The information display may abbreviate or shorten certain messages. E184451 124 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. The information display will automatically remove other messages after a short time. You need to confirm certain messages before you can access the menus. Active Park Message Action Active Park Fault The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Adaptive Cruise Control Message Action Adaptive Cruise Malfunction A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). Adaptive Cruise Not Available A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 244). Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking Turned Off The system has disabled the automatic braking. Front Sensor Not Aligned A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver. Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to Activate Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise. Adaptive Cruise Shift Down The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower gear. 125 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays AdvanceTrac and Traction Control Message Action Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it off. AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it on. AdvanceTrac SPORT MODE The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switched it on. Traction Control Off The status of the traction control system after you switched it off. See Using Traction Control (page 226). Traction Control On The status of the traction control system after you switched it on. See Using Traction Control (page 226). Airbag Message Action Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove Objects Near Passenger Seat Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. Alarm and Security Message Action Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle. Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 80). 126 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Battery and Charging System Message Action Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off The battery management system detects an extended lowvoltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal. Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as Battery possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery. Charging System Service The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on Soon or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Charging System Service The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorized Now dealer as soon as possible. Battery State of Charge The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as Low possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Action Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). 127 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). Cross Traffic System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Cross Traffic Alert Deac- The system automatically turns off and displays this message tivated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). Blind Spot Alert Deactiv- The system automatically turns off and displays this message ated Trailer Attached when you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off through the information display. See Blind Spot Information System (page 256). Trailer Blind Spot Not available Due to Invalid Trailer Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or gooseneck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or longer than 33 ft (10 m). Diesel Messages WARNING: When the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message appears in the information display, do not park near flammable materials, vapors or structures until filter cleaning is complete. 128 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action Exhaust Filter Cleaning Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off, the exhaust temperature will return to normal levels. This message is NORMAL. Exhaust Filter Overloaded Drive to Clean The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot) and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off. Exhaust Filter Overloaded Clean Now Exhaust Filter at Limit Clean Now Exhaust Filter at Limit Drive to Clean Now The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot) and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows normal cleaning. Drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the Exhaust Filter Cleaning message turns off. Exhaust System Overheated Stop Safely NOW Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeded the intended operating range. If this warning occurs, a tone sounds, followed by reduced engine power. The engine shuts down when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h) . Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Engine Warming Please Wait {seconds:00} sec In extremely cold weather, typically below -14.8°F (-26°C) and if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will not respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds. This restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly in order to avoid engine damage. Exhaust Filter Drive Complete Your diesel particulate filter is clean. Exhaust Filter Cleaned Your diesel particulate filter is clean (OCR Only). Exhaust Filter Cleaning Stopped The manual regeneration process has stopped (OCR Only). DEF Level Range: XX mi/ km Refill Now The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining diesel exhaust fluid. DEF Level Empty Speed Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top Limited to XX MPH / km/ speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation h in XX mi/km of your vehicle. 129 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action DEF Level Empty Speed Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed Limited to XX MPH/km/ will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel h Upon Restart exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. DEF Level Low Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/ h The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. DEF Level Empty Engine The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. Idled Soon You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. DEF Level Empty Engine A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system. The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust Idled See Manual fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle. DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed to XX MPH/km/h in XX distance and count down from this point. Have the system mi/km checked by an authorized dealer. DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The to XX MPH/km/h Upon vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Have Restart the system checked by an authorized dealer. DEF Fault Speed Limited The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The to XX MPH/km/h vehicle’s top speed is limited. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. DEF Fault Engine Idled Soon The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Exhaust Filter Over Limit You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. Service Now Ignoring the Exhaust Filter Over Limit Service Now warning message could lead to reduced drivability and customer expense, including damage to the diesel particulate filter. Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage. Water in Fuel Drain Filter The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs draining. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 358). Fuel Pressure Low A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. See Fuel Quality (page 183). 130 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Doors and Locks Message Action X Door Ajar The door(s) listed is not completely closed. Tailgate Ajar The tailgate is not completed closed. Driver Alert Message Action Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so. Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon. Drivetrain Message Action To Engage Locking Differential Slow to XX mph/km/h The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed requirement to engage. To Engage Locking Differential Release Accelerator Pedal The electronic locking differential requests the accelerator to be released in order to engage. Check Locking Differential An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Neutral Tow Enabled Leave Transmission in Neutral The transfer case is in the neutral position. This message indicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Neutral Tow Disabled The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This message indicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. 131 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Engine Message Action Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature. Fuel Message Action Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition. Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed. Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle. No Key Detected The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page 170). Restart Now or Key is Needed You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key inside your vehicle. Run Power Active Your vehicle is in the run ignition state. Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service. Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system. Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system. Max Number of Keys Learned You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system. 132 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action Not Enough Keys Learned You have not programmed enough keys to the system. Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible. Soon Engine ON Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engine is on. Lane Keeping System Message Action Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable. Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the windshield in order for it to operate properly. Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer tion Service Required as soon as possible. Keep Hands on Steering The system requests you to keep your hands on the steering Wheel wheel. Maintenance Message Action Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. Oil Change Required The oil life left is at 0%. Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358). 133 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Transport / Factory Mode Contact Dealer Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer. See Manual The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction. MyKey Message Action MyKey not Created You cannot program a MyKey. MyKey Active Drive Safely MyKey is active. Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is on. Near Vehicle Top Speed MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h). Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey. Check Speed Drive Safely You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit. Buckle Up to Unmute Audio Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use. AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on. Traction Control On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on. MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on. Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on. 134 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Off Road Message Action Hill Descent Control Active Hill descent control mode is active. Hill Descent Control OFF Hill descent control mode is inactive. For Hill Descent Reduce Speed XX MPH/km/h or Less Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met. For Hill Descent Select Gear You need to select a transmission gear for hill descent mode. Hill Descent Driver Resume Control Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you must resume control. Hill Descent Control Fault A hill descent system fault is present. Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse. Hill Descent Control Ready The hill descent control system is ready. Park Aid Message Action Check Front Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 232). Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 232). Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. 135 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Park Brake Message Action To Release: Press Brake and Switch The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal being pressed. Park Brake Use Switch to Release The electric park brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual release. Release Park Brake The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving. Park Brake Not Applied The electric park brake is not fully applied. Park Brake Not Released The electric park brake is not fully released. Park Brake Maintenance The electric park brake system has been put into a special Mode mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Limited Function Service Required The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality may still be available. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Malfunction The electric park brake system has detected a condition that Service Now requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Power Steering Message Action Steering Fault Service Now The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer. Steering Loss Stop Safely The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Assist Fault Service Required The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Lock Malfunction Service Now The steering lock system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized dealer. 136 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Pre-Collision Assist Message Action Pre-Collision Assist Not You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or Available Sensor water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the Blocked sensor to resolve. Pre-Collision Assist Not A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized Available dealer as soon as possible. Pro Trailer Backup Assist Message Action Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Not Pro Trailer Backup Assist can only be activated when Active Stop Vehicle to Activate the vehicle is stopped. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Locating Sticker Please wait... Press Knob to Exit Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until the sticker is found before attempting to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist has reached max now Maximum trailer angle trailer angle. Press Knob to Exit Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control of Steering Wheel Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist is no longer controlling steering. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Reduce Speed Turn Knob to Steer Press Knob to Exit Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exit speed for the Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ System is Not Available Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation are not met. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 281). Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Remove Hands from Steering Wheel to Activate Press Knob to Exit Pro Trailer Backup Assist cannot operate with hands on wheel. Remove hands to activate. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Cancelled by Driver Take Control of Steering Wheel Pro Trailer Backup Assist knob has been pushed to deactivate the system. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shift Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation is only available in to Reverse to Activate. Press reverse gear. Shift gear selector into reverse to activate. Knob to Exit 137 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sticker Not Found Shift to Park Press Knob to Exit Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Sticker Not Found Refer to Owner's Manual. Press Knob to Exit Camera system cannot locate sticker. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 281). Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Drive Straight Forward to Calibrate. Press Knob to Exit Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straight forward to calibrate Pro Trailer Backup Assist. Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Calibration Complete Stop Vehicle The system has completed calibration. Stop the vehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature. Remote Start Message Action To Drive: Press Start Button A reminder to push the start button to drive your vehicle after a remote start. Seats Message Action Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving. Permitted While Driving Memory {0} Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting. Side-Wind Message Action Side-Wind Stabilization Active This message displays when the side-wind system turns on in response to strong wind conditions. See Principle of Operation (page 227). 138 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Starting System Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle . Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle. Engine Start Pending Please Wait The starter is attempting to start your vehicle. Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). Tire Pressure Sensor Fault A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Trailer Message Action Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} The current gain setting for the trailer brake. Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gain value:#0.0} No Trailer The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is not connected. Trailer Brake Module Fault Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake Control Module followed by a single chime. See Towing a Trailer (page 279). Trailer Connected A correct trailer connection is sensed during a given ignition cycle. 139 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action Trailer Disconnected A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 279). Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp. Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check your lamp. Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towing a Trailer (page 279). Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module. See Towing a Trailer (page 279). 4WD Message Action Check 4x4 A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 4x4 Shift in Progress The 4X4 system is making a shift. For 4x4 LOW Shift to N Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N). For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW and you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N). To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOW and your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). Shift Delayed Pull Forward May display when there is a Transfer case gear tooth blockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral state. 140 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Information Displays Message Action 4x4 Temporarily Disabled Displays when the system turns off the clutch due to excessive stress. The system automatically turns on the clutch after it cools. 4x4 Restored Displays when the 4X4 system restores to the 4A setting. 4X4 Temporarily Locked Displays when the 4X4 system temporarily turns on 4H from 4A after detecting driving conditions that require greater 4X4 performance. The system automatically returns to 4A after the system no longer detects these driving conditions. Shift to Neutral Displays when the system requires an additional transmission shift to Neutral to complete a transfer case shift. To Engage 4x4 Slow to 3 MPH Displays when you command a 4x4 shift during conditions which are potentially harmful to the driveTo Engage 4x4 Slow to 5 km/h line components To Engage 4x4 Release Acceler- Displays when the 4x4 system requests the you release ator Pedal the accelerator pedal to complete a 4x4 shift. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 212). 141 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Climate Control MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped) E217932 A Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. B Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 157). C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. D Defrost: Press to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. E 142 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Climate Control Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in Panel or Panel/Floor air flow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. F G H MAX A/C: Turn to the left for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. I A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Temperature control: Adjusts the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. MAX Defrost: Turn to the right to switch on defrost. Air flows through the windshield vents and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. J Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield, instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents. Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates on when the system is on. K Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Rear Window (page 148). AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL (If Equipped) 143 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Climate Control E248538 A B Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air adjust to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds. MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. The driver and passenger settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield vents, and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. 144 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing C Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. D Air distribution control: Press to switch air flow from the windshield, instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination of these vents. E Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Climate Control Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in Panel or Panel/Floor air flow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. F G H I MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. The driver and passenger settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning turns on and the fan adjusts to the highest speed. DUAL: Press to switch on temperature control for the passenger side of the vehicle. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same as the driver settings. Ventilated seats: Press to switch the ventilated seats on and off. See Ventilated Seats (page 159). L Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. M Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Rear Window (page 148). N Driver temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE General Hints Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature setting on the passenger side. Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. J K Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 157). Note: To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. 145 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Climate Control Manual Climate Control Note: If you select AUTO during cold temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up. Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Note: If you select AUTO during hot temperatures and the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. Fan speed may also reduce until the air cools. Automatic Climate Control Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. Quickly Heating the Interior Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the full heat setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons. Recommended Settings for Heating Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons. 146 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Climate Control Quickly Cooling the Interior Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C. 2 Drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Recommended Settings for Cooling Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Direct air to the instrument panel using the air distribution buttons. Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button. distribution buttons. 2 Press A/C. 3 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 147 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Climate Control HEATED WINDSHIELD (If Equipped) CABIN AIR FILTER Windshield Wiper De-Icer Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits: • It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration. • It improves the interior compartment cleanliness. • It protects the climate control components from particle deposits. E184884 When you switch the heated rear window on, the windshield wiper de-icer turns on. HEATED REAR WINDOW (If Equipped) You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box. Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The E184884 heated rear window turns off after a short period of time. Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. Note: Make sure the engine is on before operating the heated windows. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle Warranty may not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer. HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS REMOTE START (If Equipped) (If Equipped) You can switch this feature on or off and adjust the settings using the information display. When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place. The system adjusts the interior temperature depending on your chosen settings during remote start. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. You cannot adjust the climate control setting during remote start operation. When you switch the ignition on, the climate control system returns to the previous settings. You can now make adjustments. 148 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Climate Control You need to switch on certain vehicle-dependent features, such as: • Heated seats. • Cooled seats. • Heated steering wheel. • Heated mirrors. • Heated rear window. Automatic Settings In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F (22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if available, and AUTO is on in the information display). In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not turn on. In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if available, and AUTO is on in the information display). The heated rear window and heated mirrors turn on. 149 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. • Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the occupant to slide under the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a crash. WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatback to reduce the risk of serious injury in the event of a crash or during heavy braking. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. E68595 When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. 150 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats Rear Seat Center Head Restraint WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts. B A D Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. C E166701 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and release button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button (If Equipped). E Fold button (rear seat outboard only). Front Seat Head Restraint Adjusting the Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint E138642 Pull the head restraint up. Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints A Lowering the Head Restraint 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. B E Removing the Head Restraint (If Equipped) C E166700 1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position. 2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3. Pull up the head restraint. D 151 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. Note: For rear outboard seats, you can fold the head restraint forward for easier removal. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, untilted position. Installing the Head Restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. Note: Do not attempt to force the head restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead, continue tilting it forward until the head restraint releases to the upright position. Folding the Head Restraint Note: The rear seat outboard head restraints may fold forward for improved visibility. MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped) 1. Press and hold button E. 2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset. WARNING: Do not adjust the driver's seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. Front Seat Center Head Restraint Your vehicle may have a front row center head restraint that you cannot adjust or remove. Moving the Seat Backward and Forward Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped) The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following: E175314 E144727 1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright driving or riding position. 152 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats Recline Adjustment The lumbar support control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Turn the control to adjust your support. POWER SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle. E175315 Manual Lumbar WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. (If Equipped) E166702 153 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats E176038 Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped) Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If Equipped) Note: The engine must be running or the vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate the seats. Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection to activate. When the seat backrest and cushion are both active, the massage alternates between zones. E176039 154 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats E156301 Massage Mode Lumbar and Bolster Mode A Back massage intensity adjustment Upper lumbar B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease * and off C Cushion massage intensity adjustment Lower lumbar D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase E On and off - 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. 3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar intensity. * The massage feature defaults to an alternating massage mode with back massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar and bolster feature defaults to the middle lumbar mode. To access and make adjustments to the massage setting: ** Press C a second time to adjust the back bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the cushion bolster. 1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle >Multi-Contour Seat. 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. 3. Press Off, Low or High. You can also adjust this feature through the touchscreen. When switched on, the system displays directions for you to adjust the lumbar settings in your seat or to set the massage function. To access and make adjustments to the lumbar setting: 1. ** Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle > Multi-Contour Seat. 155 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped) You can save up to three preset memory positions. You can save a memory preset at any time. WARNING: Before activating the memory seat, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts. Recalling a PreSet Position WARNING: Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving. Note: You can only recall a preset memory position when the ignition is off, or when you place the transmission in park (P) or neutral (N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not moving. Press and release the preset button associated with your desired driving position. The memory features move to the position stored for that preset. This function automatically recalls the position of these features: • Driver seat. • Power mirrors. • Optional power steering column. • Optional power adjustable pedals. Note: Pressing any of the memory feature controls during a memory recall cancels the operation. You can also recall a preset memory position by: • Pressing the unlock button on your intelligent access key fob if you linked it to a preset position. • Unlocking the intelligent driver door handle if a linked key fob is present. The memory control is on the driver door. Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat and steering column to the Easy Entry position. Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key E142554 Your vehicle can save the preset memory positions for up to three remote controls or intelligent access (IA) keys. Saving a PreSet Position 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Adjust the memory features to your desired position. 3. Press and hold the desired preset button until you hear a single tone. 1. With the ignition on, move the memory features to the position you desire. 2. Press and hold the desired preset button for about five seconds. A tone sounds after about two seconds. Continue holding until you hear a second tone. Note: A confirmation that you saved a memory preset appears in the information display. 156 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats Returning the Seat to the Seating Position 3. Within three seconds, press the lock button on the remote control you are linking. To unlink a remote control, follow the same procedure – except in Step 3, press the unlock button on the remote control. WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to its original position, and that the seat cushion returns to the full down position. Failure to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury. Easy Entry and Exit Feature If you enable this feature, it automatically moves the driver seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch the ignition off. The driver seat returns to the previous position when you switch the ignition on. Switch this feature on and off through the Information displays settings menu. See General Information (page 112). Note: After moving the seat to the easy exit position, pressing any of the memory feature controls cancels the easy entry return movement. REAR SEATS (If Equipped) Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion E166704 The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. You can flip each seat cushion up into a vertical storage position. Pull the control on the bottom of the seat cushion to release the seat cushion from the storage position. HEATED SEATS (If Equipped) WARNING: People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This E181250 Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks into the vertical storage position. 157 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. The rear seat heat controls are on the rear of the center console. E146322 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. E146322 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in the on position, press the heated seat switch to enable heating mode. When activated, they turn off automatically when you switch off the engine. Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped) WARNING: People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns 158 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats VENTILATED SEATS (If Equipped) FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped) Note: The ventilated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The ventilated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Do not do the following: • Spill liquid on the front seats. This may cause the air vent holes to become blocked and not work properly. • Place cargo or objects under the seats. They may block the air intake causing the air vents to not work properly. E175382 The engine must be running to use this feature. Press the release control to move the front seat armrest up or down. E224689 Press this symbol to cycle through the various ventilation settings and off. More indicator lights indicate higher fan speeds. If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the ventilated seats are on, the feature turns itself off. You need to reactivate it. E184821 Note: To improve comfort, use the ventilated seats along with the vehicle’s air conditioning system. Lift the latch to open the lid and gain access to the optional storage compartment under the center seat cushion. The cupholder is located inside the front seat armrest. You can also flip the cupholder so that it faces forward. See Center Console (page 167). 159 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Seats REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped) E181222 Pull the strap located on the center seatback to access the armrest and cupholders. The cupholders are located inside the rear seat armrest. To open the cupholders: 1. Push in gently on the center of the plastic panel at the front edge of the armrest. The cupholders will partially open. 2. Pull the cupholder fully open before using. 160 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage. WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. E188211 The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter integrated into the driver’s sun visor. The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. You can program garage doors as well as entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting. Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming. Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes later in this section. In-Vehicle Programming This process is to program your in-vehicle HomeLink function button with your hand-held transmitter. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. If your HomeLink was previously programmed, you may need to erase your HomeLink buttons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This helps ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 161 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press and hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to three times to complete the programming process. If your device still does not operate, you must program your garage door. See Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor. To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. E188212 1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, switch your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle. 2. Press and release the function button that you would like to program. 3. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program. 4. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button you want to program while watching the indicator light on HomeLink. Continue to hold the hand-held button until the HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly or is continuously on. Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian Programming. Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener. E142659 1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps. 2. Return to your vehicle. 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light. If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. 162 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) E188212 E188213 3. Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time. 1. Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the indicator light above the buttons flashes rapidly. 2. When the indicator light flashes, release the buttons. You erased the codes for all buttons. Gate Operator / Canadian Programming Reprogramming a Single Button Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section. Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. 1. Press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes to a rapidly blinking or continuously on light. 2. Release the hand-held transmitter button. 3. Continue programing HomeLink. See In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4. Erasing the Function Button Codes Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. 163 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm) from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. 164 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Locations Note: Timed power points remain on for 30 minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode. If you switch the vehicle off, the timed power points remain on for 75 minutes. WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. Power points may be in the following locations: • On the instrument panel. • Inside the center console. • On the rear of the center console. • In the seat bin. Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 20 amps. 110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power Outlet Note: Do not plug in any device that supplies power to the vehicle through the power points, this may result in damage to vehicle systems. WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 400 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 240 watts or a fuse may blow. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This damages the power point and may blow the fuse. Note: This feature works only when the engine is running. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. Note: This feature has a maximum output of 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P). To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is off. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. Note: While in drive (D), the maximum outlet output is 300 watts. Note: When powering electric devices that require more than 10 watts in vehicles equipped with keyless start, the engine must remain running. If the engine is turned off or you switch the ignition to accessory mode, plugged in devices will not be charged. You can use the power point for electric devices that require up to 400 watts. It is on the instrument panel and rear of the center console. 165 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Auxiliary Power Points Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including: • Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. • Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools or compressor-driven refrigerators. • Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical equipment or measuring equipment. • Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch-sensor lamps. E191617 When the indicator light on the power point is: • On: The power point is working, the ignition is on and a device is plugged in. • Off: The power point is off, the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. • Flashing: The power point is in fault mode. The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. You can use the 400 watt power outlet for these types of electric devices: • Electric hand drills. • Rechargeable power tools. • Video games. • Laptops. • Televisions. Note: Max 400W - when the vehicle is parked and 300W - when the vehicle is driving. 166 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped) Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill. In vehicles with a 40-20-40 split-bench seat, the cup holders are inside of the folding console. E176222 A Front cup holders. B Rear cup holders. E251470 A USB ports or audio input jack. B Auxiliary power point. C Locking storage compartment with hanging file folder supports and room for a laptop computer. D AC power point. E Heated rear seats. F Auxiliary power point. G USB port. E185121 To use the cup holders: 1. Lift the console lid up to open. 2. Lift the cup holders up and rotate them outward. 3. Close the console. Vehicles with a console-mounted shifter feature cup holders molded into the console. 167 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Storage Compartments OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped) E224959 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. 168 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine. GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. E252522 A (off) - The ignition is off. Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. B (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to operate while the engine is not running. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. C (on) - All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. D (start) - Cranks the engine. 169 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine • KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped) Note: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones. Press the brake pedal, and then press the button for any length of time. An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition is on and when the engine starts. STEERING WHEEL LOCK VEHICLES WITHOUT: PUSH BUTTON START (If Equipped) Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine. Ignition Modes WARNING: Always check that the steering is unlocked before attempting to move your vehicle. To lock the steering wheel: 1. Remove the key from the ignition. 2. Rotate the steering wheel 180° from the straight ahead position to engage the lock. To unlock the steering wheel: E144447 1. Insert the key in the ignition. 2. Turn the key to the on position. Note: You may need to rotate the steering wheel slightly to assist unlocking if there is a steering wheel load applied. The keyless starting system has three modes: Off: Turns the ignition off. • Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not moving. STEERING WHEEL LOCK VEHICLES WITH: PUSH BUTTON START (If Equipped) On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. • Your vehicle has an electronically controlled steering wheel lock that automatically operates. Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once. The steering wheel will lock shortly after you have parked your vehicle and the passive key is outside it or when you lock your vehicle. Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may not start when the vehicle starts. Note: The steering wheel will not lock when the ignition is on or when your vehicle is moving. 170 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Unlocking the Steering Wheel • The steering wheel unlocks when the system detects a valid passive key inside your vehicle. If the steering wheel relocks, switch the ignition on to unlock it. • Move the transmission selector lever to position P. Turn the ignition key to on. If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition, see the following instructions. Note: You may have to slightly rotate the steering wheel to assist unlocking it. Vehicles with an Ignition Key STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Turn the key to start the engine. Release the key when the engine starts. Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short period and try again. Vehicles with Keyless Start Note: You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds (without the engine starting) before the starting system temporarily disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting, you reached the 60-second time limit. A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again. Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: You must have your intelligent access key in the vehicle in order to shift the transmission out of position P. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the button. The system does not function if: • The key frequencies are jammed. • The key battery has no charge. If you are unable to start the engine, locate the backup slot (A) in one of two positions: Before starting the engine, check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. 171 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 2. If your vehicle is equipped with Type Two, make sure the buttons are facing the rear of the vehicle and the key ring up. Place the key into the backup slot. 3. With the key in this position, press the brake pedal, and then the button to switch on the engine. Type One Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart the engine within 20 seconds of switching it off, even if a valid key is not present. Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off, press the brake pedal and press the button. After 20 seconds have expired, you can no longer restart the engine without the key present inside your vehicle. Once the engine has started, it remains running until you press the button, even if the system does not detect a valid key. If you open and close a door while the engine is running, the system searches for a valid key. You cannot restart the engine if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds. E244507 Type Two Failure to Start If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure: 1. Fully press the brake pedal. 2. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 4. Start the engine. E187577 1. If your vehicle is equipped with Type One, make sure to place the key properly into the backup slot. 172 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Automatic Engine Shutdown Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition, it has a feature that automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do. Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 2. Turn the key to off. 3. Apply the parking brake. Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. 2. Press the button once. 3. Apply the parking brake. Note: This switches off the ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps and indicators. Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic engine shutdown feature. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle. Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes, the ignition and engine automatically shut down. You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following: • • • Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving You can reset the timer by interacting with your vehicle (such as pressing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal). You can temporarily switch off the shutdown feature any time the ignition is on (for the current ignition cycle only). Use the information display to do so. See Information Displays (page 112). During the countdown before engine shutdown, you are prompted to press OK or RESET (depending on your type of information display) to temporarily switch the feature off (for the current ignition cycle only). WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine. Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the key to off. 173 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 3. Apply the parking brake. For temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the use of the correct grade engine oil is essential for proper operation. Refer to Engine oil specifications for more information. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission selector lever to position P. 3. Press and hold the button for one second, or press it three times within two seconds. 4. Apply the parking brake. Your vehicle may be equipped with a cold weather starting strategy that prevents severe engine damage by assisting in engine lubrication warm-up. In extremely cold ambient temperatures, this strategy activates and prevents the accelerator pedal from being used for 30 seconds after starting your vehicle. A message will appear in the information display as your vehicle warms up. By not allowing the accelerator pedal to be used, the engine oil is allowed to properly lubricate the bearings preventing engine damage due to lack of proper lubrication. After the 30 second warm-up period, the accelerator pedal will be operational again and a message will appear informing you the vehicle is ok to drive. Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. When starting the engine in extremely cold temperatures -15°F (-26°C), it is recommended to allow the engine to idle for several minutes before driving the vehicle. Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: • • Before starting the engine check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their seatbelts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Make sure the transmission is in park (P). Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm). Set your climate control to outside air. STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE Read all starting instructions carefully before you start your vehicle. Note: Do not press the accelerator during starting. Vehicles with Keyless Start Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 174 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Automatic Engine Shutdown Note: If the push button ignition switch is pressed again prior to the engine starting the ignition switches to accessory mode and does not start. If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition, it has a feature that automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before the engine shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the engine shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that the engine has shut down in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do. Note: If the brake pedal is released before the engine has started, follow the engine start sequence again. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the center of the push button ignition switch. Note: A message displays Engine Start Pending, Please Wait. 3. When the engine starts, release the brake pedal. Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug System Cold Weather Starting The diesel engine glow system consists of: WARNING: Do not use starting fluid, for example ether, in the air intake system. Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury. • • • • • Six or eight glow plugs (one per cylinder) Glow Plug Control Module Engine Coolant Temperature sensor Barometric pressure sensor Environmental temperature sensor WARNING: Do not mix diesel with gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could cause an explosion. The powertrain and glow plug control modules electronically control the glow plug system. After you switch the ignition on the glow plug control module immediately energizes the glow plugs. The glow plug control module using the engine coolant temperature, barometric pressure sensor and environmental temperature sensor will determine how long the glow plugs stay energized. The required time for the glow plugs to be energized decreases as the coolant temperature, barometric pressure and environmental temperature increase. It is recommended that the engine block heater be used for starting when the temperature is -9°F (-23°C) or colder. See Engine Block Heater (page 178). When operating in cold weather, Motorcraft® cetane improvers or non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from a reputable manufacturer may be used as needed. Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds as starter damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, switch the ignition off and wait 30 seconds before trying again. 175 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Switch the ignition on. Do not start the engine until the glow-plug indicator turns off. restart. If you have been using biodiesel, you may need to use a fuel with lower biodiesel content, try another brand, or discontinue using biodiesel. Do not use alcohol based additives to correct fuel gelling. This may result in damage to the fuel injectors and system. Use the proper anti-gel and performance improvement product. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). When the glow plug pre-heat indicator turns off, turn the key to start and release the key as soon as the engine starts. After starting the engine, the glow plugs may remain on for a period. If you do not start the engine before the glow plug activation time ends, you will need to reset the glow plugs by switching the ignition off. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for about 15 seconds. This is to protect the engine. Do not increase engine speed until the oil pressure gauge indicates normal pressure. Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel and water separator that recirculates fuel from the engine to help prevent fuel filter clogging. To avoid engine fuel starvation during cold weather operation of 32°F (0°C) or below, we recommended that the fuel level in your tank should not drop below 1⁄4 full. This helps prevent air from entering the fuel system and stalling the engine. For vehicles with keyless start: 1. Fully depress brake pedal and hold to allow time for glow-plugs to heat. 2. Press and release the start button. Note: A message "Engine Start Pending, Please Wait", along with the glow plug indicator displays on the instrument cluster. In cold weather below 32°F (0°C), the engine may slowly increase to a higher idle speed if left idling in park (P). As the engine warms-up, the engine sound level decreases due to the activation of PCM-controlled sound reduction features. 3. When the engine starts, release the brake pedal. If you operate your vehicle in a heavy snowstorm or blowing snow conditions, snow and ice can clog the engine air induction. If this occurs, the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear all the snow and/or ice away from inside the air filter assembly. Remove the air cleaner cover and the pleated paper filter, leaving the foam filter in and remove any snow or ice. Make sure you install the foam filter correctly in place. Remove any debris, snow or ice on the foam filter by brushing the surface with soft brush. Once you have cleared all of the debris, reinstall the air filter and assembly. Cold Weather Operation Note: Idling in cold weather does not heat the engine to its normal operating temperature. Long periods of idling, especially in cold weather, can cause a buildup of deposits which can cause engine damage. Changing to a lighter grade engine oil also makes starting easier under these conditions. Refer to Engine oil specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold temperatures. Diesel fuel which has not been properly formulated for the ambient conditions may gel which can clog the fuel filters. One indication that the fuel filter(s) may be clogged is if the engine starts, stalls after a short time, and then does not Do not use water, solvents, or a hard brush for cleaning the foam filter. 176 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine The following cold weather idling guidelines are recommended: • You can use Motorcraft® cetane improvers or non-alcohol-based cetane improvers from a reputable manufacturer as needed. • Maintain the engine cooling system properly. • Avoid shutting the engine down after an extensive idling period. Drive your vehicle for several miles with the engine at normal operating temperatures under a moderate load. • Consider using an engine block heater. • For extended idle times use an approved idle speed increase device. WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. In order to operate the engine in temperatures of 32°F (0°C) or lower, read the following instructions: • Make sure that the batteries are of sufficient size and are fully charged. Check other electrical components to make sure they are in optimum condition. • Use the proper coolant solution at the concentration recommended protecting the engine against damage from freezing. • Try to keep the fuel tank full as much as possible at the end of operation to prevent condensation in the fuel system. • Make sure you use proper cold weather engine oil and that it is at its proper level. Also, if necessary, make sure to follow the engine oil and filter change schedule found under the Special operating conditions section listed in the scheduled maintenance information. • At temperatures of -9°F (-23°C) or below, it is recommended that you use an engine block heater to improve cold engine starting. • If operating in arctic temperatures of -20°F (-29°C) or lower, consult your truck dealer for information about special cold weather equipment and precautions. Winter Operating Tips for Arctic Operation -20°F (-29°C) and Below The following information is a guideline only and is not to be the only source of possible solutions in resolving extreme cold temperature issues. Starting Aids WARNING: Do not use starting fluid, for example ether, in the air intake system. Such fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible personal injury. The use of the factory engine block heater assists in engine starting in extreme cold ambient temperatures See Engine Block Heater (page 178). 177 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Idle Control Operation in Standing Water Your vehicle may have a factory option for a stationary elevated idle control through dash-mounted upfitter switches that allows the operator to elevate the idle rpm for extended idle periods, as well as aftermarket equipment such as PTO operation. You must configure this feature even if ordered from the factory. See your authorized dealer for required upfitting. Ingestion of water into the diesel engine can result in immediate and severe damage to the engine. If driving through water, slow down to avoid splashing water into the intake. If the engine stalls, and you suspect ingestion of water into the engine, do not try to restart the engine. Consult your dealer for service immediately. Your fuel tank vents to the atmosphere by valves on top of the tank and through the fuel cap. If water reaches the top of the tank, the valves may pull water into the fuel tank. Water in the fuel can cause performance issues and damage the fuel injection system. Operation in Snow and Rain Vehicle operation in heavy snowfall or extreme rain conditions may feed excessive amounts of snow or water into the air intake system. This could plug the air filter with snow and may cause the engine to lose power and possibly shut down. SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE We recommend the following actions after operating your vehicle up to 200 mi (320 km) in snowfall or extreme rain: • Allow the engine to idle for three to five minutes before shutting it down. The larger the engine, the greater the need is for this idling period. Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and clear all the snow and ice from the air filter housing inlet (do not remove the foam filter) and reset the air filter restriction gauge. Note: Try to limit engine idle to 10 minutes. Excessive idling reduces fuel economy. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Note: Removal of the foam filter degrades your vehicle performance during snow and hot weather conditions. • Equipped) Extreme rain: The air filter dries after about 15–30 minutes at highway speeds. At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and reset the air filter restriction gauge. WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. Refer to Air filter and restriction gauge in the Maintenance chapter for more information. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 369). WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. 178 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine • WARNING: Do not fully close the hood, or allow it to drop under its own weight when using the engine block heater. This could damage the power cable and may cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury and property damage. • • Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source. • We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. • Use as short an extension cord as possible. • Do not use multiple extension cords. • Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. 179 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Unique Driving Characteristics The Auto-Start-Stop system status is available at a glance within the information display. See Information Displays (page 112). AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped) The system helps reduce fuel consumption by automatically stopping and restarting the engine when your vehicle has stopped. The engine restarts automatically when you release the brake pedal. Enabling Auto-Start-Stop The system automatically enables every time you start your vehicle if: In some situations, your vehicle may restart automatically, for example: • To maintain interior comfort. • To recharge the battery. • • Note: Power assist steering turns off when the engine is off. • • • • • Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, Auto-Start-Stop will be inhibited for a short time after a refuel event while the system is verifying the fuel type being used. WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake. Make sure you shift into park (P) for vehicles with an automatic transmission. Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. • • • WARNING: Before opening the hood or performing any maintenance, fully apply the parking brake, shift into park (P) or neutral (N) and switch the ignition off. • • WARNING: Always switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicle. If the ignition is switched on an automatic restart may occur at any time. • • • • WARNING: The system may require the engine to automatically restart when the auto-start-stop indicator illuminates green or flashes amber. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. • • 180 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing You do not press the Auto-Start-Stop button (not illuminated). Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you have initially started your vehicle. You have stopped your vehicle. Your foot is on the brake pedal. The driver door is closed. There is adequate brake vacuum. The interior compartment has cooled or warmed to an acceptable level. The front windshield defroster is off. You have not turned the steering wheel rapidly or you do not have it at a sharp angle. The vehicle is not on a steep road grade. The battery is within optimal operating conditions (battery state of charge and temperature in range). The engine coolant is at operating temperature. Elevation is below about 11,000 ft (3,350 m). Ambient temperature is moderate. The trailer is not connected. If you select Normal, Eco, Snow/Wet or Grass/Gravel/Snow modes. (if equipped). You are not in 4H or 4L. You have not selected Manual shift mode. Unique Driving Characteristics • • Trail control is not active. You have not selected Tow haul, Sport, Sand, Mud/Rut or Baja modes. (if equipped). • • Note: Note when in Sport mode it can be enabled by pressing the Auto-Start-Stop button. When you press the Auto-Start-Stop button with the engine automatically stopped. The front defroster is turned to the Max setting. Any of the following conditions may result in an automatic restart of the engine: • You have increased the blower fan speed or changed the climate control temperature. • You have an electrical accessory turned on or plugged in. The green Auto-Start-Stop indicator light on the instrument cluster will illuminate to indicate when the automatic engine stop occurs. If the instrument cluster is equipped with a grey E146361 Auto-Start-Stop indicator light, it illuminates when automatic engine stop is not available due to one of the above noted conditions not being met. Note: You may notice that the climate seat fan fluctuates during an automatic restart. Disabling Auto-Start-Stop Automatic Engine Restart Any of the following conditions will result in an automatic restart of the engine: • You have removed your foot from the brake pedal. • You press the accelerator pedal. • You press the accelerator and the brake pedal at the same time. • The driver safety belt becomes unfastened or the driver door is ajar. • Your vehicle is moving. • The interior compartment does not meet customer comfort when air conditioning or heat is on. • Fogging of the windows could occur and the air conditioning is on. • The battery is not within optimal operating conditions. • You have exceeded the maximum engine off time. E181352 Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located on the center console to switch the system off. The button will illuminate. Deactivating using the button lasts only 1 key cycle. Press the button again to restore Auto-Start-Stop function. Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine message appears and the amber Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing, automatic restart is not available. You must restart the vehicle manually. See Information Displays (page 112). 181 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Unique Driving Characteristics If your vehicle is in an engine off Auto-Start-Stop, shifting from drive (D) to reverse (R) will not cause a restart if you do not have the brake pedal pressed. The message Auto-Start-Stop Press Brake to Start Engine will appear. You must press the brake pedal within 60 seconds or a shift to park (P) and a manual restart will be required. 182 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. • WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • WARNING: Fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. WARNING: Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. • WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel vapor can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you splash fuel in your eyes, immediately remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and thoroughly wash your skin with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing fuel vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. Immediately call a physician if you experience any adverse reactions. FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL Follow these guidelines when refueling: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. • Always switch the engine off before refueling. • Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately call a physician, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be apparent for hours. Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin Islands And Other Locales) Note: Your warranty will not cover damage caused by using an improper type of fuel or fuel additive. 183 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling Failure to use retrofit components other than those available through your authorized dealer will result in coolant system damage, engine overheating, selective catalyst reduction system or diesel particulate filter damage and possible base engine damage. Note: Do not blend used engine oil with diesel fuel under any circumstances. Blending used oil with the fuel will significantly increase your vehicle’s exhaust emissions and reduce engine life due to increased internal wear. You should use Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel (also known as ULSD) designated as number 1-D or 2-D with a maximum of 15-ppm sulfur in your diesel vehicle. You may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also known as B20. These fuels should meet the ASTM D975 diesel or the ASTM D7467 B6-B20 biodiesel industry specifications. Outside of North America, use fuels meeting EN590 or equivalent local market standard. Use only a diesel engine configured for use with high sulfur diesel fuel in markets with diesel fuel that has sulfur content greater than 15 ppm. Using low sulfur diesel fuel (16–500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel (greater than 500 ppm) in a diesel engine designed to use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel may result in damage to engine emission control devices and the aftertreatment system, potentially rendering the vehicle inoperable. Using low sulfur diesel fuel (16-500 ppm) or high sulfur diesel fuel (greater than 500 ppm) in your diesel engine will cause certain emission components to malfunction which may also cause the service engine soon light to illuminate indicating an emissions-related concern. Vehicles with engines configured for use with high sulfur diesel fuel are only available for sale in countries where ultra low sulfur diesel fuel is generally not available or mandated by the government. Vehicles originally sold in a ultra low sulfur diesel fuel market that are subsequently exported to non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel markets will need to be retrofitted (at the customer’s expense using Ford authorized dealer service parts) in order to be reliably operated on non- ultra low sulfur diesel fuel. Diesel fuel is adjusted seasonally for cold temperature. For best results at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C), it is recommended to use a diesel fuel which has been seasonally adjusted for the ambient conditions. Biodiesel Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required WARNING: Do not mix diesel with gasoline, gasohol or alcohol. This could cause an explosion. For the engine to operate reliably on low-sulfur or high-sulfur diesel fuel, the engine must be a factory built high-sulfur engine (available as a dealer order option for select markets) or an ultra low sulfur diesel fuel configured engine that has been retrofitted for high-sulfur diesel fuel using Ford Motor Company dealer service parts. 184 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling Note: Do not use home heating oil, agricultural fuel, raw fats and oils, waste cooking greases, biodiesel greater than 20% or any diesel not intended for highway use. Damage to the fuel injection system, engine and exhaust catalyst, and diesel particulate filter can occur if you use an improper fuel. Red dye is used to identify fuels intended for agricultural and non-highway use. SAE 5W-40 oil is recommended for fuels with greater than 5% biodiesel (B5). For more information about oil change intervals and other maintenance when operating on biodiesel See Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance (page 566). Look for a label on the fuel pump to confirm the amount of biodiesel contained in a diesel fuel. Biodiesel content is often indicated with the letter B followed by the percent of biodiesel in the fuel. For example, B20 indicates a fuel containing 20% biodiesel. Ask the service station attendant to confirm the biodiesel content of a diesel fuel if you do not see a label on the fuel pump. You may operate your vehicle on diesel fuels containing up to 20% biodiesel, also known as B20. Biodiesel fuel is a chemically converted product from renewable fuel sources, such as vegetable oils, animal fats and waste cooking greases. To help achieve acceptable engine performance and durability when using biodiesel in your vehicle: • Confirm the biodiesel content of the fuel to be B20 (20% biodiesel) or less • Only use biodiesel fuel of good quality that complies with industry standards • Follow the recommended service maintenance intervals. See General Maintenance Information (page 560). • Do not store biodiesel fuel in the fuel tank for more than 1 month • Consider changing brands or reducing biodiesel content if you have cold temperature fuel gelling issues or a frequent LOW FUEL PRESSURE message appearing Biodiesel fuels degrade more easily than diesel fuels not containing biodiesel and should not be stored in the fuel tank for more than 1 month. If you plan to park or store your vehicle for more than 1 month, then you should empty your vehicle fuel tank of biodiesel fuel. You should fill the tank with a pure petroleum-based diesel fuel and run your vehicle for a minimum of 30 minutes. Note: Degraded or oxidized biodiesel can damage fuel system seals and plastics and corrode steel parts. During cold weather, if you have problems operating on biodiesel, you may need to use a diesel fuel with lower biodiesel content, try another brand, or discontinue the use of biodiesel. Use of biodiesel in concentrations greater than 20% may cause damage to your vehicle, including engine and/or exhaust after-treatment hardware (exhaust catalyst and particulate filter) failures. Concentrations greater than 20% can also cause fuel filter restrictions that may result in a lack of power or damage to fuel system components, including fuel pump and fuel injector failures. Diesel Fuel Additives It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket additives to your fuel if you use a high quality diesel fuel that conforms to ASTM industry specifications. Aftermarket additives can damage the fuel injector system or engine. 185 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling Use Motorcraft® cetane booster or an equivalent cetane booster additive if you suspect fuel has low cetane. Use Motorcraft® anti-gel & performance improver or an equivalent additive if there is fuel gelling. Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use alcohol-based additives to improve cetane quality, to prevent fuel gelling or any other use. The use of alcohol additives may result in damage to the fuel injectors and system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 427). For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 279). Your warranty may not cover repairs needed to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product that does not meet Ford specifications in your fuel. Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. FUEL QUALITY - E85 We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com. Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following identifiers: • Yellow fuel filler cap. • Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet. • Yellow fuel filler housing. • Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler door. Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuels containing more than 85% ethanol or E100 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. E161513 Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or regular unleaded gasoline blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). 186 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling • • Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 279). Switching Between E85 and Gasoline Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. We do not recommend repeatedly alternating between E85 and gasoline. If you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as possible, at least half a tank. Drive your vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi (8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you use E85 exclusively, we recommend that you fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change. We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com. Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE Choosing the Right Fuel Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. E161513 Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. 187 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling • • Filling a Portable Fuel Container Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. WARNING: Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up, which can produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. • Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position. FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION - REGULAR CAB The fuel filler funnel is behind the right-hand front seat. FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION - SUPERCAB/ SUPERCREW Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container The fuel filler funnel is under the second row right-hand rear seat. WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. If your vehicle runs out of fuel: • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. • You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal. WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope, more fuel may be required. 188 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 188). REFUELING Refueling System Overview Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they may not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. A B When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following: 1. Fully open the fuel filler door. 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the fuel filler inlet. C E267248 A Fuel filler door. B Fuel tank filler valve. C Fuel tank filler pipe. Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler cap. E157452 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container. 4. Remove the fuel filler funnel. 5. Fully close the fuel filler door. 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it back in your vehicle or correctly dispose of it. Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. 189 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling A B WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. C D WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. E206911 A Left-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release. B Right-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release. C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it. D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it. WARNING: Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. WARNING: Wait at least five seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. Refueling Your Vehicle WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. 1. Fully open the fuel filler door. 2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for your vehicle. 190 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling A B A E206912 5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown. E139202 3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler pipe. E119081 6. When you finish refueling slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove it. 7. Fully close the fuel filler door. A Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle immediately checked. Refueling System Warning (If Equipped) E139203 If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close, a message could appear in the information display. B 4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position A can affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full. Message Check Fuel Fill Inlet If the message appears, do the following: 1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. 2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). 191 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuel and Refueling The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the break-in period of the engine. A more accurate measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi (3,000 km). 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Fully open the fuel filler door. 5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any debris that may be restricting its movement. 6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank filler valve. 7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel filler funnel provided with your vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 188). This action should dislodge any debris that may be preventing the fuel tank filler valve from fully closing. 8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe. 9. Fully close the fuel filler door. Note: The message may not immediately reset. If the message continues to appear and a warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Impacting Fuel Economy • • • • • • • • FUEL CONSUMPTION Advertised Capacity The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank after running out of fuel. Included in the advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. Fuel Economy Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures through the trip computer average fuel function. See General Information (page 112). 192 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Incorrect tire inflation pressures. Fully loading your vehicle. Carrying unnecessary weight. Adding certain accessories to your vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars or light bars, running boards and ski racks. Using fuel blended with alcohol. See Fuel Quality (page 183). Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures. Fuel economy may decrease when driving short distances. You may get better fuel economy when driving on flat terrain than when driving on hilly terrain. Engine Emission Control EMISSION LAW Tampering With a Noise Control System WARNING: Do not remove or alter the original equipment floor covering or insulation between it and the metal floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation protect occupants of the vehicle from the engine and exhaust system heat and noise. On vehicles with no original equipment floor covering insulation, do not carry passengers in a manner that permits prolonged skin contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in fire or personal injury. Federal laws prohibit the following acts: • Removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance. • Repair or replacement of any device or element of the design incorporated into a new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use. • The use of the vehicle after any person removes or renders inoperative any device or element of the design. U.S. federal laws and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system components. Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle modification without first determining applicable laws. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may presume to constitute tampering as follows: • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron absorbers, fender apron barriers, underbody noise shields or acoustically absorptive material. • Tampering or rendering inoperative the engine speed governor, to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. Tampering with emissions control systems including related sensors or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced engine power and the illumination of the service engine soon light. If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following: • A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose. • A plugged engine air filter element. • Water in the fuel filter and water separator. • A clogged fuel filter. • Contaminated fuel. • Air in the fuel system, due to loose connections. • An open or pinched sensor hose. • Incorrect engine oil level. 193 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control • • Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic conditions. WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. Note: If these checks do not help you correct the concern, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Your vehicle has various emission control components and a catalytic converter that enables it to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. • Do not run the engine with a spark plug lead disconnected. • Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 322). • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Do not switch the ignition off when your vehicle is moving. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation became effective governing the noise emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The preceding statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and maintenance, and the noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide, are applicable to complete chassis cabs over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. Note: Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter. The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off. If you use anything other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 194 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 189). 4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet. Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city and highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement. If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs. Please consult your warranty information for complete details. On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing Some state and provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are: If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, your vehicle may need service. See On-Board Diagnostics. 195 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTANT SYSTEM Your vehicle may have a selective catalytic reduction system. The system helps reduce emission levels of oxides of nitrogen from the exhaust system. The system automatically injects diesel exhaust fluid into the exhaust system to enable correct selective catalytic reduction system function. If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M testing. Note: Selective catalytic reduction systems are not fitted to vehicles in markets where only high-sulfur diesel fuel is available. Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level In order for the system to operate correctly you must maintain the diesel exhaust fluid level. A warning message appears in the information display when the diesel exhaust fluid level is low. If a warning message appears, refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank as soon as possible. See Information Messages (page 124). The OBD-II system checks the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you can perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving: Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. 2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition off. Then, start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete. WARNING: Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case of contact with your eyes, flush immediately with water and get prompt medical attention. In case of contact with your skin, clean immediately with soap and water. If you swallow any diesel exhaust fluid, drink plenty of water, call a physician immediately. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you need to repeat the above driving cycle. 196 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control WARNING: Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank in a well ventilated area. When you remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap or a diesel exhaust fluid container cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Ammonia vapors can be irritating to skin, eyes and mucous membranes. Inhaling ammonia vapors can cause burning to the eyes, throat and nose and cause coughing and watery eyes. ) E163354 E163354 Only use diesel exhaust fluid that is certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Non-certified diesel exhaust fluid use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the fuel tank. This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. You can purchase diesel exhaust fluid at an authorized dealer, most highway truck stops or you can contact roadside assistance for help in finding a retailer that sells diesel exhaust fluid. In addition, there is a government website to help you find the nearest location to purchase diesel exhaust fluid: http://www.discoverdef.com. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Using a Fuel Station Pump Filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank using a nozzle is similar to fuel fill. The nozzle shuts off automatically when the tank is full. Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Using a Container E226045 The following procedure applies to Motorcraft diesel exhaust fluid or similar fluid containers. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions. The diesel exhaust fluid tank has a blue filler cap. The tank is behind the left-hand front wheel. Fill the tank using a fluid pump at a diesel exhaust fluid filling station or a diesel exhaust fluid container. We recommend Motorcraft® diesel exhaust fluid. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). 1. 197 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Remove the diesel exhaust fluid container cap. Place the spout on to the container and tighten it until you feel a strong resistance. Engine Emission Control Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages and Vehicle Operations 2. Remove the diesel exhaust fluid tank filler cap. 3. Insert the spout in to the filler neck until the seal on the spout seats on to the filler neck. Pour the fluid in to the tank. When the tank is full the fluid will stop flowing automatically. 4. Return the container to the vertical position slightly below the diesel exhaust fluid filler neck. Allow any fluid remaining in the spout to drain back in to the container. 5. Remove the spout from the diesel exhaust fluid filler neck. Replace the diesel exhaust fluid tank cap. 6. Remove the spout from the diesel exhaust fluid container and replace the cap. Note: If there is diesel exhaust fluid left in the container retain it for later use. The spout is re-useable. Wash the spout with clean water prior to storage. Do not use the diesel exhaust fluid spout with any other fluid. WARNING: Diesel exhaust fluid must be refilled when low or replaced when contaminated or your vehicle speed becomes limited to 50 mph (80 km/h). In these conditions, drive with caution and refill diesel exhaust fluid immediately. If the diesel exhaust fluid becomes empty or contaminated and fluid is not replaced, your vehicle becomes limited to engine idle only once stopped. In these conditions, be cautious where you stop your vehicle because you may not be able to drive long distances or maintain highway speeds until you refill or replace the diesel exhaust fluid. WARNING: Tampering with or disabling the selective catalytic reduction system results in severe vehicle performance limitation including eventual speed limiting to 5 mph (8 km/h). The information display shows a series of messages about the amount of diesel exhaust fluid available. A systems check displays messages indicating the amount of diesel exhaust fluid available or displays a warning message indicating the approximate distance remaining as the fluid in the diesel exhaust fluid tank nears empty. See Information Messages (page 124). Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank in Cold Climates Diesel exhaust fluid may freeze if the ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C). Your vehicle has a preheating system which allows diesel exhaust fluid to operate below 12°F (-11°C). If you do not use your vehicle for an extended period when the ambient temperature is below 12°F (-11°C), the fluid in the tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and the fluid freezes it may damage the tank. This is not covered by the vehicle warranty. As the diesel exhaust fluid level nears empty, the warning E163176 symbol displays and a series of tones and messages starting at 500 mi (800 km) remaining before diesel exhaust fluid is depleted. The warning symbol and messages continue until you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. 198 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control • Continued driving without refilling results in the following actions as required by the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): • Within a preset distance to empty, speed is limited upon vehicle restart. Prior to this occurring a message appears in the information display. • Further vehicle operation without refilling the diesel exhaust fluid tank causes the engine to enter an idle-only condition. This only occurs upon vehicle refueling or at an extended idle. A message indicates the required actions to resume normal operation. It is required to add a minimum of 1.0 gal (3.8 L) of diesel exhaust fluid to the tank to exit the idle-only condition, but your vehicle is still in the speed-limiting mode until you refill the tank completely. • • • • • Note: For either vehicle speed limiting or idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation resumes when you refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. Note: When filling the diesel exhaust fluid tank from empty, there may be a short delay before detecting the increased level of fluid. The increased level detection must occur before your vehicle returns to full power. • • Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and Information • • • • • Use only diesel exhaust fluid that carries the American Petroleum Institute (API) certified diesel exhaust fluid trademark or ISO 22241. Do not put diesel exhaust fluid in the diesel fuel tank. Do not overfill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. Diesel exhaust fluid is corrosive. Do not re-use the diesel exhaust fluid container once it is emptied. 199 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Avoid spilling diesel exhaust fluid on painted surfaces, carpeting or plastic components. Immediately wipe away any diesel exhaust fluid that has spilled with a damp cloth and water. If it has already crystallized, use warm water and a sponge. Store diesel exhaust fluid out of direct sunlight and in temperatures between 23°F (-5°C) and 68°F (20°C). Diesel exhaust fluid freezes below 12°F (-11°C). Do not store the diesel exhaust fluid bottle in your vehicle. If it leaks it could cause damage to interior components or release an ammonia odor inside your vehicle. Diesel exhaust fluid is non-flammable, non-toxic, colorless and water-soluble liquid. The system has a diesel exhaust fluid quality sensor. Dilution of diesel exhaust fluid or use of any other liquid in the SCR system leads to a diesel exhaust fluid system fault, eventually leading to the vehicle only operating in idle-only mode. Do not dilute diesel exhaust fluid with water or any other liquid. An ammonia odor may be smelled when the cap is removed or during refill. Refill diesel exhaust fluid in a well ventilated area. Engine Emission Control Typical Diesel Exhaust Fluid Usage When Using the Power Take Off (PTO) Note: For vehicle speed limiting or idle-only condition, normal vehicle operation resumes when you repair the contaminated system. To service a contaminated or inoperative system, see an authorized dealer. Continuous PTO use—Minimal PTO use 0–7,800 mi (0–12,550 km) DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction System The filter forms part of the emissions reduction system on your vehicle. It filters harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the exhaust gas. Selective catalytic reduction systems are sensitive to contamination of the diesel exhaust fluid. Maintaining the purity of the fluid is important to avoid system malfunctions. If you remove or drain the diesel exhaust fluid tank, do not use the same fluid to refill the tank. The system has a sensor to monitor fluid quality. Regeneration WARNING: Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. A warning lamp illuminates and a message appears in the E163176 information display if the system becomes contaminated or inoperative. Continued driving without replacing diesel exhaust fluid or having the selective catalytic reduction system repaired results in the following actions as required by the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): • Within a preset distance to empty, speed is limited upon vehicle restart. Prior to this occurring a message appears in the information display. • Further vehicle operation without replacing contaminated diesel exhaust fluid causes the engine to enter an idle-only condition. This only occurs upon vehicle refueling, vehicle idling in park for 1 hour, or engine shutdown for 10 minutes or more and is indicated by a message in the information display indicating required actions to resume normal operation. Note: Avoid running out of fuel. Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic odor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to high temperatures reached during regeneration and is normal. Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust sound may be heard during the regeneration process. The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle requires periodic regeneration to maintain its correct function. Your vehicle will carry out this process automatically. 200 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control If your journeys meet one of the following conditions: • You drive only short distances. • You frequently switch the ignition on and off. • Your journeys contain a high level of acceleration and deceleration. Your vehicle has a diesel particulate filter. The diesel particulate filter is an inline filter in the exhaust system that reduces carbon emissions by trapping exhaust particles before they reach the tailpipe. The diesel particulate filter looks similar to a traditional exhaust catalyst and is part of the exhaust system under your vehicle. The filter couples to a diesel oxidation catalyst that reduces the amount of harmful exhaust emitted from the tailpipe. As soot gathers in the system, it begins to restrict the filter. The system must periodically clean the soot that gathers inside the filter. This is carried out in two ways, passive regeneration and active regeneration. Both methods occur automatically and require no actions from the driver. During either one of these regeneration methods, you may notice a change in exhaust tone. At certain times, the information display shows various messages related to the diesel particulate filter. See Information Messages (page 124). You must carry out occasional trips with the following conditions to assist the regeneration process: • Drive your vehicle in more favorable conditions, which you will find at higher vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a main road or freeway for a minimum of 20 minutes. This drive may include short stops that will not affect the regeneration process. • Avoid prolonged idling and always observe speed limits and road conditions. • Do not switch the ignition off. • Select a suitable gear to ideally maintain engine speed between 1500 and 3000 RPM. Diesel Particulate Filter Maintenance You must properly maintain your vehicle's diesel particulate filter in order for it to function properly. Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel Particulate Filter System (If Do not disregard maintenance messages that appear in the information display. Failure to follow the instructions of an information message may degrade vehicle performance and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Equipped) WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the diesel oxidation catalytic converter or the diesel particulate filter. The diesel oxidation catalytic converter and the diesel particulate filter heat up to very high temperatures after only a short period of engine operation and remain hot after you switch the engine off. Failure to perform active or operator commanded regeneration when instructed could result in a clogged diesel particulate filter. If the diesel particulate filter fills beyond the regeneration threshold, your vehicle disables the ability for active and operator commanded regeneration. This could result in irreversible damage to the diesel particulate filter requiring replacement that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 201 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control Passive Regeneration shows a cleaning exhaust filter message, which is the normal regeneration process. You can also choose operator commanded regeneration to clean the exhaust system at this point. See Information Messages (page 124). In passive regeneration, the exhaust system temperature and constituents automatically clean the filter by oxidizing the soot. Cleaning automatically occurs during normal vehicle operating conditions due to driving patterns. If you are not able to drive in a manner that allows effective automatic active regeneration or you choose to perform regeneration of the diesel particulate filter while at idle, then operator commanded regeneration would need to be performed. Active Regeneration Once the diesel particulate filter is full of exhaust particles, the engine control module commands the exhaust system to clean the filter through active regeneration. Active regeneration requires the engine computer to raise the exhaust temperature to eliminate the particles. During cleaning, the particles convert to harmless gasses. Once cleaned the diesel particulate filter continues trapping exhaust particles. Operator Commanded Regeneration (If Equipped) If your vehicle is operated with significant stationary operation, low speed drive cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short drive cycles, a drive time is less than 10 15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully warm up, passive and active regeneration may not sufficiently clean the diesel particulate filter system. Operator commanded regeneration allows you to manually start regeneration of the diesel particulate filter at idle to clean the filter. If you are not sure whether your vehicle has this feature, contact an authorized dealer. The regeneration process operates more efficiently when you drive your vehicle at a constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h) and at a steady engine speed for approximately 20 minutes. The frequency and duration of regeneration fluctuates by how you drive your vehicle, outside air temperature and altitude. For most driving, regeneration frequency varies from 100–500 mi (160–805 km) between occurrences and each occurrence lasts 9–35 minutes. You can usually reduce the duration of regeneration if you maintain a constant speed above 30 mph (48 km/h). When to Carry Out Operator Commanded Regeneration You can use the operator commanded regeneration feature when a message appears in the information display and you are not able to drive in a manner that allows effective automatic active regeneration or if you choose to manually start the regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually while the vehicle is idle. See Information Messages (page 124). When the engine control module detects that the diesel particulate filter is nearly full of particulates and you are not operating your vehicle in a manner to allow effective automatic regeneration, messages appear in the information display as a reminder for you to drive your vehicle in order to clean the diesel particulate filter. If you drive your vehicle in a manner to allow effective automatic regeneration, the information display 202 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control Operator Commanded Regeneration Precautions and Safe Exhaust Position How to Start Operator Commanded Regeneration WARNING: Do not park or idle your vehicle over dry leaves, dry grass or other combustible materials. The regeneration process creates very high exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust will radiate a considerable amount of heat during and after regeneration and after you have switched the engine off. This is a potential fire hazard. WARNING: Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust gases can burn you badly. Note: You cannot use the operator commanded regeneration until the diesel particulate filter load percentage has reached 100%. The diesel particulate filter load percentage fluctuates up and down when driving your vehicle due to active and passive regenerations. WARNING: Stay clear of the exhaust tailpipe during regeneration. Hot exhaust gases can burn you badly. Note: During the use of operator commanded regeneration, you may observe a light amount of white smoke. This is normal. Make sure that the louvers located at the tip of the exhaust are clear of any obstructions as they are used to introduce fresh air into the tailpipe to cool the exhaust gases as they leave the exhaust system. You may not be able to use operator commanded regeneration if the service engine soon warning lamp appears in the information display Before you start operator commanded regeneration, do the following: • Shift into park (P) and apply the parking brake, on stable, level ground. • Park your vehicle outside of any structure. • Park your vehicle 10–15 ft (3–5 m) away from any obstructions and away from materials that can easily combust or melt, for example paper, leaves, petroleum products, fuels, plastics and other dry organic material. • Make sure there is a minimum of 1/8 tank of fuel. • Make sure all fluids are at proper levels. Information Display Procedure Start with your vehicle engine and when it has reached the normal operating temperature, press the information display control button on the steering wheel. See Information Display Control (page 86). If a message advising that the exhaust filter is full appears in the information display, press the OK button as instructed. Answer yes to this prompt and then follow the next prompts regarding the exhaust position required to initiate operator commanded regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an authorized dealer. The display confirms the operation has started and when it has finished. 203 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control If the diesel particulate filter is near or at saturation, a message requesting permission to initiate filter cleaning appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 124). Answer yes to this prompt and then follow the next prompts regarding exhaust position required to initiate operator commanded regeneration. Be sure to understand each prompt. If you are not sure what is being asked by each prompt, contact an authorized dealer. The display confirms the operation has started and when it has finished. You can also drive to clean the filter. Operator Commanded Regeneration with Automatic Regeneration Control (If Equipped) If your vehicle is operated with significant stationary operation, low speed drive cycles less than 25 mph (40 km/h), short drive cycles, drive time less than 15 minutes or the vehicle does not fully warm up, passive and active regeneration may not sufficiently clean the diesel particulate filter system. You can switch off automatic regeneration until better driving conditions are available, for example steady high speed driving. You can then switch automatic regeneration back on to clean the diesel particulate filter. When the system is at the point of oversaturation, the service engine warning lamp illuminates and a message appears in the information display. You cannot initiate filter cleaning. You must have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Switching Automatic Regeneration Control On and Off To switch operator commanded regeneration on and off, use the information display control on the steering wheel. See Information Display Control (page 86). Scroll to the exhaust cleaning message, a check in the box indicates the feature is enabled, and unchecked indicates the feature is disabled. Once operator commanded regeneration starts, engine speed increases to approximately 2000 rpm and the cooling fan speed increases. You will hear a change in audible sound due to engine speed and cooling fan speed increases. How to Interrupt or Cancel Operator Commanded Regeneration It is not necessary to open the hood on the engine compartment. Once operator commanded regeneration completes, the engine speed returns to normal idling. The exhaust system remains very hot for several minutes even after regeneration is complete. Do not reposition the vehicle over materials that could burn until the exhaust system has had sufficient time to cool. Depending on the amount of soot collected by the diesel particulate filter, ambient temperature and altitude, operator commanded regeneration lasts approximately 30 minutes. If you need to cancel the operator commanded regeneration, pressing the brake, accelerator or switching the engine off stops the procedure. Depending on the amount of time you allowed the operator commanded regeneration to operate, soot may not have had sufficient time to be fully eliminated, but the exhaust system and exhaust gas may still be hot. If you shut your vehicle off during operator commanded regeneration, you may notice turbo flutter. This is a normal consequence caused by shutting off a diesel engine during boosted operation and is considered normal. 204 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Engine Emission Control Filter Service and Maintenance Over time, a slight amount of ash builds up in the diesel particulate filter, which is not removed during the regeneration process. The filter may need to be replaced with a new or remanufactured part at approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km). Actual mileage varies depending on engine and vehicle operating conditions. If filter service is required, the engine control system warning lamp illuminates in the information display. If there are any issues with the diesel particulate filter system, the engine control system warning lamp and a service engine soon warning lamp illuminate to inform you that your vehicle requires service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Resonator and Tailpipe Assembly Maintenance Aftermarket devices or modifications to the exhaust system may reduce the effectiveness of the exhaust system as well as cause damage to the exhaust system or engine. This may also degrade vehicle performance and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 205 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Transmission Column shifter AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not use tow/haul when the road surface is slippery. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle. E249567 Note: You can press the button on the gearshift lever to cycle through the available drive modes. See Drive Control (page 268). WARNING: When your vehicle is stationary, keep the brake pedal fully pressed when shifting gears. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury, death or property damage. Putting your vehicle in or out of gear: 1. Fully press down on the brake pedal. 2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. 3. When you are finished driving, come to a complete stop. 4. Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in park (P). Note: Under certain conditions, you may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside the vehicle. Understanding the Shift Positions of your Automatic Transmission Console shifter The instrument cluster displays the current gear. Park (P) This position locks the transmission and prevents the wheels from turning. Reverse (R) With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your vehicle moves backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). E184456 Neutral (N) With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), you can start your vehicle, which is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in this position. 206 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Transmission Drive (D) Tow Mode Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy, and allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears. To activate tow mode, press the button on the gearshift lever E161509 until tow mode is selected. The indicator light illuminates in the instrument cluster when the system becomes active. Manual (M) with Floor-shifter The tow mode feature: • Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to reduce the frequency of transmission shifting. • Provides engine braking in all forward gears, which slows your vehicle and assists you in controlling your vehicle when descending a grade. • Depending on driving conditions and load conditions, may downshift the transmission, slow your vehicle and control your vehicle speed when descending a hill, without pressing the accelerator pedal. The amount of downshift braking provided varies based upon the amount you press the brake pedal. With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the driver can change gears up or down as desired. By moving the gearshift lever from drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you now have control of selecting the gear you desire using buttons on the shift lever. See Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission later in this section. To return to normal drive (D) position, move the gearshift lever back to drive (D). The transmission operates in all available gears. Third (3) with Column-shifter - 6-speed Transmission operates in third (3) gear only. Use third (3) gear for improved traction on slippery roads. The tow mode feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when using tow mode. Second (2) - 6-speed Transmission operates in second (2) gear only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on slippery roads. To deactivate the tow mode feature and return to normal driving mode, press the button on the gearshift lever twice. The indicator light deactivates when the system turns off. Tow mode also deactivates when you power down your vehicle. First (1) - 6-speed • • • • Transmission operates in first (1) gear only. Provides maximum engine braking. Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever. Does not downshift into first (1) gear at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds. Sport Mode To activate Sport Mode, press the button on the gearshift lever E176099 until sport mode is selected. The SPORT or S indicator light illuminates in the instrument display when the system becomes active. 207 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Transmission Understanding your SelectShift™ Automatic Transmission The sport mode feature: • Provides additional slope, engine braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This increases engine RPM during engine braking. • Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy. • Selects gears more quickly and at higher engine speeds. Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission gearshift lever. The SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you the ability to change gears up or down (without a clutch) as desired. In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may cause it to stall, SelectShift still automatically makes some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time as long as SelectShift determines that damage to the engine from over-revving does not occur. To deactivate the sport mode feature and return to normal driving mode, press the button on the gearshift lever again. The SPORT or S indicator light deactivates when the system turns off. The sport mode feature also deactivates when you power down your vehicle. SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button. Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning This feature increases durability and provides consistent shift feel over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is normal and does not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process fully updates transmission operation. Note: Engine damage may occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting. The SelectShift Automatic transmission feature has two modes: PRS and M mode. Manual (M) with Floor-shifter Moving the gearshift lever to the manual (M) position allows you to manually select the gear you desire. Only the current gear displays. Use the buttons on the gearshift lever or steering wheel to manually select gears. Press the + button to upshift or the – button to downshift. Return the transmission to a different gearshift position to deactivate manual control. Forced Downshifts • • • Allowed in drive (D) with the tow mode feature on or off. Press the accelerator to the floor. Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear. 208 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Transmission Brake-Shift Interlock WARNING: When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully apply the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate. E192285 WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Progressive Range Selection Progressive Range Selection gives you the ability to lockout gears from the automatic shifting range. This may provide you with an improved driving experience, for example, in slippery conditions or when experiencing a steep slope. WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the stoplamps are working. With the transmission in drive (D), press the – button to active PRS. The available and selected gears are indicated on the instrument cluster. Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents moving the gearshift lever from park (P) when the ignition is in the on position and the brake pedal is not pressed. All available gears display with the current gear indicated. Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest gear. Only the available gears display and the transmission automatically shifts between the available gears. Press the + button to unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears. The transmission shifts automatically within the gear range you select. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of park (P) position with the ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed, a malfunction may have occurred. It is possible that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 334). If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the following procedure allows you to move the gearshift lever from park (P): Column-shifter 1. 209 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Apply the parking brake and switch off your vehicle. Transmission 2. Move the steering column to the full down and full rearward position (toward the driver’s seat). 3. Remove the gearshift lever boot. 4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boot hole and pull top half of shroud up and forward to separate it from the lower half of the shroud. There is a hinge at the forward edge of the top shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud upward on the hinge point, then pull straight rearward toward the driver’s seat to remove. 5. Remove the top half of the shroud. 6. Remove the three fasteners under the column that secure the lower shroud half to the column. E163186 8. Apply the brake, pull the white disk then move the shifter to neutral (N). 9. Start your vehicle. Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order, making sure to engage the hinge pivots between the upper and lower halves of the shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward direction as the halves rotate together. Floor-shifter 1. Apply the parking brake and switch off your vehicle. 2. Remove the rubber mat between the shifter and cup holder. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully pry up the access panel from the attachment points and disconnect it from the console to expose the inside of the gearshift. E163185 7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked position and remove the lower shroud cover by pulling the lever handle through the slot in the cover. E182464 210 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Transmission 3. Locate the white brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly. E183128 4. Apply the brake pedal. Using light finger pressure, move the white lever forward when pulling the gearshift lever out of the park (P) position and into the neutral (N) position. 5. Install the access panel and rubber mat. 6. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle, and release the parking brake. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, you may rock it out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. 211 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 4X4 Auto USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (If Equipped) E181781 Note: For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see General Information in the Wheels and Tires chapter. Continuously illuminates when 4A is selected (2-Speed Automatic 4WD vehicles only). 4X4 HIGH Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected. Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4H or 4L mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on these surfaces may produce some noise (such as occasional clunks), but should not damage drive components. E181779 4X4 LOW Continuously illuminates when 4L is selected. E181780 CHECK 4X4 Note: If 4L is selected while your vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system should not perform a shift. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low) for proper operation. Displays when a 4X4 fault is present. Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD system (If Equipped) Note: You can switch on and switch off the electronic locking differential by pulling the 4WD control (4WD vehicles) or turning the electronic locking differential control (2WD vehicles). See Electronic Locking Differential (page 220). 4WD Indicator Lights Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system can typically remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition occurring. It should not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. E191851 2H (4X2) For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear wheels only and should be used for street and highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds. 4X2 Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected. E181778 212 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 2. Place the transmission in neutral (N). 3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position. 4H (4X4 HIGH) Provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or winter conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. This mode is not for use on dry pavement. The information display can display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. The information display can then display the system mode selected. If any of the above shift conditions are not present, the shift should not occur and the information display can display information guiding the driver through the proper shifting procedures. 4L (4X4 LOW) Provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use on low traction surfaces, but does so with additional gearing for increased torque multiplication. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4X4 low) should not engage while your vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation. If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays in the information display, a transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift. Shifting between system modes Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD System (If Equipped) Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while a shift in progress message displays can improve engagement/disengagement performance. This system includes an electronically controlled transfer case with a high capacity clutch. The system is interactive with the road, continually monitoring and adjusting power delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize traction. Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping or while applying the accelerator pedal. Note: The AdvanceTrac system has the ability to take over control of the transfer case clutch in 4A mode and disable it during driving maneuvers when necessary. Note: You may hear some noise as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. You can move the control from 2H or 4H at a stop or while driving. The information display may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is complete the message center can then display the system mode selected. Note: The information display may show messages during 4WD operation. See Information Messages (page 124). Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) Note: You may hear some noise as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. 1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. 213 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 4L (4X4 LOW) Provides electronically or mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use on low traction surfaces, but does so with additional gearing for increased torque multiplication. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4X4 low) should not engage while your vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation. E225302 2H (4X2) For general on-road driving, this mode provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds. Sends power to the rear wheels only. Shifting between system modes Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while a shift in progress message displays can improve engagement/disengagement performance. 4A (4X4 AUTO) Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping or while applying the accelerator pedal. Provides electronic controlled four-wheel drive with power delivered to the front and rear wheels, as required, for increased traction. 4A tuning varies based on selected Drive Mode See Drive Control (page 268). . 4A in Normal and Sport is appropriate for all on-road driving conditions, including, dry road surfaces. 4A in Snow/Wet is appropriate for slippery on-road conditions such as snow and ice covered roads. Note: You may hear some noise as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. You can move the control from 2H to 4A or 4H at a stop or while driving. The information display may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is complete the message center can then display the system mode selected. 4H (4X4 HIGH) Provides electronically or mechanically locked four-wheel drive power to both the front and rear wheels for use in off-road or winter conditions such as deep snow, sand or mud. This mode is not for use on dry pavement. Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low) Note: You may hear some noise as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. 2. Place the transmission in neutral (N). 3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position. 1. 214 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) The information display can display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. The information display can then display the system mode selected. If any of the above shift conditions are not present, the shift should not occur and the information display can display information guiding the driver through the proper shifting procedures. Use of a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly may lead to impairment of the following: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays in the information display, a transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move your vehicle forward approximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to neutral (N) to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift. How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles • • • • WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Operating 4WD vehicles with spare or mismatched tires On four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the spare tire can affect the 4X4 system. If there is a significant difference between the size of the spare tire and the remaining tires, you may have limited four-wheel drive functionality. Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is recommended that you do not: • • • The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with a 4WD mode turned on. Turn on a 4WD mode unless the vehicle is stationary. Use a 4WD mode on dry pavement. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, 4WD functionality may be limited, especially when driving in a mechanically locked 4WD mode. You may experience the following: • • Comfort and noise. Winter weather driving capability. Wet driving capability. Four-wheel drive capability. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. Additional noise from the transfer case or other drive components. Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically locked 4WD mode. 215 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. The transfer case supplies power to all four wheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select different 4WD modes when necessary. You can find information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures in this chapter. You can find information on transfer case maintenance in the Maintenance chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles Note: On some models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while your vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power your vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. Note: Your vehicle may have a front air dam. Due to low ground clearance, you can damage it when taking your vehicle off-road. You can take the air dam off by removing the bolts that secure it. Basic Operating Principles Note: Your vehicle may have an underbody transmission shield and brackets. Due to low ground clearance, you can damage them when taking your vehicle off-road. Remove the shield by disengaging the fasteners at each corner of the shield. Then, remove the shield's rear brackets by removing the bracket to frame bolts. • • • Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. When driving your vehicle on surfaces made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice proceed with care. Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4H or 4L modes are only for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. If Your Vehicle leaves the Road If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your vehicle speed and avoid severe braking. When your vehicle speed decreases, ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do not turn the steering wheel sharply while returning your vehicle to the road. It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the road. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. 216 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) It may be less risky to strike small objects, such as freeway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the road which could cause your vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this causes vehicle momentum to work against you and your vehicle could become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. Mud and Water Emergency Maneuvers Mud In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering can result in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake pedal when changes in vehicle speed are required. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration and braking. This could result in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss of vehicle control and personal injury. Use all available road surface to bring your vehicle to a safe direction of travel. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts can cause an imbalance that could damage drive components. Water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. When driving through water, determine the depth and avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system gets wet, your vehicle may stall. If your vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there can be a change in the way your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e. steering, acceleration or braking). Once through water, try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying improves by applying light pressure to the brake pedal while moving slowly. Sand When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip. Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary. When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures, use a low gear when possible. Low gear operation can maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability. 217 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral. Disengage overdrive or move the transmission selector lever to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer your vehicle. Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should try to drive straight up or straight down. Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you can use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the brakes. Driving on Snow and Ice When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of your vehicle. If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn around because this could cause vehicle roll over. It is better to reverse back to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power can cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage. Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. E143949 218 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Avoid sudden braking. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it cannot stop any faster as braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake. Make sure you shift into park (P) for vehicles with an automatic transmission. Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not pump the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 222). On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when the transfer case is in the neutral (N) position, the engine and transmission disconnect from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll even if it is parked. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the neutral (N) position. Set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving your vehicle. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Maintenance and Modifications WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty. For this reason, we strongly recommend that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (for example, lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, you may rock it out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, damage to the transmission may occur. We recommend that you use caution when your vehicle has either a high load or device (such as ladders or luggage racks). Any modifications to your vehicle that raise the center of gravity may cause your vehicle to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle control. Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than a minute, damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Parking Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect you and your passenger's safety. We recommend you frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis components when your vehicle is subject to off road usage. WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 219 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Rear Axle • ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped) Note: The electronic locking differential is for off-road use only and is not for use on dry pavement. Using the electronic locking differential on dry pavement will result in increased tire wear, noise and vibration. • The electronic locking differential is a device housed in the rear axle that allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. The electronic locking differential can provide additional traction should your vehicle become stuck. You can activate the differential electronically and shift it on the fly within the differential operating speed range. The differential is for use in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition where you need maximum traction. It is not for use on dry pavement. When you switch the system on, if you do not meet the required conditions for electronic locking differential activation, the instrument cluster will display the appropriate information guiding you through the proper activation process. Activating the Electronic Locking Differential Note: Do not use electronic locking differential on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, vibration and increase tire wear. The following conditions will affect the electronic locking differential: • • • • In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic locking differential will automatically disengage at speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 56 mph (90 km/h). The AdvanceTrac system has the ability to take over control of the electronic locking differential and disable it during driving maneuvers when necessary. The electronic locking differential will not engage if your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, 4x4 Auto, or 4x4 High modes. The electronic locking differential will not engage if your vehicle speed is above or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4 Low. The electronic locking differential may not engage if you press your accelerator pedal during an engagement attempt. A message may display in the instrument display guiding you to release the accelerator pedal. In 4x2, 4x4 Auto, and 4x4 High modes, the electronic locking differential will automatically disengage at speeds above 25 mph (41 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). Note: If the electronic locking differential has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling. For 4WD vehicles E227398 Pull the 4WD control knob toward you. 220 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Rear Axle For 2WD vehicles disengaging, release the accelerator pedal and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction when rolling. We recommend engaging and disengaging the ELD at a stop when you mount a spare on the rear axle. E183740 Turn the control to ON. Once the indicator light illuminates in the information E163170 display, both rear wheel axle shafts will be locked together providing added traction. If the indicator does not come on, or the indicator turns off while driving, one of the following has occurred: • • • • The vehicle speed is too high. The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an engagement attempt. The system has malfunctioned and is accompanied by a message in the information display. See your authorized Ford dealer for assistance. The vehicle is experiencing an anti-lock brake activation. Operating ELD With a Spare or Mismatched Tires On vehicles with an ELD, the size of the spare tire can affect performance of the system. If there is a significant difference between the two rear tires, you may have limited ELD functionality. If the electronic locking differential has difficulty 221 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Brakes Emergency Brake Assist GENERAL INFORMATION Emergency brake assist detects when you brake heavily by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. Emergency brake assist can reduce stopping distances in critical situations. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out and an authorized dealer should check them. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, an authorized dealer should check your vehicle. Anti-lock Brake System Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels (page 378). This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. This lamp momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the anti-lock braking system may be disabled. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is disabled, normal braking is still effective. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 107). E138644 Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. If the brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately. Brake Over Accelerator E138644 In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Switch the engine off, move the transmission to park (P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal and the area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its movement.If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES The anti-lock braking system does not eliminate the risks when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. 222 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Brakes • • You take corners too fast. The road surface is poor. Note: If the system activates, the brake pedal may pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. Note: It remains illuminated for a short period of time after you switch the ignition off. If it continues to flash or does not illuminate, the system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE Note: You can apply the electric parking brake when the ignition is off. WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Note: The electric parking brake could automatically apply when you shift into park (P). See Transmission (page 206). Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an Emergency WARNING: If you drive extended distances with the parking brake applied, you could cause damage to the brake system. Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake when your vehicle is moving, except in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the electric parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle, you could cause damage to the brake system. WARNING: The electric parking brake does not operate if the vehicle battery is running out of charge. You can use the electric parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency. Your vehicle has an electric parking brake. You operate it with a switch instead of a lever. The switch is on the center console or to the left-hand side of the steering wheel, on the lower part of the instrument panel. E267156 E270480 Note: The electric parking brake makes noises during operation. This is normal. Applying the Electric Parking Brake E267156 E270480 Pull the switch upward and hold it. The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone sounds and the stoplamps turn on. The electric parking brake continues to slow your vehicle down unless you release the switch. Pull the switch upward. Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Brake The red warning lamp flashes during operation and illuminates when the parking brake is Switch the ignition on. applied. Press and hold the brake pedal. 223 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Brakes E267156 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery is Running Out of Charge Push the switch downward. The red warning lamp turns off. Connect a booster battery to the vehicle battery to release the electric parking brake if the vehicle battery is running out of charge. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 322). E270480 If it remains illuminated or flashes, the system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. HILL START ASSIST Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a Trailer WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake. Press and hold the brake pedal. E267156 Pull the switch upward and hold it. WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Shift into gear. Press the accelerator pedal until engine has developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the hill. E267156 Release the switch and pull away in a normal manner. WARNING: The system will turn off if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev the engine excessively. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking Brake Close the driver door. Shift into gear. The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in a normal manner. The red warning lamp turns off. When the system is active, your vehicle remains stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The system releases the brakes automatically once the engine has E270480 If it remains illuminated or flashes, the electric parking brake has not released. Manually release the parking brake. 224 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Brakes developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission You cannot turn the system on or off. When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on. The system activates on any slope that causes your vehicle to roll. Note: There is no warning light to indicate the system is either on or off. Using Hill Start Assist 1. Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep the brake pedal pressed and shift into first gear when facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing downhill. 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system activates automatically. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the slope without rolling away for about two to three seconds. This hold time automatically extends if you are in the process of driving off. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The system releases the brakes automatically. Note: When you remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the pedal again when the system is active, you will experience significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This is normal. Switching the System On and Off Vehicles with Manual Transmission You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. 225 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Traction Control Switching the System Off PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. E166706 The switch for the stability and traction control system is on the instrument panel. USING TRACTION CONTROL When you switch the system off, a message and an illuminated icon appear on the instrument cluster. WARNING: The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Use the switch again to return the traction control system to normal operation. Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictions regarding this feature. See Principle of Operation (page 62). System Indicator Lights and Messages E138639 The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. • If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. • Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. When a driving condition activates either of the systems. If a problem occurs in either of the systems. E130458 • • 226 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing The stability and traction control light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and flashes: The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates on engine start-up and stays on: When you switch the traction control system off. When you select an alternative stability control mode. Stability Control If the stability control or traction control system detects a fault, the following may occur: • The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily. • The stability control and traction control systems do not enhance your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If the stability control or traction control system activates, the following may occur: • The stability and traction control light flashes. • Your vehicle slows down. • Reduced engine power. • A vibration in the brake pedal. • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. • If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake pedal, the pedal may move as the system applies higher brake force. The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle. WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It's always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator's ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN. Electronic Stability Control The system helps to prevent your vehicle skidding or laterally sliding by individually applying the brakes to one or more wheels and, if necessary, reducing engine power. Roll Stability Control The system helps to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle's roll motion, and individually applying the brakes to one or more wheels. The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. 227 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Stability Control Side-Wind Stabilization The system applies the brakes on one side of your vehicle to reduce the effect of a sudden side-wind gust on your vehicle's path. When the system turns on, the stability and traction control light flashes, and a message may appear in the information display. You may notice a slight deceleration and may still need to make a steering correction to maintain the intended vehicle path. The system does not turn on for a continuous side-wind or during turns. B B B A Traction Control A The system enhances your vehicle's ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 226). B A E72903 A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™) The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. You can switch the electronic stability control systems off. When you shift the transmission into reverse (R), the systems are disabled. You can switch the traction control system off or on independently. See Using Traction Control (page 226). 228 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Stability Control AdvanceTrac with RSC Features Button functions Stability control OFF light Roll stability control Electronic stability control Traction control system Default at startup Illuminated during bulb check Enabled Enabled Enabled Button pressed momentarily Illuminated Enabled Enabled Disabled Button pressed and held for more than 5 seconds Illuminated Enabled Disabled Disabled Double press * Sport Mode Illuminated Enabled Button pressed again after deactivation Not illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled Transfer case switched to 4WD Low Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled with Enabled with higher threshold higher threshold target target *On F-150 Raptor models, the double press function to put your vehicle into sport mode is not available. You can access sport mode through the terrain management system. 229 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Hill Descent Control (If Equipped) PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION USING HILL DESCENT CONTROL WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury. Press and release the hill descent button on the instrument panel. A light in the cluster illuminates and a tone sounds when you switch this on. E163957 To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until you reach the speed you desire. To decrease descent speed, press the brake pedal until you reach the speed you desire. WARNING: Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at zero miles per hour (0 kilometers per hour). When stopped, you must apply the parking brake or place the vehicle in P (Park), or it may roll away. When accelerating or decelerating, once you reach the descent speed you desire, remove your feet from the pedals and the hill descent control maintains the vehicle speed you chose. Hill descent control allows you to set and maintain vehicle speed while descending steep grades in various surface conditions. Note: You may observe a noise from the ABS pump motor during hill descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and is no reason for concern. Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains armed, but you cannot use the system to set or maintain the descent speed. Note: Refer to the Raptor Supplement for further information on Trail Control. Hill descent modes Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active before cooling varies with conditions. The system provides a warning in the message center and a tone sounds when the system is about to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as needed to maintain descent speed. 230 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing • At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h): When you press this button, the light flashes indicating this feature is active. Your vehicle maintains the speed you desire when in this mode. • At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 40 mph (64 km/h): When you press this button, the light is solid and a message appears in the information display indicating this feature is active. Your vehicle does not maintain the speed you desire and you cannot set your descent speed. Hill Descent Control (If Equipped) • At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h): When you press this button, the system turns this feature off and no light or message appears in the information display. You need to switch this feature back on to use. Refer to the Information Displays for additional hill descent control messages. See Information Messages (page 124). 231 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See Principle of Operation (page 62). PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. Note: When a trailer is connected to the vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the trailer and therefore provide warnings. It is suggested that you disable the system when a trailer is connected to the vehicle to prevent these warnings. WARNING: The system may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb reflection. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. WARNING: Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system.This may cause reduced performance or false alerts. When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume reduces to a predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume returns to the previous level. The system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 112). WARNING: The system may not detect small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground. Note: Certain add-on devices installed around the bumper or fascia may create false beeps. For example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that may block the normal detection zone of the system. Remove the add-on devices to prevent the false beeps. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display and you cannot switch the system on through the pop-up message. See Information Messages (page 124). REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped) Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. 232 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped) WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. E231381 WARNING: The system is designed to aid the driver. It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment. You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention. Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) : • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). WARNING: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause interference. WARNING: Active park assist does not apply the brakes under any circumstances. Note: The blind spot information system does not detect traffic alongside or behind your vehicle during an active park assist maneuver. Note: Active park assist is a multi-step process and may require you to shift your transmission multiple times. Follow the on-screen instructions until you complete the parking process. The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper. The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers your vehicle (hands-free) while you control the accelerator, transmission and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you to park your vehicle. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) The system provides obstacle distance indication through the display screen. See Rear View Camera (page 237). If you are uncomfortable with the proximity to any vehicle or object, you may choose to override the system by grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the active park assist button. 233 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids The system may not operate correctly in any of the following conditions: • You use a spare tire or a tire significantly worn more than the other tires. • One or more tires are improperly inflated. • You try to park on a tight curve. • Something passes between the front bumper and the parking space. For example, a pedestrian or cyclist. • The edge of the neighboring parking vehicle is high off the ground. For example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck. • The weather conditions are poor. For example, during heavy rain, snow or fog. Note: Following a change in tire size, the system must recalibrate and operation may be impaired for a short time. Do not use the system if: • You have attached a bike rack, trailer or other object near the sensors on the front or rear of your vehicle. • You have attached an overhanging object to the roof. For example, a surfboard. • A foreign object damages or obstructs the sensors. • The correct tire size is not in use. For example, when using a mini-spare tire. Using Active Park Assist Press the button to turn the system on or off. E146186 Note: Keep the sensors, located on the fascia, free from now, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors can affect the systems accuracy. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. When driving at a speed less than 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. The system displays a message and a corresponding graphic to indicate it is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator to select searching either to the left hand side or right hand side of your vehicle. If the direction indicator is not used, the system defaults to the passenger side of your vehicle. Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves or cause ultrasonic interference. For example, motorcycle exhaust, truck air brakes or horns. E130107 234 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids When the system finds a suitable space it displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the instructions on the display screen. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may need to pull forward a short distance before the system is ready to park. Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space. For example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces while you are driving, it offers the last detected space. Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the display screen shows a message to alert you to reduce your vehicle speed. Note: You can also activate the system after you drive partially or completely pass the parking space. To do so, press the active park assist button and the system informs you if you recently passed a suitable parking space. Automatic Steering into Parking Space Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted, for example driver input is detected, the system switches off and you need to take full control of your vehicle. Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all times in the maneuver. Note: You should drive your vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other vehicles as possible while passing a parking space. When you shift the transmission into reverse (R), with your hands off the steering wheel and nothing obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle back and forth in the space. E130108 When automatic steering is complete, the system displays a message and a chime sounds, indicating that the active park assist process is finished. You are responsible for checking the parking job and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle. When you think your vehicle has enough space in front and behind it, or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied by a touchscreen display message and a chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop. 235 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids Deactivating the Park Assist Feature Certain vehicle conditions can also deactivate the system, such as: • Traction control has activated. • There is an anti-lock brake system activation or failure. Manually deactivate the system by: • Pressing the active park assist button during an active maneuver. • Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver. • Driving above approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active park search. • Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during automatic steering. • Switching off the traction control system. If a problem occurs with the system, a warning message displays accompanied by a tone. Occasional system messages may occur in normal operation. For recurring or frequent system faults, contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced. Troubleshooting the System The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off. The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space. The system does not offer a particular space The sensors may be covered. For example, with snow, ice or dirt. Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park. There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space. The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away. Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). You may have recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect, the vehicle must be driven on a straight road for a short period of time. 236 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission. For example, rolling forward when the transmission is in reverse (R). An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly. Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly. Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space. The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly. For example, not inflated correctly, improper size or of a different size. A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities. A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed. The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed. The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly. For example, when driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash. REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped) WARNING: Use caution when the rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the rear cargo door is ajar. Some vehicles may not come equipped with guidelines. WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle. WARNING: Reverse your vehicle as slow as possible, higher speeds may limit your reaction time to stop your vehicle. During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle. 237 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing behind your vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and you might not see some objects. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once you engage the trailer tow connector. Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Pro Trailer Backup Assist you can set-up the trailer to work with the Rear View Camera system. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 281). E184050 The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse lamps are not operating. • Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. • The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned. The rear view camera is located on the tailgate. Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R). Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. Camera System Settings The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: • Active guidelines: Show the intended path of your vehicle while reversing. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. • Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). You can access the rear view camera system settings in the display screen. See General Information (page 112). Camera guidelines Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: The centerline is only available if active or fixed guidelines are on. Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in reverse (R), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. 238 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids A B C D The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines do not show when the steering wheel position is straight. E Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of your vehicle. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) F E142436 A Active guidelines B Centerline C Fixed guideline: Green zone D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone E Fixed guideline: Red zone F Rear bumper Active guidelines only show with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If the steering wheel position changes while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. E190459 The system will provide an image of your vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones will highlight green, yellow and red when the parking aid sensors detect an object in the coverage area. 239 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids Manual Zoom WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: Only the centerline shows when you enable manual zoom. The 360 degree camera system consists of front, side and rear cameras. The system: • Allows you to see what is directly in front or behind your vehicle. • Provides cross traffic view in front and behind your vehicle. • Allows you to see a top-down view of the area outside your vehicle, including the blind spots. • Provides visibility around your vehicle to you in parking maneuvers such as: • Centering in a parking space. • Obstacles near vehicle. • Parallel parking. Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol on the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF. This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). Rear Camera Delay Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF. When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until your vehicle speed reaches 6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when the rear camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is pressed. The 360 degree camera system button is located on the E183663 instrument panel and allows you to toggle through different camera views. The front and rear cameras have multiple screens which consist of: Normal view with 360, Normal view, and split view. When in park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the front images will be displayed when the button is pressed. When in reverse (R), only the rear images will be displayed when the button is pressed. 360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped) WARNING: The 360 degree camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of the windows, and checking the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. Note: The 360 degree camera system will turn OFF when your vehicle is in motion at low speed, except when in reverse (R). 240 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids Camera Views Keep Out Zone The small vehicle icon displayed on the top left corner of the image illustrates the camera view being displayed. Camera views are laid out in the order the screens will appear once the button is pressed. Note: The front video image will be disabled when your vehicle is in motion at low speed, except when in reverse (R). • • • • • • Front 360 + Normal: Contains the normal front camera view next to a 360 degree camera view. This view will appear on the screen when the button is pressed in any gear other than reverse (R). Front Normal View: Provides an image of what is directly in front of your vehicle. Access this view by pressing the camera button from the Front 360 + Normal View screen. Front Split View: Provides an extended view of what is in front of your vehicle. Access this view by pressing the camera button from the Front Normal View screen. Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the normal rear camera view next to a 360 degree camera view. This view can be accessed by putting your vehicle in reverse (R), or by pressing the camera button from the Rear Split View screen. Rear Normal View: Provides an image of what is directly behind your vehicle. Access this view by pressing the camera button from the Rear 360 + Normal screen. Rear Split View: Provides an extended view of what is behind your vehicle. Access this view by pressing the camera button from the Rear Normal View screen. E184448 The Keep Out Zone is represented by the yellow dotted lines running parallel to your vehicle. It is designed to give you the indication on the ground of the fully extended outside mirror position. Front Camera WARNING: The front camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of your vehicle. E184044 The front video camera, located in the grille, provides a video image of the area in front of your vehicle. It adds assistance to the driver while driving forward at low speeds. 241 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Parking Aids To use the front video camera system, place the transmission in any gear except reverse (R) and press the small icon in the corner of the screen. Note: The front camera system will automatically switch on when you are in mud/sand, rock crawl, or Baja mode and your speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h) (F150 Raptor only). The area displayed on the screen may vary according to your vehicle's orientation and road conditions. Side Camera E206263 The side view camera, located in the outside mirror, provide a video image of the area on the sides of your vehicle as part of the front 360 + normal view and rear 360 + normal view. It aids you while parking your vehicle either forward or backwards. Note: Use caution when using the 360 view while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. 242 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Cruise Control Switching Cruise Control On PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Press ON. Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicator appears in the information display. E71340 Setting the Cruise Speed 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press SET+ or SET-. 3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Note: The indicator changes color. USING CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Changing the Set Speed Note: If you accelerate by pressing the accelerator pedal, the set speed will not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set. WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed could increase above the set speed. The system does not apply the brakes. • • Note: Cruise control disengages if the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set speed when driving uphill. • Press SET+ or SET- to change the set speed in small increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press SET+ or SET-. Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. Canceling the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Resuming the Set Speed Press RES. Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. E191329 The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Press OFF when the system is in standby mode, or switch the ignition off. 243 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Cruise Control USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped) WARNING: Adaptive cruise control does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane. WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road conditions when using adaptive cruise control. The system does not replace attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to the road may result in a crash, serious injury or death. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a crash warning or avoidance system. WARNING: Do not use adaptive cruise control with a snow plow blade installed. WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes. The system adjusts your vehicle speed to maintain the set gap between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You can select four gap settings. The system uses a radar sensor that projects a beam directly in front of your vehicle. WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer that has aftermarket electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. E248613 The adaptive cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On WARNING: Adaptive cruise control may not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h). Press ON. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road. E144529 244 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display. Cruise Control 2. Keep the brake pedal fully pressed. 3. Press RES+. 4. The set speed adjusts to 20 mph (30 km/h). 5. A green indicator light, the current gap setting and your set speed appear in the information display. Following a Vehicle E183738 Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display. WARNING: When following a vehicle, your vehicle does not always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. 1. Drive to desired speed. 2. Press SET-. 3. A green indicator light, the current gap setting and your set speed appear in the information display. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed Note: When you are following a vehicle and you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive cruise control may provide a small temporary acceleration to help you pass. Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system. When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster. E183738 5. A vehicle image illuminates if the system detects a vehicle in front of you. Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1. Follow a vehicle to a complete stop. 245 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Cruise Control Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until: • The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in. • You set a new gap distance. The system applies the brakes to slow your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from the vehicle in front. The system only applies limited braking. You can override the system by applying the brakes. E248779 If the system determines that its maximum braking level is not sufficient, an audible warning sounds when the system continues to brake. A red warning bar displays on the windshield and you must take immediate action. A Gap decrease. B Gap increase. Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for less than three seconds, your vehicle accelerates from a stationary position to follow the vehicle ahead. E183738 If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete stop and remains stationary for more than three seconds, press RES+ or the accelerator pedal to follow the vehicle ahead. The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the image. Setting the Gap Distance Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore the distance adjusts with your vehicle speed. Note: When you select Tow/Haul mode, the gap distance increases slightly. Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions. You can decrease or increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front by pressing the gap control. 246 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Cruise Control Changing the Set Speed Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings Graphic display, bars indicated between vehicles Distance Gap 1 Closest. Sport. 2 Close. Normal. 3 Medium. Normal. 4 Far. Comfort. • Dynamic behavior • • Press RES+ or SET- to change the set speed in small increments. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Press RES+ or SET-. Press and hold RES+ or SET- to change the set speed in large increments. Release the control when you reach the desired speed. The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting. Canceling the Set Speed Overriding the Set Speed Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. Resuming the Set Speed WARNING: If you override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead. Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it. Press RES+. Your vehicle speed returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. When you press the accelerator pedal, you override the set speed and gap distance. When you override the system, the green indicator light illuminates and the vehicle image does not appear in the information display. E144529 Automatic Cancellation Automatic cancellation can also occur if: • The tires lose traction. • You apply the parking brake. The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle. Park Brake Application Automatic parking brake application and cancellation occurs if: • You unbuckle the seatbelt after you stop the vehicle. • You hold the vehicle at a stop continuously for more than three minutes. 247 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Cruise Control Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow Usage The radar sensor has a limited field of view. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you. Note: An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it applies brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool. The system functions normally again after the brakes cool. Note: When towing with adaptive cruise control, switch on Tow/Haul Mode. Select a lower gear when the system is active in situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades, for example in mountainous areas. The system needs additional engine braking in these situations to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it from overheating. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off Note: You erase the set speed and gap setting when you switch the system off. Press OFF when the system is in standby mode, or switch the ignition off. Detection Issues WARNING: On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. E71621 Detection issues can occur: WARNING: If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 248 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front. B With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane. C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road. Cruise Control Blocked Sensor In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take action when necessary. If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detection. Optimal system performance requires a clear view of the road by the windshield-mounted camera. Optimal performance may not occur if: • The camera is blocked. • There is poor visibility or lighting conditions. • There are bad weather conditions. System Not Available The system may not turn on if there is: • A blocked sensor. • High brake temperature. • A failure in the system or a related system. E249424 Note: You cannot see the radar sensor. It is behind a fascia panel. A message displays if something obstructs the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor is in the lower grille. The system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function when something blocks the sensor. Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying: Cause Action The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed. Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction. The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is free from obstruction. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. 249 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Cruise Control Cause Action Water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no roadside objects. Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control. Radar is out of alignment due to a front end Contact an authorized dealer to have the impact. radar checked for proper coverage and operation. The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed. Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera. The windshield in front of the camera is clean, but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect that it is free from obstruction. Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle. Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake when your vehicle is approaching slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary. You can change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display. The cruise control indicator light replaces the adaptive cruise E71340 control indicator light if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, and the system does not respond to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains active to maintain set speed. 250 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions. For example, bird droppings, insects and snow or ice. DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped) Note: If the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged, the system may not function. WARNING: The system is designed to aid the driver. It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment. You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle, unless a MyKey™ is detected. WARNING: At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: If enabled in the menu, the system activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). WARNING: The system may not function if the sensor is blocked. WARNING: Take regular rest breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system to warn you. WARNING: Certain driving styles may result in the system warning you even if you are not feeling tired. E249505 The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor. WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. If the system detects that your driving alertness is reduced below a certain threshold, the system will alert you using a chime and a message in the information display. WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. Using Driver Alert Switching the system on and off WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. You may switch the system on or off through the information display by selecting Settings then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the menu. When activated, the system will monitor your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings, and other factors. WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us. 251 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids System Warnings Note: The system will not issue warnings below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h). WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. The warning system is in two stages. At first the system issues a temporary warning that you need to take a rest. This message will only appear for a short time. If the system detects further reduction in driving alertness, another warning may be issued which will remain in the information display for a longer time. Press OK on the steering wheel control to clear the warning. When active the system will run automatically in the background and only issue a warning if required. WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning. WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction. Resetting the System You can reset the system by either: • • Switching the ignition off and on. Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver’s door. WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us. Equipped) Note: The system works above 40 mph (64 km/h). WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Note: The system works as long as the camera can detect one lane marking. Note: When you select aid or alert and aid mode and the system detects no steering activity for a short period, the system alerts you to put your hands on the steering wheel. The system may detect a light grip or touch on the steering wheel as hands off driving. WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle. Note: The system may not function if the camera is blocked, or if the windshield is damaged or dirty. 252 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids System Settings The system has optional menu settings available. See General Information (page 112). The system stores the last known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you switch on the system. Adjust the settings to enable one of the three modes: Alert Only E249505 When you switch the system on and the system detects an unintentional drift out of your lane is likely to occur, the system notifies or assists you to stay in your lane through the steering system and information display. Depending on the feature operation mode you select, the system provides a warning by vibrating the steering wheel or a steering assistance by gently counter steering your vehicle back into the lane. E165515 Alert Only mode provides a steering wheel vibration when an unintended lane departure is detected. Switching the System On and Off Note: The system on or off setting is stored until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey™ is detected. If the system detects a MyKey™, it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert. Aid Only Note: If a MyKey™ is detected, pressing the button does not affect the on or off status of the system. You can only change the mode and intensity settings. E173233 Press the button located on the center console to switch the system on or off. E165516 Aid Only mode provides a steering assistance toward the lane center. 253 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids When you switch the system off, the lane marking graphics do not display. Alert + Aid Mode Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may still be displayed if adaptive cruise control is enabled. While the system is on, the color of the lane markings change to indicate the system status. Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side. This may be because: E165517 • A Alert B Aid • • • • • Alert + aid mode provides a steering assistance toward the lane center. If your vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the system provides a steering wheel vibration. • Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate general zone coverage. They do not provide exact zone parameters. Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibration used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does not affect the aid mode. • • • Low Medium High See Troubleshooting for additional information. Green: Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention, on the indicated side. System Display Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping aid intervention. If you switch the system on in alert mode, an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane markings appears in the information display. E144813 E173234 Your vehicle is under the activation speed. The direction indicator is active. Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver. Quick braking. Fast acceleration. The road has no or poor lane markings in the camera field-of-view. The camera is obscured or unable to detect the lane markings due to environmental, traffic or vehicle conditions. For example, significant sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog, following a large vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the lane or poor headlamp illumination. Red: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning. If you switch the system on in aid or alert and aid mode, arrows appear with lane markings. 254 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Troubleshooting Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature. The sun is shining directly into the camera lens. A quick intentional lane change has occurred. Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings. Driving at high speeds in curves. The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago. Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones. Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light. Sudden offset in lane markings. ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active. There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield. You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you. Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa. There is standing water on the road. Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads. Lane width is too narrow or too wide. The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement. Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads. 255 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode? High cross winds are present. There is a large road crown. Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs. Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure. The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified. The system is designed to detect vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone. The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The detection area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) to alert you of faster approaching vehicles. BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (If Equipped) WARNING: Do not use the blind spot information system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The blind spot information system is not a replacement for careful driving. Note: The system does not prevent contact with other vehicles. It is not designed to detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals or other infrastructures. WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. Using the Blind Spot Information System Vehicles with Automatic Transmission The system turns on when all of the following occur: • You start your vehicle. • You shift into drive (D). • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). Note: The system does not operate in park (P) or reverse (R). E255695 256 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Vehicles with Manual Transmission Blocked Sensors The system turns on when all of the following occur: • You start your vehicle. • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). Note: The system does not operate in reverse (R). System Lights and Messages E190708 The sensors are inside the brake lamp on both sides of your vehicle. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. Note: Blocked sensors could affect system performance. E142442 If the sensors become blocked, a message may appear in the information display. See Information Messages (page 124). The alert indicators remain illuminated but the system does not alert you. When the system detects a vehicle, an alert indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. If you turn the direction indicator on for that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator flashes. Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow (If Equipped) Note: The system may not alert you if a vehicle quickly passes through the detection zone. E225007 257 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Setting up a Trailer The system is designed to detect vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone (A). The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle and trailer, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to the end of your trailer. The system turns on when all of the following occur: • You attach a trailer to your vehicle. • You have set up the trailer to work with the system through the information display. • You start your vehicle. • You shift into drive (D). • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). E225008 A Trailer length B Trailer width C Trailer hitch ball You can set-up a trailer to work with the system through the information display. See General Information (page 112). When setting up a trailer, a sequence of screens appear asking for trailer information. Note: If you switch the Blind Spot Information System off, the Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow automatically turns off. Note: If you connect a trailer to your vehicle and do not set up the trailer through the information display, the system turns off and a warning message appears. See Information Messages (page 124). • Select type of trailer screen Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck. The system only supports conventional trailers. If you select fifth wheel or gooseneck, the system automatically turns off. Note: When towing a trailer, the extended blind spot zone range decreases to a short fixed or non-variable distance behind the trailer. The extended blind spot zone range returns to 59 ft (18 m) when you disconnect the trailer. • Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer screen? If no, the system turns off. If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. • Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) and length less than 33 ft (10.1 m)? If no, the system turns off. If yes, the menu goes to the next screen. • Trailer width measurement: The width of the trailer is measured at the front of the trailer. It is not measured at the widest point of the trailer. The maximum width at the front of the trailer that the system can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m). 258 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids If you select a trailer in the information display before connecting a trailer to your vehicle, the system loads the configuration for the selected trailer. When you connect a trailer, a warning message appears. Note: You do not need to enter an exact trailer width measurement. You only need to confirm that the width of the trailer is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less. • Trailer length measurement: Note: A second warning message may appear stating that the Cross Traffic Alert system has turned off. The Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow continues to function normally in this situation. The trailer length is the distance between the trailer hitch ball and the rear of the trailer. The maximum length that the system can support is 33 ft (10.1 m). • Enter length of trailer: The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m). Toggling up or down using the menu buttons increases or decreases the measurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select a length that is equal to or within 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measured length. For example, if the actual measured length is 25 ft (7.6 m), toggle the length in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). When you enter the length of the trailer, the system setup is saved. Note: The system remembers the last selected trailer set up when you start your vehicle. Trailer Considerations The system is designed to work with a trailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less, and a total length from the trailer hitch ball to the rear of the trailer of 33 ft (10.1 m) or less. Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack or cargo rack with electrical lighting, enter a length of 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alert remains on for trailers with a length of 3 ft (1 m) or less. Some trailers may cause a slight change in system performance: • Large box trailers may cause false alerts to occur when driving next to infrastructures or near parked cars. A false alert may also occur while making a 90-degree turn. • Trailers that have a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front and have a total length greater than 20 ft (6 m) may cause delayed alerts when a vehicle is passing at high speed. • Box trailers that have a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front may cause early alerts when you pass a vehicle. • Clam shell or V-Nose box trailers with a width greater than 8.5 ft (2.6 m) at the front may cause delayed alerts when a vehicle traveling the same speed as your vehicle merges lanes. Note: Proper measurement and measurement entry is required for the system to function as designed. System Operation When you connect a trailer to your vehicle, the trailer set up menu appears in the information display. This menu allows you to set up a new trailer or choose from a previously set up trailer. A warning message appears and the system turns off if you do not choose or add a new trailer. Note: The warning message may not appear until your vehicle speed reaches 22 mph (35 km/h). 259 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids System Errors CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. See Information Messages (page 124). Equipped) Switching the System On and Off WARNING: Do not use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before reversing out of a parking space. The cross traffic alert system is not a replacement for careful driving. You can switch the system off using the information display. See General Information (page 112). When you switch the system off, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. When you switch the system on or off, the alert indicators flash twice. WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an approved trailer tow module and tow bar, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer. The system is designed to alert you of vehicles approaching from the sides when you shift into reverse (R). Using the Cross Traffic Alert System To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer. The system is designed to detect vehicles that approach with a speed up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness. The system turns on when you start the engine and you shift into reverse (R). The system turns off when you shift out of reverse (R). 260 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids E142440 The sensor on the left-hand side is only partially obstructed and zone coverage on the right-hand side is maximized. E142441 261 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Zone coverage also decreases when parking at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage on that side is severely reduced. The sensors are inside the brake lamp on both sides of your vehicle. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts Note: Blocked sensors could affect system performance. If the sensors are blocked, a message may appear in the information display when you shift into reverse (R). See Information Messages (page 124). System Limitations The system may not correctly operate when any of the following occur: • The sensors are blocked. • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are obstructing the sensors. • Vehicles approach at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). • The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph (12 km/h). • You reverse out of an angled parking space. E142442 When the system detects a vehicle, an indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. A tone sounds and a message appears in the information display. Note: In exceptional conditions, the system could alert you even when there is nothing in the detection zone, for example a vehicle passing in the distance. System Errors If the system detects a fault, a message displays. See General Information (page 112). Blocked Sensors Switching the System Off and On You can temporarily switch the system off using the information display. See General Information (page 112). When you switch the system off, a message displays. See Information Messages (page 124). Note: The system turns on each time you switch the ignition on and you shift into reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the system off, it turns on the next time you switch the ignition on. E190708 262 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort required for you to steer your vehicle. This increased effort prevents overheating and permanent damage to the steering system. You do not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation. Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with an approved trailer tow module and tow bar, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer. To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer. Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • Correct tire pressures. • Uneven tire wear. • Loose or worn suspension components. • Loose or worn steering components. • Improper vehicle alignment. STEERING Electric Power Steering WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the ignition on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Note: A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull. Adaptive Learning The electronic power steering system adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems. WARNING: If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Obtain immediate service from an authorized dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of steering control. Your vehicle has an electric power steering system. There is no fluid reservoir. No maintenance is required. If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving, electric power steering assistance is lost. The steering system still operates and you can steer your vehicle manually. Manually steering your vehicle requires more effort. 263 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians that the system cannot distinguish from a group. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Equipped) WARNING: At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: The system cannot help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain a safe distance and speed. WARNING: The system does not detect vehicles that are driving in a different direction, cyclists or animals. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Using the Pre-Collision Assist System The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and pedestrian detection is active at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING: The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury. E156130 If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the same direction as yours, or a pedestrian within your driving path, the system provides three levels of functionality: WARNING: The system may fail or operate with reduced function during cold and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. 1. Alert 2. Brake Support 3. Active Braking WARNING: In situations where the vehicle camera has limited detection capability, this may reduce system performance. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex backgrounds, running E156131 264 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Alert: When active, the system provides a flashing visual warning and an audible warning sound. Brake Support: Assists the driver in reducing collision speed by preparing the brake system for rapid braking. Brake support does not automatically activate the brakes, but if the driver presses the brake pedal even lightly, brake support could add additional braking up to full force. Active Braking: Active braking may activate if the system determines that a collision is imminent. The system may help the driver reduce impact damage or avoid the crash completely. Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings. E254791 If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is small, a red visual indication displays. Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system automatically disables when you select 4X4 LOW or when you manually disable AdvanceTrac™. Note: Distance indication and alert deactivates and the graphics do not display when adaptive cruise control is active. Distance Indication and Alert Distance indication and alert is a function that provides the driver with a graphical indication of the time gap to other preceding vehicles traveling in the same direction. The distance indication and alert screen in the information display shows one of the graphics that follow. 265 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap 62 mph (100 km/h) Normal Grey >82 ft (25 m) >0.9sec 62 mph (100 km/h) Normal Yellow 56–82 ft (17–25 m) between 0.6sec and 0.9sec 62 mph (100 km/h) Normal Red <56 ft (17 m) <0.6sec Blocked Sensors Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist Settings You can adjust the Alert and Distance Alert sensitivity to one of three possible settings by using the information display control. See General Information (page 112). You can switch the Distance Indication and Alert function off using the information display controls. See General Information (page 112). If required, you can switch active braking off using the information display controls. See General Information (page 112). If required, you can turn the entire Pre-Collision Assist feature off using the information display controls. See General Information (page 112). Note: We recommend that you turn the system off if you install a snow plow or similar object in such a way that it may block the radar sensor. Your vehicle remembers the selected setting across key cycles. E249424 If a message regarding a blocked sensor or camera appears in the information display, the radar signals or camera images are obstructed. The radar sensor is located behind a fascia cover near the driver side of the lower grille. With an obstructed radar, the Pre-Collision Assist system does not function and cannot detect a vehicle ahead. With the front camera obstructed, 266 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids the Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the system performance on moving vehicles reduces. The following table lists possible causes and actions for when this message displays. Cause Action Clean the grille surface in front of the radar The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or remove the object causing the obstrucor obstructed in some way. tion. The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that there is no obstruction. The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporHeavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should with the radar signals. automatically reactivate a short time after the weather conditions improve. The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporSwirling water, or snow or ice on the surface arily disabled. Pre-Collision Assist should of the road may interfere with the radar automatically reactivate a short time after signals. the weather conditions improve. Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact. Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera. The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect that there is no obstruction. Note: Proper system operation requires a clear view of the road by the camera. Have any windshield damage in the area of the camera's field of view repaired. Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat at the camera or a potential misalignment condition, a message may display in the information display indicating temporary sensor unavailability. When operational conditions are correct, the message deactivates. For example, when the ambient temperature around the sensor decreases or the sensor automatically recalibrates successfully. Note: If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detections. Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper coverage and operation. 267 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Console Shifter DRIVE CONTROL Selectable Drive Modes The system delivers a driving experience through a suite of sophisticated electronic vehicle systems. These systems optimize steering, handling and powertrain response. This provides a single location to control multiple systems performance settings. Changing the drive mode automatically changes the functionality of the following systems: • • • E184456 To change the drive mode setting, press the drive mode button. The drive mode selection menu appears in the instrument cluster and allows you to select through the available drive modes. Electronic stability control and traction control maintains your vehicle control in adverse conditions or high performance driving. See Stability Control (page 227). Electronic throttle control enhances the powertrain response to your inputs. Transmission controls are optimized with shift schedules tuned to each terrain. Note: Mode changes are not available when the vehicle ignition is off. In drive (D), only some modes may be available. Normal – Delivers a balanced combination of comfort and handling. This mode provides an engaging drive experience and a direct connection to the road without sacrificing any of the composure demanded from your vehicle. E225310 Using the System The system automatically tailors your vehicle configuration for each mode you select. Column Shifter E161509 Tow Haul – Improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load. Snow/Wet – For use during inclement weather conditions. Vehicle response becomes tuned for optimum traction at lower speeds and confidence inspiring stability at higher speeds. E225312 EcoSelect – Offers the best possible fuel economy with E194390 tradeoffs in vehicle performance and comfort. E249567 268 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Aids Sport – Use for spirted and aggressive off road driving E176099 situations. Vehicle response becomes tuned for max off road performance. Note: Your vehicle may only be equipped with some of the drive modes listed above. Note: The system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system for proper operation. Certain drive modes are not available based on the gearshift position. If a mode is unavailable due to a system fault or change in gearshift position, the mode defaults to Normal. Some drive modes reduce traction and stability control E130458 performance and the warning indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster. See Using Stability Control (page 228). 269 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying Secure cargo with up to 275 lb (1,223 N) force applied between opposing box link cleats, or up to 600 lb (2,669 N) force applied between diagonal box link cleats. LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES (If Equipped) BoxLink™ Cleats Removing Locking BoxLink Cleats These cleats attach to the inner box walls to help you to tie down cargo. The cleats can be locked to prevent removal or unlocked for removal. 1. Insert the key into the lock and turn clockwise to unlock. 2. Pull bottom of the cleat outward while pushing top of cleat down. 3. Hold on to the cleat as it clears the mounting slot. BoxLink Cleats Note: Leave the key in the lock when removing or installing the cleats. The key cannot be removed from the lock unless it is in the locked position. Installing Locking BoxLink Cleats E189558 E184885 1. Insert the key into lock and turn clockwise to unlock. 2. Insert the cleat into the mounting slot and push upward. Make sure the cleat is fully engaged. A. 275 lb (1,223 N) maximum force between directly opposed cleats. B. 600 lb (2,669 N) maximum force between diagonally opposed cleats. 270 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying 3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock. 4. Remove the key. Tire and Loading Label Information Example: LOAD LIMIT Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer This section guides you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both. Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label or Safety Compliance Certification label. E198719 Payload PAYLOAD E143816 271 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire and Loading Information label is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload. Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload. GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo. It appears on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. 272 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. Safety Compliance Certification Label Example: E198828 WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury. WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight Maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to your vehicle, personal injury or both. GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing 273 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying Steps for determining the correct load limit: Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 274 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. BED ACCESS (If Equipped) Box Side Step Use the step for easier access to the vehicle bed. Note: Close the step before driving. Note: Do not exceed 500 lb (227 kg) on the step. This includes you plus cargo. Note: Do not use the step to lift the vehicle. Only use proper jacking points. Note: The step may operate more slowly in cool temperatures. Note: The step mechanism may trap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. This may prevent the step from deploying automatically when you press the button. If this happens, make sure that you press the button down and carefully pull out the step manually. Wash off the debris with a high-pressure sprayer and stow the step. 275 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying Deploying the Step WARNING: Make sure that you correctly install the ramp to the tailgate plate. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: Do not step or sit on the ramp when it is in the stowed position. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: Only install the ramp within the prescribed ramp angles. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E167268 Push down on the button with your foot. The step automatically extends from the stowed position. Note: The ramp maximum capacity is 800 lb (363 kg). Stowing the Step Note: Verify the ramp is on stable ground before usage. Note: For loading and unloading equipment, your ramp should be set between 10 degrees upward and 26 degrees downward to avoid damage to the ramp claw and tailgate plate. Note: When using your vehicle for off-road operation, remove the bed ramps from the vehicle and store them in a safe location away from your vehicle. E167269 Using the Bed Ramp Push the step under your vehicle with your foot until it fully latches. Do not push on the button while stowing the step. 1. Remove the front and rear cables. BED RAMPS (If Equipped) WARNING: When sliding the ramp up or down, take care not to get your fingers or hands caught in the mechanism. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E194380 276 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying 2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrew the cam bolts. 3. Remove the ramp from the ramp holder. E211150 4. Rotate the stops at the underside of the ramp to the open position. Note: You can use a smooth surface tool to rotate the stops. E194383 6. Pull the location pin outward and extend the ramp until the pin is seated in the usage position, then set the ramp on even ground. Stowing the Bed Ramp 1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin outward. 2. Slide the ramp into the storage position until the location pin locks. Note: Make sure the proper pin location has been applied for your bed size. E194382 5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgate plate. 3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate plate. 4. Rotate the stops at the underside of the ramp to the closed position. 277 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Load Carrying E194391 E194388 5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder. 6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam lever arms. 7. Attach the front and rear cables. Note: Make sure you properly secure the locking cable. If the locking cable is unsecured, you may hear a rattling noise. 2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwards into the installed position. 3. Tighten the ramp holder nut. Note: The nut should be on the upper stud. Installing the Ramp Holder E194387 1. Hook the top of the ramp holder over the mounting plate and rotate the ramp holder into position. 278 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: To prevent your trailer from accumulating distance, and the trailer information status appearing when you restart your vehicle after disconnecting your trailer, you must deactivate your trailer. Using the information display, go to the Towing menu and then the Select Trailer option. Select the No active trailer option. See Information Displays (page 112). Your vehicle may have electrical items, such as fuses or relays, related to towing. See Fuses (page 334). Your vehicle may have ability to modify trailer towing features. See General Information (page 112). Your vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer. Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components periodically during, and after, any towing operation. TOWING A TRAILER WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. WARNING: Do not exceed the lowest rating capacity for your vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloading your vehicle or trailer hitch can impair your vehicle stability and handling. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not cut, drill, weld or modify the trailer hitch. Modifying the trailer hitch could reduce the hitch rating. 279 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in another chapter of this manual. See Load Limit (page 271). You can also find information in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online. Load Placement To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving: • Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor. • Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires. • Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. • Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side. RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/ 280 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: The system relies on user measurements to determine sticker placement and system limits. It is critical to take the key measurements correctly. Incorrect measurements can result in the improper function of the system up to and including contact between the vehicle and trailer. TRAILER REVERSING AIDS (If Equipped) Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: The system limits vehicle speed when backing up. The system is not a replacement for proper use of the throttle and brake pedals. Principle of Operation This feature helps you to steer your vehicle when reversing with a trailer. Turn and hold the control knob in the direction you want the trailer to go and the system takes over the steering. This allows you to focus on checking the mirrors and operating the brake and accelerator. WARNING: This system is an extra driving aid. It does not replace your attention and judgment, or the need to apply the brakes. This system does NOT automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake pedal when necessary, you may collide with another vehicle. Each trailer you use with your vehicle has to be setup once. You must take care to follow the setup process accurately, to make sure the sticker is placed correctly. Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist Note: The system is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Note: Your vehicle saves the trailer information when you enter it into the system. A maximum of 10 trailers can be added to the system. Note: You must always be aware of the vehicle and trailer combination, and the surrounding environment. Note: The system does not detect or prevent your vehicle or trailer from making contact with obstacles in the surrounding environment. Step 1: Position your Vehicle and Trailer Hitch your trailer to the truck and connect the electrical wiring harness. Check to make sure that the wiring is working. See Essential Towing Checks (page 303). Note: Keep in mind that the front end of your vehicle swings out when changing the direction of the trailer. 281 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Step 2: Follow the Information Display Prompts E209759 Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on a level surface. E209759 For best results, make sure that your trailer rides level with the ground when you hitch your vehicle. More information on selecting your towbar is available in the Towing section. See Towing (page 279). E209765 E209760 1. Press the button to turn the system on. 2. Select the option to add a trailer in the instrument display, using the steering wheel control. See General Information (page 112). 3. Add a personalized name for the trailer using the screen prompts. Use the down arrow to scroll to the desired letter and then press the right arrow to advance to the next letter. Press OK to continue. 4. Select the type of trailer brake system for the trailer you are adding. 5. Select the brake effort level for the trailer. Make sure that the trailer and your vehicle are in line with each other. You can do this by putting the transmission in drive (D) and pulling straight forward. 282 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: The default option is low. This is recommended for most trailers. If the trailer's brakes require more initial voltage, or if you prefer more aggressive braking then select the other options as required. Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry and clean horizontal surface. For best results apply the sticker when temperatures are above 32°F (0°C). Note: Do not move stickers after they are placed. Do not re-use any stickers if removed. 6. Select the trailer type. Some examples of conventional type trailers are shown below. Note: Additional stickers may be purchased through your authorized dealer. Note: You cannot use the system with the types of trailers marked with the cross. The system only works with conventional trailers. It does not work with other types including goose neck and fifth wheel. E209805 Use the supplied measurement card, a tape measure and pen to carefully mark the area where to attach the sticker. The sticker is supplied in the back cover pocket of your quick start guide. Make sure the entire sticker is within the gray zone between the two arcs or distance markers on the diagram, and is also visible in the rear view camera display. E209766 Follow the information display prompts. Once you have found the correct location, place the sticker. Step 3: Place the Sticker on the Trailer Frame Step 4: Take Measurements After you place the sticker on the trailer you must take some measurements. You must place the sticker in an area visible by the rear view camera. Note: You must take accurate measurements for the system to operate properly. Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lamps turn on automatically to improve visibility. Note: An assistant can help to carry out the following procedure. Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct the rear view camera's view of the sticker. For example, items such as a jack handle or wiring. 283 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: When rounding in inches, round upward if the measured length is a quarter inch or greater. Round downward if the measured length is less than a quarter inch. For example 12.25 in (31.11 cm) would be rounded up to 12.50 in (31.75 cm). 12.13 in (30.8 cm) would be rounded down to 12.00 in (30.48 cm). Distance B Note: When rounding in centimeters, round to the nearest whole centimeter. If the measurement is less than 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round downward. If the measurement is more than or equal to 0.2 in (0.5 cm) round upward. For example, 11.9 in (30.3 cm) would be rounded down to 11.8 in (30 cm). 12.0 in (30.5 cm) would be rounded up to 12.2 in (31 cm). Distance D The horizontal distance from the center of the ball hitch to the center of the sticker. Distance C The distance from the rear view camera to the center of the sticker. The horizontal distance from the tailgate to the center of the trailer axle (single axle trailers), or the center of the axles (trailers with dual axles or more). Note: Round distance D to the nearest inch. Step 5: Enter Measurements Using the Information Display Note: Use consistent metric or imperial units as required by your country or vehicle. Using the measurements you record, enter the required data into the system. Follow the on screen prompts to enter each of the measurements taken in step 4. Use the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the numbers as necessary. Press OK to confirm each measurement. When you add the last measurement, the information display shows all of the measurements you entered. You can choose to confirm or change the measurements. The measurement card requires you to record four key distances (A, B, C, D). Record the trailer name for these measurements. A B Step 6: Confirming the Sticker Location Check the rear view camera display to see if the system identifies the sticker. The system marks the sticker with a red circle. Confirm that the red circle shows over the sticker image in the rear view camera display. C D E209806 D Note: If the system cannot locate the sticker, try cleaning the camera lens. Make sure the sticker is within the zone as indicated in step 3. Distance A The horizontal distance from the license plate to the center of the ball hitch on the trailer. 284 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Calibrating the System To complete setup, drive your vehicle straight forward between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h), as directed by the information display. The information display shows a message during calibration and after calibration is complete Note: Keep the steering wheel straight during the calibration process. If the steering wheel is in a turned position, the calibration pauses. The information display prompts you to drive straight forward to complete the calibration. Note: For best results, do not calibrate the system at night. Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist To use the system, press the button and select the trailer from the display. E209765 When the sticker is located, the display prompts you to shift into reverse (R). The system turns on. Note: The system does not function if your hands are on the steering wheel. Remove your hands to resume operation. Follow the screen prompts to steer your vehicle and trailer. Note: You may have to drive forward to straighten the trailer. Take your hands off the steering wheel and turn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist control knob instead. The knob acts as the steering control for the trailer. Note: The more you turn the knob, the sharper the trailer turns. 285 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Release the knob when the trailer is moving in the direction you want. Control the accelerator and brakes while the system steers your vehicle automatically to keep the trailer moving straight back. Note: You may have to use the knob to correct the trailer direction when attempting to move the trailer straight back under some conditions. E209812 Note: The system limits the vehicle speed. Turn and hold counterclockwise to make the trailer go left. Note: When you release the knob or turn it to the center position, your vehicle follows the trailer's path. Troubleshooting Note: The system requires a clear view of the sticker placed on the trailer. You must keep the camera lens and sticker clean for the system to operate correctly. E209813 Setup Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailer go right. The system is designed to be used with a wide variety of trailers. There are some trailers that do not have a proper surface and location to mount the sticker. These trailers are not supported. Attempts to place the sticker on a surface that does not meet the sticker placement requirement listed in Step 3 of the setup instruction or entering inaccurate measurements to proceed through setup can result in improper system function. Note: Practice maneuvering with the system in a safe open area first. Note: Try backing up in a straight line and then turning the knob slowly in the direction you want to go. Note: Quickly turning and releasing the knob results in a jerky movement of the vehicle. Accurate measurements are critical for correct system function. If you need to check measurements entered or change them you can access them through the instrument cluster. Choose the option to change the sticker from the change trailer settings menu. It is not necessary to remove the sticker if you are just reviewing or changing measurements. E209814 The following menu warnings or difficulties may occur during setup. Tips to resolve them are listed below. 286 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: If you still experience issues with the system's ability to detect the sticker, see the information in the next section regarding sticker lost during system operation. Measurement C has reached maximum or minimum value: • Make sure you follow the sticker placement instructions in step 3 of the setup. Stickers placed outside the allowed zone adversely affect the system performance and could cause improper feature function. If you have met all the criteria for sticker placement and you see this message, the sticker is either too far below or too close to the camera to properly recognize the sticker. In order for the system to operate correctly, the sticker height must be lowered if you receive the minimum warning or the sticker height must be raised if you receive the maximum warning. • Only one sticker can be placed on the trailer for correct system function. The previous sticker must be removed or covered so only one sticker is visible to the camera. • Measurement B and C must be measured again if a new sticker is placed on the trailer. Measurement A has reached maximum or minimum value: • The system is designed to work with drawbars that have a license plate to hitch ball center measurement of 9 in (23 cm) to 16 in (41 cm) when installed. Do not attempt to use drawbars that have a length outside this range as the system performance will be degraded and could cause improper system function. • Make sure that the measurement being made is the horizontal distance only from license plate and the hitch ball center. A straight line distance that includes any vertical rise or drop increases the measurement and makes it inaccurate. Inaccurate measurements degrade system performance and could cause improper system function. See step 4 of the setup instruction to review measurement instructions. Measurement D has reached maximum or minimum value: • Make sure that the measurement being made is the horizontal distance only from tailgate to the center of the single axle or the center of all the axles on the trailer. See step 4 of the setup for additional measurement instructions. The system does not support trailer lengths outside the range allowed by the information display. Measurement B has reached maximum or minimum value: • Make sure that the sticker placement instruction in step 3 of the setup has been followed. Stickers placed outside the allowed zone will adversely affect the system performance and could cause improper feature function. • Make sure that the measurement being made is the horizontal distance only from center of sticker to the hitch ball center. A straight line distance that includes any vertical rise or drop increases the measurement and causes an inaccurate value to be entered into the system. See step 4 of the setup for additional measurement instructions. 287 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing The system is not available: • The system relies on many sub-systems in your vehicle to operate correctly. If those sub-systems are not operating correctly, the system may not be available. • Low battery voltage is a condition which prevents the system from operating. Please make sure the battery is correctly charged if the system is not available. • You may need to drive your vehicle straight forward above 25 mph (40 km/h) before the system is available again. • If the message continues to display, see your authorized dealer for service. System is circling something beside the sticker or system cannot find the sticker: • Make sure the rear camera is clean and the sticker is clearly visible in the camera image. Clean the camera and sticker if necessary. • The camera system uses the entered measurements to help locate the sticker. Inaccurate sticker measurements degrade the system’s ability to locate the sticker. Verify the measurements you enter into the system are accurate. • Remove the incorrectly circled label or decal if possible. • If you cannot resolve the issue, try a new sticker location. The sticker location must still meet the requirements noted in step 3 of the setup instructions. Only one sticker can be placed on the trailer for correct system function. The previous sticker must be removed or covered so only one sticker is visible to the camera. Sticker lost: • If the system cannot initially find the sticker, it may be necessary for you to change the lighting conditions by moving the vehicle and trailer or waiting until conditions change. • Check for the following if you receive the lost sticker message while using the system. • Stop your vehicle as soon as the message displays. • Make sure the sticker is visible and the pattern is discernable in the rear view camera image. • Clean the sticker and camera to make sure they are unobstructed. • Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and water. • Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbing alcohol sprayed directly onto the sticker, and then wipe clean with a soft cloth. Calibration The system monitors various vehicle parameters to ensure your vehicle is being driven straight and the trailer is straight behind your vehicle. Any steering input or trailer movement pauses the calibration. For best results: • Use a long, straight, smooth and level road when attempting to calibrate. • Drive straight forward. • Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h). System Operation The following warnings or difficulties may occur during feature operation. Tips to resolve them are listed below. 288 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing • • • • • Remove any items that may be blocking the view of the sticker. Depending on your trailer configuration and any equipment mounted to your trailer, it is possible for the sticker to be blocked from view of the camera as it rotates on the hitch ball but not be blocked during setup. Remove the obstruction if possible. It may be necessary to remove the sticker from its current location if the obstruction cannot be cleared. Place a new sticker that is visible to the camera in all positions of the trailer behind your vehicle. Placing the sticker on a surface angled away from the vehicle reduces performance. Use a drawbar that positions the trailer level to the ground when attached to the vehicle. This typically provides a level surface to mount the sticker. Place the sticker on a bracket or other object when no level surface is available. Make sure the entire sticker is on a flat surface that is completely visible to the camera. Do not fold the sticker over an edge on the trailer frame. This can degrade performance. Shadows on the sticker may effect tracking performance under some lighting conditions. Moving the sticker to another location within the allowed placement area may improve performance. Use the change sticker option in the information display menu if you move the sticker. You can change your sticker location by going into the information display menu, selecting trailer options, selecting change trailer settings and then selecting the change sticker option. The previous sticker must be removed. ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER FOR CORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION. • • The camera system uses the entered measurements to help locate the sticker. Inaccurate measurements reduce the system’s ability to locate the sticker. Check the measurements entered into the system are correct. Refer to step 4 of setup for instructions on measurements. You can change your measurement by going into the information display menu, selecting trailer options, selecting change trailer setting and then selecting the change sticker option. Disregard the prompt to remove this sticker and continue to the next step if you only plan to update the measurements for the current sticker location. System does not reverse straight: • Factors such as the drawbar connection to the hitch receiver, road camber, road grade and compliance in the trailer suspension can influence how straight the system is able to reverse your trailer when the knob is not turned. You can compensate for the trailer drifting to the right or left by slowly turning the knob until the trailer is following your desired path and then holding the knob in that position. If you would like to recalibrate the system for straight backing, you can do so with the following procedure. • Go into the information display menu, select trailer options, select change trailer setting and then select the change sticker option. Your saved measurements display. Do not change them but continue to confirm measurements. Once you confirm the measurements, the system then prompts you to perform the calibration procedure. 289 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing System consistently shows Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop now Maximum trailer angle Press Knob to Exit: • The system uses your measurements to determine sticker position and establish system limits. Accurate sticker placement and trailer measurements provide the best system performance. If you are consistently receiving this warning, it is likely there is an issue with sticker placement or the entered measurements. Make sure that the sticker is placed correctly based on step 3 and the measurements were made correctly according to step 4. The troubleshooting guide for trailer measurements can also be reviewed for help in making measurements. • To change sticker location or change trailer measurements, go into the information display menu, select trailer options, select change trailer setting and then select the change sticker option. • If the sticker location needs to be changed, the previous sticker must be removed and a new sticker needs to be placed on the trailer. ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ON THE TRAILER FOR PROPER SYSTEM FUNCTION. • Disregard the prompt to remove this sticker and continue to the next step if you only plan to update the measurements for the current sticker location. System consistently shows Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stop Now Take Control of Steering Wheel: • The system displays this warning when it can no longer steer the vehicle and you must take over steering. There are four reasons why this warning displays and additional information regarding the reason for the warning is available on the center display. • The steering wheel is touched while under system control. Avoid touching the wheel during system operation. • The maximum speed for feature operation is exceeded. System performance is optimized at slower speeds. Reverse slowly. • The sticker was lost by the camera system. Once your vehicle is stopped, additional warnings indicate the sticker was lost. Refer to sticker lost troubleshooting tips. • An internal condition for system operation was not met which requires your vehicle return to manual control of the steering. Note: The system is designed to be used with the same trailer connection every time the trailer is chosen from the selection menu. When using a different drawbar or a different pin hole on drawbars with more than one, connecting the drawbar to your vehicle affects the trailer measurements. Take the measurements again and update if required. 290 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: For vehicles equipped with 2.7L and 3.3L engines without a Heavy Duty Towing Package, do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when using the trailer hitch. Note: For vehicles equipped with 3.5L and 5.0L engines without a Heavy Duty Towing Package, do not exceed a trailer weight of 7,000 lb (3,175 kg) when using the trailer hitch. Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Vehicles not equipped with the Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy Duty Payload Package should not exceed 11 ft² (3.4 m²) trailer frontal area. Vehicles equipped with the Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy Duty Payload Package should not exceed 18 ft² (5.6 m²) trailer frontal area. All values calculated with SAE J2807 method. Note: Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance and fuel economy. Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point. TRAILER SWAY CONTROL WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation. Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it begins. Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may activate multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed. This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the stability control light flashes and the message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED appears in the information display. The first thing to do is slow your vehicle down, then pull safely to the side of the road and check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution. See Load Carrying (page 270). RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS Note: Do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing with, or by, the bumper only. 291 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as your vehicle's electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes. Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following charts. Driveline – 4x2 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.55 9,500 lb 3 (4,308 kg) 3.73 12,100 lb (5,489 kg) 3.15, 3.31 12,200 lb (5,534 kg) 3.73 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 3.15, 3.31 13,000 lb (5,896 kg) 3.55 13,800 lb (6,260 kg) 3.55 9,700 lb 3 (4,400 kg) 3.73 12,200 lb (5,534 kg) 3.3L TiVCT Regular cab – 122 2.7L GTDI 5.0L TiVCT Regular cab – 141 3.3L TiVCT 292 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x2 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 2.7L GTDI 5.0L TiVCT 3.5L GTDI 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.15, 3.31 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 3.73 13,200 lb (5,987 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb 5 (6,032 kg) 3.15, 3.31 13,900 lb (6,305 kg) 3.55 14,900 lb (6,759 kg) 3.73 16,000 lb (7,257 kg) 3.15, 3.55 15,500 lb (7,031 kg) 3.55 17,000 lb (7,711 kg) 4 3.73 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 4 3.55 9,800 lb 3 (4,445 kg) 3.73 12,200 lb (5,534 kg) 3.15, 3.31 12,700 lb (5,761 kg) 3.3L TiVCT Super Cab – 145 2.7L GTDI 293 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x2 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.15, 3.31 14,200 lb (6,441 kg) 3.55 15,200 lb (6,895 kg) 3.15, 3.55 15,800 lb (7,167 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 5.0L TiVCT 3.5L GTDI 4 3.0L Diesel 2.7L GTDI 3.31 15,700 lb (7,121 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 3.15, 3.31 12,600 lb (5,715 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.73 14,100 lb 5 (6,396 kg) 3.15, 3.31 14,300 lb (6,486 kg) 3.55 15,300 lb (6,940 kg) 3.73 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) Super Cab – 163 5.0L TiVCT 294 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x2 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 3.5L GTDI 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.15, 3.55 15,900 lb (7,212 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 4 3.73 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 4 3.55 9,900 lb 3 (4,491 kg) 3.73 12,300 lb (5,579 kg) 3.15, 3.31 12,700 lb (5,761 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.15, 3.31 14,200 lb (6,441 kg) 3.55 15,200 lb (6,895 kg) 3.15, 3.55 15,800 lb (7,167 kg) 3.55 18,400 lb 6 (8,346 kg) 3.15 16,100 lb (7,303 kg) 3.3L TiVCT 2.7L GTDI Crew cab – 145 5.0L TiVCT 3.5L GTDI 3.5L GTDI 10.5:1 CR 295 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x2 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.55 16,700 lb (7,575 kg) 3.31 15,800 lb (7,167 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 3.15, 3.31 12,700 lb (5,761 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.73 14,100 lb 5 (6,396 kg) 3.15, 3.55 14,200 lb (6,441 kg) 3.73 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) 3.15, 3.55 15,900 lb (7,212 kg) 3.0L Diesel 2.7L GTDI Crew cab – 157 5.0L TiVCT 3.5L GTDI 296 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x2 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.55 18,400 lb 6 (8,346 kg) 3.73 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 4 1 For vehicles without a Heavy Duty Towing Package, do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 2 Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise). 3 Medium Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Max trailer weights by engine: 3.3L and 2.7L GTDI = 6000 lb, 5.0L, 3.5L GTDI and 3.0L Diesel = 7000 lb 4 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on all models except vehicles with 3.5L GTDI Heavy Payload Package (HPP). 5 MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package. 6 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on 3.5L GTDI Heavy Frame Crew Cabs only. 297 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x4 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.55 9,700 lb 3 (4,400 kg) 3.73 12,200 lb (5,534 kg) 3.55 12,500 lb (5,670 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.31, 3.55 13,200 lb (5,987 kg) 3.73 14,600 lb (6,622 kg) 3.73 12,200 lb (5,534 kg) 3.55 12,600 lb (5,715 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.73 14,100 lb 5 (6,396 kg) 3.31, 3.55 14,100 lb (6,396 kg) 3.73 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) 16200 lb (7348 kg) 3.3L TiVCT Regular cab – 122 2.7L GTDI 5.0L TiVCT 3.3L TiVCT 2.7L GTDI Regular cab – 141 5.0L TiVCT 298 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x4 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.73 16,100 lb 7 (7,303 kg) 16,100 lb 8 (7,303 kg) 3.5L GTDI 3.3L TiVCT 2.7L GTDI Super Cab – 145 5.0L TiVCT 299 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing 3.31, 3.55 15,800 lb (7,166 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb 4 (7,756 kg) 3.73 17,100 lb 4 (7,756 kg) 3.73 12,500 lb (5,670 kg) 3.55 12,800 lb (5,806 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) 3.73 14,299 lb 5 (6,486 kg) 3.31 14,299 lb (6,486 kg) 3.55 14,400 lb (6,532 kg) 3.73 16,500 lb (7,484 kg) Towing Driveline – 4x4 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 3.5L GTDI 5.0L TiVCT Super Cab – 163 3.5L GTDI 3.3L TiVCT Crew cab – 145 2.7L GTDI 300 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.31, 3.55 16,000 lb (7,257 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb 4 (7,756 kg) 3.31 14,400 lb (6,532 kg) 3.55 14,500 lb (6,577 kg) 3.73 16,600 lb (7,530 kg) 3.73 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) 3.31, 3.55 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) 3.55 16,200 lb 4 (7,348 kg) 3.73 16,200 lb 4 (7,348 kg) 3.73 12,600 lb (5,715 kg) 3.55 12,900 lb (5,851 kg) 3.73 13,300 lb (6,033 kg) Towing Driveline – 4x4 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 5.0L TiVCT 3.5L GTDI 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.73 14,300 lb 5 (6,486 kg) 3.31 14,300 lb (6,486 kg) 3.55 14,400 lb (6,532 kg) 3.73 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) 3.31, 3.55 16,100 lb (7,303 kg) 3.55 18,400 lb 6 (8,346 kg) 3.31 16,100 lb (7,303 kg) 3.55 16,700 lb (7,575 kg) 3.31, 3.55 16,000 lb (7,257 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb (7,756 kg) 3.31 14,400 lb (6,532 kg) 3.55 14,500 lb (6,577 kg) 3.73 16,900 lb (7,666 kg) 3.5L 10.5:1 CR 3.0L Diesel Crew cab – 157 5.0L TiVCT 301 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Driveline – 4x4 Cab – wheelbase (inches) Engine 3.5L GTDI 1 Axle ratio Maximum GCWR (Calculated with SAE J2807 2 method) 3.73 16,200 lb (7,348 kg) 3.31, 3.55 16,100 lb (7,303 kg) 3.55 18,400 lb 6 (8,346 kg) 3.73 17,000 lb (7,711 kg) 7 17,100 lb 8 (7,756 kg) 3.31, 3.55 16,100 lb (7,303 kg) 3.55 17,100 lb (7,757 kg) 3.0L Diesel 1 For vehicles without a Heavy Duty Towing Package, do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 2 Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise). 3 Medium Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Max trailer weights by engine: 3.3L and 2.7L GTDI = 6000 lb, 5.0L, 3.5L GTDI and 3.0L Diesel = 7000 lb 4 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on all models except vehicles with 3.5L GTDI Heavy Payload Package (HPP). 5 MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package. 6 Max. Duty Trailer Tow Pkg. - Class IV receiver hitch. Optional on 3.5L GTDI Heavy Frame Crew Cabs only 7 17 Inch Rims. 8 18 Inch Rims. 302 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle • 1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model and axle ratio. See the previous charts. 2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle: • Vehicle curb weight. • Hitch hardware weight, for example a draw bar, ball, locks or weight distributing hardware. • Driver weight. • Passenger(s) weight. • Payload, cargo and luggage weight. • Aftermarket equipment weight. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination. Note: The trailer tongue load is considered part of the payload for your vehicle. Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight. Note: Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure. • • See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you. See Load limits in the Load Carrying chapter for load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label and instructions on calculating your vehicle's load. See Load Limit (page 271). Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight. Trailer Towing Connector ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km). • Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer. E193232 303 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing When attaching the trailer wiring connector to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting connector that works with the vehicle and trailer functions. Some seven-position connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo, which confirms that it is the proper wiring connector and works correctly with your vehicle. Color Weight-distributing Hitches WARNING: Do not adjust the spring bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is higher than before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury. Function Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp White Ground (-) When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use the following procedure: Blue Electric brakes 1. Green Right turn signal and stop lamp 2. Orange 1 Battery (+) Brown Running lights Grey Reverse lights 3. 1 Your vehicle must recognize the trailer before the trailer can receive power. 4. Recognizing a Trailer 5. 1. Attach the trailer and wiring connector to your vehicle. 2. Switch on your vehicle. 3. Press the brake pedal for a few seconds. 6. A confirmation message appears in the information display. See General Information (page 112). Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender. This is H1. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars connected. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender a second time. This is H2. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender is approximately a quarter the way down from H2, toward H1. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 2-6. Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle: • Lock the bar tension adjuster in place. • Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch. • Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer. Hitches Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10-15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. 304 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Safety Chains The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating. Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Always connect the safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of your trailer hitch. Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded. Install trailer safety chains to the trailer hitch as recommended by the manufacturer. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped) WARNING: Use the integrated trailer brake controller to properly adjust the trailer brakes and check all connections before towing a trailer. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E265060 If the trailer safety chain hook has a latch, make sure the latch is fully closed. Trailer Brakes WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. E183395 When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake pressure. Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations. You can adjust the level of initial trailer brake output by selecting one of three settings using the information display. Choose Low, Medium or High for the initial trailer brake output you require. See Information Displays (page 112). 305 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing The controller user interface consists of the following: lever without a trailer connected. After disconnecting the trailer connector, press the brake pedal for approximately five seconds to allow the system to detect and update the trailer status. A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts the controller's power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). The gain setting displays in the message center. B: Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to turn on the trailer's electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle's. See the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions on proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes. The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph, and trailer connectivity status in the information display. They appear in the information display as follows: • Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without trailer connected): Shows the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain. This also displays if you use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments with no trailer connected. • Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output: Displays when you push your vehicle's brake pedal, or upon use of the manual control. Bar indicators illuminate in the information display to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output; six bars indicate maximum output. • Trailer Connected: Displays when the system senses a correct trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) during a given ignition cycle. • Trailer Disconnected: Displays, accompanied by a single audible time, when the system senses a trailer connection and then a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional, during a given ignition cycle. It also displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message can also display if you use the manual control • Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever illuminates both the trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps except the center high-mount stop lamp, if you make the proper electrical connection to the trailer. Pressing your vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both trailer and vehicle brake lamps. Procedure for Setting Trailer Brake Controller Mode Select the correct option using the information display. Choose electric for trailers with electromagnetic drum brakes or EOH for trailers with electric over hydraulic brake systems. See Information Displays (page 112). Trailer Brake Effort Setting The trailer brake controller allows the user to customize how aggressively the trailer brakes engage. The default value is "Low" and is the recommended setting for most trailers. If your trailer's brakes require more initial voltage, or if you prefer more aggressive trailer braking, then select either the "Medium" or the "High" setting. 306 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Procedure for Adjusting Gain 6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10. Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h). The gain setting sets the trailer brake controller for the specific towing condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather. Explanation of Information Display Warning Messages The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes. Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes, a message confirming connection appears in the information display. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good starting point for heavier loads. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control lever completely. A message indicating a trailer brake module fault may display in response to faults sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single tone. If this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but performance may be degraded. A message indicating a trailer wiring fault may display when there is a short circuit on the electric brake output wire. If this message displays, accompanied by a single tone, with no trailer connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring between the trailer brake controller and the 7-pin connector at the bumper. If the message only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be drawing too much current. 307 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing • Points to Remember Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result. • • • • • • • • Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the first time. Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when the gain was initially set. Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle. Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle. The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces output at vehicle speeds below 11.2 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available when applying the brakes using your vehicle's brake pedal, not the controller. The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on different road conditions. Your vehicle's brake system and the trailer brake system work independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle's brakes whether you attach a trailer or not. When you switch the engine off, the controller output is disabled and the display and module shut down. The controller module and display turn on when you switch the ignition on. The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation. Trailer Lamps WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required. Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped) The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shank diameter. The bumper has a 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) trailer weight and a 500 lb (227 kg) tongue weight capacity. If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ball position, you must install a frame-mounted trailer hitch. 308 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Before Towing a Trailer • Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles. • When Towing a Trailer • • • • • • • • Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 mi (800 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km). When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the transmission in park (P) to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance. Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while towing may reduce this tendency. • If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions, at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant (if the axle is not already filled with it). See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade: 1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow. 2. Set your vehicle parking brake. 3. Place the automatic transmission in park (P). 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not included with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare tire. A temporary spare tire is different in diameter or width, tread-type, or is from a different manufacturer than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using. Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC) Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. 309 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing Emergency Towing When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. • Place the transmission in neutral (N). If you cannot move the transmission into neutral (N), you may need to override it. See Transmission (page 206). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km). Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: • Causing internal damage to the components. • Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required. Recreational Towing Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. See Climate Control (page 142). TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing, such as towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your transmission. WARNING: If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. Two-wheel Drive Vehicles You cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. You must tow your vehicle with all four wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling trailer. 310 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing 6. Leave the transmission in neutral (N) and turn the ignition as far as it can go toward the off position. It does not turn fully off when the transmission is in neutral (N). If your vehicle has an ignition key, you must leave the key in the ignition while towing. To lock and unlock your vehicle, use the keyless entry keypad or an extra set of keys. If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine START/STOP button once without pressing the brake pedal. You do not need to leave your keys in the vehicle. You can lock and unlock your vehicle as you normally do. 7. Release the brake pedal. Four-wheel Drive Vehicles You can only tow a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels on the ground by placing the transfer case in its neutral position and engaging the four-wheel-down towing feature. Perform the steps outlined in the following section after positioning your vehicle behind the tow vehicle and properly securing them together. Note: Make sure you properly secure your vehicle to the tow vehicle. Note: For F-150 Raptor, please refer to your Raptor supplement guide. Four-wheel-down Towing 1. Put the ignition in the on position, but do not start the engine. If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine START/STOP button once without pressing the brake pedal. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to 2H. 4. Shift the transmission to neutral (N). 5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch from 2H to 4L and back to 2H five times within seven seconds. Note: If completed successfully, the information display confirms that your vehicle is in neutral tow. This indicates that your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground. WARNING: Do not disconnect the battery during recreational towing. It prevents the transfer case from shifting properly and may cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park (P). WARNING: Shifting the transfer case to its neutral position for recreational towing may cause the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in park (P). It may injure the driver and others. Make sure you press the foot brake and the vehicle is in a secure, safe position when you shift to neutral (N). Note: Failing to put the transfer case in its neutral position while towing the vehicle can damage vehicle components. Note: You can check four-wheel-down towing status at any time by opening the driver's door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on position. A message displays in the information display confirming your vehicle is in neutral tow. Note: If you do not see the message in the display, you must perform the procedure again from the beginning. Note: You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts into its neutral position. This is normal. To exit four-wheel-down towing and return the transfer case to its 2H position: 311 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Towing 1. With your vehicle still properly secured to the tow vehicle, put the ignition in the on position, but do not start the engine. If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to on. If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine START/STOP button once without pressing the brake pedal. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. Place the transmission back into park (P). 4. Release the brake pedal. Note: If completed successfully, the instrument cluster displays 4X2, and Neutral Tow Disabled. 2. Put the transmission into neutral (N), then start the engine. 3. With the engine running, shift the transmission into drive (D) and let the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 ft (1 m). You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position. This is normal. 4. Make sure the instrument cluster displays Neutral Tow Disabled. Note: If the indicator light and message do not display, you must perform the procedure again from the beginning. Note: You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position, this is normal. Note: If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays in the instrument cluster, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. See the instructions following this section. 5. Apply the parking brake, then disconnect your vehicle from the tow vehicle. 6. Release the parking brake, start the engine, and shift the transmission into drive (D) to make sure the transfer case is out of the neutral tow position. 7. If the transfer case does not successfully shift out of neutral (N), set the parking brake until you can have your vehicle serviced. Resolving the Shift Delayed Pull Forward Message If the instrument cluster displays Shift Delayed Pull Forward, perform the following: 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 312 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Hints Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel economy: • Sudden accelerations or hard accelerations. • Revving the engine before turning it off. • Idle for periods longer than one minute. • Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. • Use the air conditioner or front defroster. • Use the speed control in hilly terrain. • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer. • Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of weight carried). • Driving with the wheels out of alignment. BREAKING-IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). ECONOMICAL DRIVING Your fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under, and how you maintain your vehicle. You may improve your fuel economy by keeping these things in mind: • Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. • Drive at steady speeds without stopping. • Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. • Close the windows for high-speed driving. • Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]). • Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. • Use the recommended engine oil. • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski racks or luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed (if equipped). • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 5–10 mi (12–16 km) of driving. • Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. 313 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Hints • • • Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. Close the windows for high-speed driving. It is always recommended that at least two vehicles are used while off-roading. The buddy system helps make sure that help is close at hand should a vehicle become stuck or damaged. It is also wise to take supplies such as a first aid kit, supply of water, tow strap, cell or satellite phone with you any time an off-road excursion is planned. Basic Off-road Driving Techniques OFF-ROAD DRIVING • In addition to providing an excellent on-road driving experience, your vehicle excels at all types of off-road driving. The truck has been designed and equipped to allow you to explore those places where the road doesn’t take you whether it’s a forest trail or the open desert. Before going off-roading, consult with your local governmental agencies to determine designated off-road trails and recreation areas. Also, be sure to understand any off-road vehicle registration requirements for the area in which you plan on driving. • • Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nation’s wilderness areas. Ford joins the U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly. Before taking your vehicle off-roading, a basic vehicle inspection should be done to make sure that the vehicle is in top working condition. • • 314 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Grip the steering wheel with thumbs on the outside of the rim. This will reduce the risk of injury due to abrupt steering wheel motions that occur when negotiating rough terrain. Do not grip the steering wheel with thumbs inside the rim. Throttle, brake and steering inputs should be made in a smooth and controlled manner. Sudden inputs to the controls can cause loss of traction or upset the vehicle, especially while on sloped terrain or while crossing obstacles such as rocks or logs. Look ahead on your route noting upcoming obstacles, surface texture or color changes or any other factors which may indicate a change in available traction, and adjust the vehicle speed and route accordingly. During pre-run, mark obstacles with GPS markers to make sure appropriate speeds are used to avoid potential vehicle damage. When driving off-road, if the front or rear suspension is bottoming out and/or excessive contact with the skid-plates is encountered, reduce vehicle speed to avoid potential damage to the vehicle. When running with other vehicles, it is recommended that communication is used, and the lead vehicle notify other vehicles of obstacles that could cause potential vehicle damage. Driving Hints • • • • • Hill Climbing Always keep available ground clearance in mind and pick a route that minimizes the risk of catching the underside of the vehicle on an obstacle. When negotiating low speed obstacles, applying light brake pressure in conjunction with the throttle will help prevent the vehicle from jerking and will allow you to negotiate the obstacle in a more controlled manner. Using 4L will also help with this. Use and equip supplemental safety equipment as discussed later in this chapter. Please consult your local off-road group for other helpful tips. Off-roading requires a high degree of concentration. Even if your local law does not prohibit alcohol use while driving off-road, Ford strongly recommends against drinking if you plan to off-road. WARNING: Extreme care should be used when steering the vehicle in reverse down a slope so as not to cause the vehicle to swerve out of control. • • • Crossing Obstacles • • • • Review the path ahead before attempting to cross any obstacle. It is best if the obstacle is reviewed from outside the vehicle so that there is a good understanding of terrain condition both in front of and behind the obstacle. Approach obstacles slowly and slowly inch the vehicle over. If a large obstacle such as a rock cannot be avoided, choose a path that places the rock directly under the tire rather than the undercarriage of the vehicle. This will help prevent damage to the vehicle. Ditches and washouts should be crossed at a 45 degree angle, allowing each wheel to independently cross the obstacle. Always attempt to climb a steep hill along the fall line of the slope and not diagonally. If the vehicle is unable to make it up the hill, DO NOT attempt to turn back down the slope. Place the vehicle in low range and slowly back down in reverse. When descending a steep slope, select low gear and engage hill descent control. Use the throttle and brake pedals to control your descent speed as described earlier in this section using hill descent control. Note that hill descent control is functional in reverse and should be used in this situation. DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING: Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle. Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage. Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel hubs. 315 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Hints WARNING: Secure the floor mat to both retention devices so that it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This could result in the floor mat interfering with the operation of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E176913 When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: • • • • WARNING: Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while your vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work. Check that the horn works. Check that the exterior lights work. Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works. FLOOR MATS WARNING: Use a floor mat designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E142666 To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position. WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make sure they are secure. 316 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Hints SNOWPLOWING • We recommend the four-wheel drive F-150 in XL, XLT or Lariat trim levels with the 5.0L engine and snowplow option for residential snowplowing only. We do not recommend the F-150 with the automatic four-wheel drive system for snowplowing. • • Do not use F-150 vehicles equipped with the 2.7L, 3.0L, 3.3L or 3.5L engines for snowplowing. Installing the Snowplow Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow are in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book, snowplow section, found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. • A typical installation affects the following: • Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection and airbag deployment, braking, and lighting. Look for an Alterer’s Label on your vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS). • The Front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is on the upper left side of the vehicle’s Safety Compliance Certification Label. This is the total weight that front axle supports, which includes the vehicle weight plus any auxiliary equipment such as snowplow frame-mounted hardware that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS. Do not exceed FGAWR or Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). • Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent exceeding the FGAWR, and provide front-to-rear weight balance for proper braking and steering. Front wheel toe may require re-adjustment to prevent premature uneven tire wear. Specifications are in the Ford Workshop Manual. Headlight aim may require adjustment. The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are on the vehicle’s Safety Certification Label. The maximum cold inflation pressure for the tire and associated load rating are on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure may require re-adjustment within these pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow installation. Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Contact an authorized dealer for additional information. Snowplow Mode (If Equipped) Press the snowplow button on the instrument panel to switch on snowplow mode. The button illuminates when in snowplow mode. A message appears in the information display indicating that features are turned off when in snowplow mode. The following features are disabled when in snowplow mode: • 110V inverter. • Fog lamps. • Heated steering wheel. • Heated front and rear seats. • Massaging seats. The body module also activates the snowplow relay that provides power to aftermarket snowplow controls. Switch off snowplow mode by pressing the snowplow button or switching off the ignition. The snowplow button is no longer illuminated and features are turned on. 317 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Hints Note: The electrical system is designed to support the addition of a residential snowplow (up to 60 Amps continuous) and snowplow lights (up to 20 Amps continuous) using snowplow mode. The system is not designed to support snowplow usage with additional electrical aftermarket accessories. WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Attached WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including hood, bumper system, frame, front end body structure, tow hooks and hood pins) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify or add equipment to the front end of your vehicle. Note: Drive the vehicle at least 500 mi (800 km) before using your vehicle for snow removal. We recommend vehicle speed does not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when snowplowing. The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator, and may cause the engine to run at a higher temperature. Attention to engine temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are above freezing. Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and monitor engine temperature to determine whether a left or right angle provides the best performance. Note: Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag supplemental restraint system. The supplemental restraint system activates in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration. Follow the severe duty schedule in your Scheduled Maintenance information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals. Careless or high speed driving while snowplowing, which results in significant vehicle decelerations, can deploy the airbag. Such driving also increases the risk of accidents. Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible airbag deployment. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses on a vehicle containing air bags as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Engine Temperature while Plowing Your engine may run at a higher temperature than normal because the attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator: 318 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Driving Hints • • If you are driving more than 15 mi (24 km) at temperatures above freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide maximum airflow to the radiator. If you are driving less than 15 mi (24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph (72 km/h) in cold weather, you do not need to worry about blade position to provide maximum airflow. Transmission Operation while Plowing WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. • • • Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h). Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until the engine is at idle and the wheels have stopped. Outside Air Temperature While Plowing While plowing with your vehicle, the plow blade can block the sensor airflow and cause the outside air temperature reading to be inaccurate. A Ford wiring kit is available to relocate the Outside Air Temperature sensor to the plow blade frame to provide more accurate outside air temperature readings. Contact an authorized dealer for more information. 319 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies • ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • 24 hours a day, seven days a week. • For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner's Manual portfolio. • Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the owner's information portfolio in the glove compartment. United States vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. 320 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance HAZARD FLASHERS Note: The hazard flashers operate when the ignition is in any position, or if the key is not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery loses charge. As a result, there may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. The flasher control is on the instrument panel. Use your hazard flashers when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006. • Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance • Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. FUEL SHUTOFF In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment of your vehicle. Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction indicators flash. Press the button again to switch them off. WARNING: If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the fuel system checked. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once the vehicle determines the systems are safe, then the vehicle allows you to restart. The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact a qualified technician. The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel to the engine in the event of a moderate to severe crash. Not every impact causes a shutoff. Should your vehicle shut off after a crash, you may restart your vehicle. 321 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies If your vehicle has a key system: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Switch to start position. 3. Switch off the ignition. 4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the fuel pump. 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4. WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. If your vehicle has a push button start system: 1. Press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle. 2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP to switch on your vehicle. 3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle. 4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal and START/STOP, or press START/STOP without pressing the brake pedal. 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4. WARNING: Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps. Preparing Your Vehicle Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle. Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle electrical system. JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch. WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING: Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse polarity connections, make sure that you correctly identify the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables. 322 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle's engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) cable to a ground connection point if available. WARNING: Do not attach the end of the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located above the positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow through and cause damage to the fuses. WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. Jump Starting Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle. 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately, or press the accelerator gently to keep your engine speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 1 Removing the Jumper Cables 3 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 4 2 E142664 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 323 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners. 4 2 The horn and indicators turn off when: • You press the hazard control button. • You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). • Your vehicle runs out of power. • Sounding of the horn is only enabled in specific markets. 1 TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE WARNING: Block the wheels to help prevent the vehicle from moving. 3 WARNING: Unexpected and possibly sudden vehicle movement may occur if you do not take these precautions. E142665 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable from the disabled vehicle. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle battery. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 324 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies We recommend towing a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. However, it is acceptable to use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle configuration, you perform the following before towing: • If your vehicle has an electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer case, make sure you switch the four-wheel drive control to the 2H position before towing. Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic transmission. Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground for more than 50 mi (80 km) or faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause damage to the automatic transmission. E143886 If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. TOWING POINTS We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do not approve a slingbelt towing procedure. If you tow your vehicle incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle damage may occur. WARNING: Using recovery hooks is dangerous and should only be done by a person familiar with proper vehicle recovery safety practices. Improper use of recovery hooks may cause hook failure or separation from the vehicle and could result in serious injury or death. We produce a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. WARNING: Always slowly remove the slack from the recovery strap prior to pulling. Failure to do so can introduce significantly higher loads which can cause the recovery hooks to break off, or the recovery strap to fail which can cause serious injury or death. It is acceptable to have your two-wheel drive vehicle towed with the front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground. 325 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Roadside Emergencies WARNING: Never link two straps together with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if the strap breaks and can cause serious injury or death. Your vehicle comes equipped with frame-mounted front recovery hooks. These hooks should never have a load applied to them greater than the gross vehicle weight rating of your vehicle. Before using recovery hooks: • Make sure all attaching points are secure and capable of withstanding the applied load. • Never use chains, cables or tow straps with metal hook ends. • Only use recovery straps that have a minimum breaking strength two to three times the gross vehicle weight of the stuck vehicle. • Make sure the recovery strap is in good condition and free of visible cuts, tears or damage. • Use a damper device such as a tarp, heavy blanket or piece of carpet draped over the recovery strap to help absorb the energy in the event the strap breaks. • Make sure the stuck vehicle is not loaded heavier than its gross vehicle weight rating specified on the certification label. • Always align the tow vehicle and stuck vehicle in a straight line (within 10 degrees). • Keep bystanders to the sides of the vehicle, at a distance of at least twice the length of the recovery strap. This helps avoid injury from the hazard of a recovery hook or strap breaking, or a vehicle lurching into their path. 326 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Website www.owner.ford.com Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. These are some of the items that can be found online: • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State or Zip Code. • Owner Manuals. • Maintenance Schedules. • Recalls. • Ford Extended Service Plans. • Ford Genuine Accessories. • Service specials and promotions. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer. In Canada: A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford. Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 Away From Home Telephone If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer. 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Website www.ford.ca In the United States: Twitter Mailing address @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec) Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126 Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 1. Additional information and resources are available online: 327 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer. Customer Assistance 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. 3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Vehicle Identification Number. • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located. • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs first: In some states within the United States, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws, and Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt. Additionally, in some states within the United States, a consumer has the option of submitting a warranty dispute to the BBB Auto Line before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 328 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Customer Assistance You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing. BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. 329 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur fuel for diesel engines. If you cannot find the proper fuel recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center. The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. The use of improper fuels in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact the corresponding Ford Customer Assistance Center: CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Centers in: 330 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Customer Assistance Customer Relationship Center Phone Fax E-mail Asia Pacific N/A N/A apemcrc@ford.com Caribbean and Central America +1 313 594 4857 - expcac@ford.com 971 4 3327 266 menacac@ford.com Ford 80004443673 Lincoln 80004441066 Middle East UAE 80004441066 Saudi Arabia 8008443673 Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi 800850078 North Africa N/A N/A nafcrc@ford.com Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands +1-800-841-3673 N/A prcac@ford.com Sub-Saharan Africa +1-313-594-4857 N/A ssacrc@ford.com South Korea +82-02-1600-6003 N/A infokr1@ford.com or infokr@lincoln.com If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Global Trade Services by emailing, expcso@ford.com. Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673. 331 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Customer Assistance If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada. E142557 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. 332 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Customer Assistance Transport Canada Contact Information Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English) Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French) Phone 1–800–333–0510 Ford of Canada Contact Information Website www.ford.ca Phone 1–800–565-3673 333 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses The power distribution box is in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads. FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box If you disconnect and reconnect the battery, you will need to reset some features. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 359). WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. E251921 334 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 13 14 15 Fuse Rating 1 Horn. 2 Electric fan 1. 2 Windshield wiper motor. 2 Body control module. 2 Starter relay. 2 Power point 1. 2 Power point 2. 25A 50A 30A 60A 30A 20A 20A 5A 1 Rain sensor. 2 Upfitter 1 relay (Raptor). 15A 1 10A 1 15A 1 7.5A 1 15A 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 10A 4x4 run/start. Adaptive cruise control run/start module. Not used (spare). Front view camera. Voltage quality module. Not used (spare)(Raptor). Powertrain control module. Transmission control module run/start. 1 Anti-lock brakes run/start. 1 Electric power steering run/start. 10A 10A 5A Protected Components Upfitter 5 relay (Raptor). 1 2 Blower motor. 2 Passenger seat motors. 1 Radio amplifier. 40A 30A 20A 335 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Fuse Rating 1 Alt A sensor. 2 Trailer brake control module. 2 Body control module 1. 2 Electric fan (Gas). 2 Driver seat motors/memory module. 1 Heated seat. 1 4x4 solenoid. 2 Trailer tow battery charge. 10A 30A 50A 50A 30A 15A 10A 25A — Not used. 1 10A — 37 Not used. Vehicle power 5 (Diesel). 1 Vehicle power 4 (Gas). 10A 20A 1 Vehicle power 4 (Diesel). 1 Vehicle power 3. 1 Vehicle power 2 (Gas). 1 Vehicle power 2 (Diesel). 1 Vehicle power 1 (Gas). 1 Vehicle power 1 (Diesel). 10A 25A 15A 38 25A 20A 39 41 A/C clutch. 1 15A 36 Protected Components — Not used. 30A 2 Body-control-module voltage-qualitymodule feed. 336 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 58 Fuse Rating 20A — Powertrain control heater 3 (Diesel). 2 Fuel filter heater (Diesel). Not used. 2 Fuel pump. 2 Power point 3. 2 Powertrain control heater 2 (Diesel). 2 Trailer tow park lamps. 30A 20A 50A 25A — Not used. 2 Upfitter 2 relay (Raptor). 1 USB smart charger. 15A — — 64 2 — 60 63 Steering-column lock. 30A — 62 Not used. 50A 5A Not used. Not used. Not used. 1 15A 5A Trailer tow lamps module. 1 10A 59 61 2 Protected Components Not used (spare). Upfitter 6 relay (Raptor). 1 1 4x4. 1 E-locker. 25A 15A 65 — Not used. 66 — Not used. 67 — Not used. 337 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number Fuse Rating 69 — 70 71 2 25A — 73 — 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Not used. 40A 72 Protected Components 2 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) valves. Electric parking brake. 4x4. Not used. Not used. 1 10A — Trailer tow backup lamps. Not used. 2 Body control module 2. 2 Climate controlled seat. 1 Spot light module. 40A 30A 10A — Not used. 1 10A Heated windshield wiper. Upfitter 4 relay (Raptor). 81 82 — 1 30A 5A 83 Not used. Transmission fluid pump. Powertrain control module (Diesel). 1 1 15A Transmission control module. 84 — Not used. 85 — Not used. 86 — Not used. 87 — 88 Not used. 1 10A Multi-Contour Seats Relay. Upfitter 3 relay (Raptor). 89 2 30A Power running boards. 338 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number Fuse Rating 91 — 93 94 95 96 97 Not used. 1 Heated mirrors. 1 Rear heated seat module (Raptor, Diesel). 1 Not used (spare). 15A 15A 15A — Not used. 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 1 Micro 2 Electric fan (Raptor). 2 Powertrain control heater 1 (Diesel). 40A 50A 98 Protected Components 2 15A 2 40A 2 25A 25A 10R transmission module r/s. 3.3L transmission fluid pump. Heated rear window. Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) heater relay (Diesel). 2 Electric fan (Base only). 2 Power sliding back window. 2 Trailer tow stop-turn relay fuse. 30A 20A 1 15A 1 10A Snowplow switch. Rear heated seats (Base). Telescoping mirror. fuse. M case fuse. 2 Slotted Relay Number Fuse Rating Protected Components R02 — Powertrain control module relay. R05 — Electric fan relay. 339 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel To remove the fuse panel cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the cover, and then pull it off. The fuse panel is in the right-hand side of the passenger footwell behind a trim panel. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel and push the bottom part until it latches. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it has latched properly. To remove the trim panel, pull it toward you and swing it away from the side. To reinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooves on the panel, and then push it shut. E145984 Fuse Number Fuse Rating 1 — 2 7.5A Protected Components Not used. Memory module logic. Memory seat switches. Lumbar motor. 3 20A 4 5A Driver door lock motor. 5 20A Not used (spare). 6 10A Not used (spare). 7 10A Not used (spare). 8 10A Not used (spare). Trailer brake control. 340 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number Fuse Rating Protected Components 9 10A Extended power module (Base only). 10 5A Embedded modem module. 11 5A Combined sensor module. 12 7.5A Climate head module. Smart datalink connector. 13 7.5A Cluster. Steering column control module. 14 10A Brake on/off switch. 15 10A Smart datalink connector. 16 15A Tailgate release. 17 5A Heads up display. Terrain switch. 18 5A Ignition switch and passive-entry passivestart start stop switch. Key inhibit solenoid. 19 7.5A Extended power module (except Raptor). 7.5A Restraint control module (Raptor only). 20 — Not used. 21 5A Heads up display. In car temperature with humidity sensor. 22 5A Passenger occupant detection. (Raptor only) 23 10A Power driven rear glass switch. Inverter. Driver side window. Moonroof. Vista roof. 24 20A Central lock/unlock. 25 30A Driver door control module. 26 30A Passenger door control module. 27 30A Vista roof. Moonroof. 341 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Number Fuse Rating Protected Components 28 20A Not used (spare). 29 30A Not used (spare). 30 30A Not used (spare). 31 15A Adjustable pedal switch and motor. 32 10A Multi-function display. SYNC. Radio frequency receiver. 33 20A Radio. 34 30A Run-start relay. 35 5A Selectable drive mode switch. Upfitter switches (Raptor only). 36 15A 360 camera module. Heated steering wheel module. Rear-view mirror. Rear heated seats. Lane departure warning module. Automatic high beam module. Image processing module A. 37 20A Not used (spare). 38 30A Circuit breaker Rear window switches and motors. CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. E217331 If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 342 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Fuses Fuse Types E267379 A Micro 2. B Micro 3. C Maxi. D Mini. E M Case. F J Case. G J Case Low Profile. H Slotted M Case. 343 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Working with the Engine On GENERAL INFORMATION Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission to park (P). 2. Block the wheels. If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 1. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left hand side of the instrument panel. Precautions • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts. E166491 2. Go to the front of your vehicle and locate the secondary release lever under the front of the hood near the center of your vehicle. Working with the Engine Off 1. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission to park (P). 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Block the wheels. 344 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance 3. Raise the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. 4. To close, lower the hood and make sure that it is closed properly and fully latched. E190266 UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ E249452 A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 358). C. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 359). D. B. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 334). Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 350). E. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). 345 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance F. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358). G. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 369). H. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.0L V6, DIESEL E247635 A. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 334). B. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 350). C. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). D. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358). 346 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing E. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 369). F. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353). Maintenance G. H. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 359). Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 358). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.3L DURATEC - V6 E247636 A. Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 334). B. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 350). C. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). D. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358). 347 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing E. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 369). F. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353). G. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 359). H. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 358). Maintenance UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ E258054 A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 358). B. Power distribution box. See Changing a Fuse (page 342). C. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 359). D. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 350). E. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). F. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358). G. Air filter. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 369). H. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L MODULAR - V8 348 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance E251845 A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 358). B. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 359). C. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 350). D. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). E. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 358). F. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 369). G. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 353). ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK GASOLINE A E161560 349 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing A MIN B MAX B Maintenance 8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - DIESEL Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. E249448 A. MIN B. FULL C. MAX Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km). Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL CHECK GASOLINE WARNING: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 344). Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood Overview (page 345). Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). E142732 350 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). 2. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 3. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). 4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading. 5. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 344). 6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood Overview (page 345). 7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 349). 8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running. To top up the engine oil level do the following: 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See Under Hood Overview (page 345). Turn it counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Add engine oil that meets our specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 423). You may have to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 4. Recheck the oil level. 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. 6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly. Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km). Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL CHECK - DIESEL WARNING: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following: 1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. 351 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change indicator. From the main menu scroll to: Message E258300 The American Petroleum Institute (API) service symbol is used to identify the proper engine oil for your engine. The API service symbol will be displayed on the oil container you purchase. The API symbol displays the oil performance category in the top half of the symbol and the viscosity grade in the center of the symbol. To top up the engine oil level do the following: Action and description Settings Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Convenience Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Oil Life Reset Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Hold OK to Press and hold the OK Reset button until the instrument cluster displays the following message. 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See Under Hood Overview (page 346). 3. Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). 4. Recheck the oil level. 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. 6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Reset Successful When the oil change indicator resets the instrument cluster displays 100%. Remaining Life {00}% If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process. Not Reset Reset Cancelled Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly. Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. 352 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration. ENGINE COOLANT CHECK WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Adding Coolant WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. Take care not to put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. 353 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the correct level. It is very important to use prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of engine coolant per month, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, use the approved concentrated coolant diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). Using water that has not been deionised may contribute to deposit formation, corrosion and plugging of the small cooling system passageways. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and models may not be approved to our specifications and may cause damage to the cooling system. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, qualified personnel: 1. Must drain the cooling system. 2. Chemically clean the coolant system. 3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as possible. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. To top up the coolant level do the following: Water alone, without engine coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. 1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap. 2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). 3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level. 4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Do not use the following as a coolant substitute: • Alcohol. • Methanol. • Brine. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. 354 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Coolant Change Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant. At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the scheduled maintenance information, the coolant should be changed. Add prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). Recycled Coolant We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant as an approved recycling process is not yet available. Fail-Safe Cooling Dispose of used engine coolant in an appropriate manner. Follow your community's regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain. Severe Climates How Fail-Safe Cooling Works If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone: A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display. If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • You can decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however: • Engine power is limited. • The air conditioning system turns off. Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. 355 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. 5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage. WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. Engine Coolant Temperature Management (If Equipped) WARNING: To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces. WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach a higher temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures. Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine may operate poorly. At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display. Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation: You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power in order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to stop your vehicle. You can continue to drive. 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off. 2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 356 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on. Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips, shifts slowly or if you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer. If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following: Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift into park (P) or neutral (N). Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. After several minutes, if the temperature does not drop, follow the remaining steps. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue. TRANSFER CASE FLUID CHECK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK 3 If required, have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick. E170444 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug. 357 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance 3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level should be within 0.12 in (3 mm) from the bottom of the hole. 4. Add fluid through the filler hole. POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). WASHER FLUID CHECK BRAKE FLUID CHECK WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). WARNING: Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician. WARNING: A fluid level between the MAX and MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately. DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER WATER TRAP WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid. Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford specification. See Fuel Quality (page 186). Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). 358 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Note: The in-tank pump will turn off automatically after approximately 30 seconds. FUEL FILTER - GASOLINE Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. The fuel water trap is above the frame rail under the driver side of the vehicle. CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. E254226 A Front of Vehicle. WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. 1. Switch the ignition off. 2. Loosen the drain plug approximately one and a half turns. 3. Allow the water to drain. 4. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a strong resistance. 5. Key on for 30 seconds then key off. Repeat twice. 6. Start the engine. 7. Check for leaks. Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will go out after approximately 2 seconds, with the engine running. FUEL FILTER - DIESEL WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Your fuel filters must be changed at the correct service interval or when you see the low fuel pressure message appear. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 359 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. WARNING: This vehicle may have more than one battery. Removing the battery cables from only one battery does not disconnect your vehicle electrical system. Make sure you disconnect the battery cables from all batteries when disconnecting power. Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage. To restore the settings, do the following: Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water. 1. 2. 3. 4. Apply the parking brake. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). Switch off all accessories. Press the brake pedal and start your vehicle. 5. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 97). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 447). 6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to completely relearn the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. When a battery replacement is required, you must use a recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery, make sure you reinstall the battery cover or shield. Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to the vehicle, it may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability. This may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been relearned. 360 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. Electrical Accessory Installation To make sure the battery management system works correctly, do not connect an electrical device ground connection directly to the battery negative post. This can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. Note: If you add electrical accessories or components to the vehicle, it may adversely affect battery performance and durability. This may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. Battery Management System (If Equipped) The battery management system monitors battery conditions and takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is detected, the system temporarily disables some electrical systems to protect the battery. CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES Systems included are: • Heated rear window. • Heated seats. • Climate control. • Heated steering wheel. • Audio unit. • Navigation system. E142463 Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. A message may appear in the information displays to alert you that battery protection actions are active. These messages are only for notification that an action is taking place, and not intended to indicate an electrical problem or that the battery requires replacement. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES After battery replacement, or in some cases after charging the battery with an external charger, the battery management system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time to relearn the battery state of charge. During this time your vehicle must remain fully locked with the ignition switched off. Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm. Note: Prior to relearning the battery state of charge, the battery management system may temporarily disable some electrical systems. 361 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance 5. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident, contact an authorized dealer to check and realign your headlamps. E165804 1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from the glass. Headlamp Aiming Target 2 E142592 4 3 A 8 feet (2.4 meters). B Center height of lamp to ground. C 25 feet (7.6 meters). D Horizontal reference line. Vertical Aim Adjustment E205141 1. 2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip. 3. Press the wiper blade secondary locking clip. 4. Remove the wiper blade. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. 362 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Park your vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface, approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away. Maintenance 2. Measure the height from the center of your headlamp (indicated by a 3.0 millimeter circle on the lens) to the ground and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape works well). Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other. E163806 3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall. 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp. Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise or clockwise in order to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. 6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust the other headlamp. 7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. Horizontal Aim Adjustment Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle and is not adjustable. E167358 CHANGING A BULB 4. For halogen or LED headlamps: On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge toward the right. If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line, you will need to adjust the beam so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line. WARNING: Make sure the bulbs have cooled down before removing them. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. Note: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, clean it with rubbing alcohol before installing it. 363 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Replacing the Halogen High Beam, Low Beam and Direction Indicator Bulbs Accessing the Halogen High Beam, Low Beam and Direction Indicator Bulbs 1. Rotate the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb needing replacement. 2. Remove two screws and one push pin from the front of the wheel liner. E183500 E183762 3. Pull the wheel liner back towards the tire to gain access to the bulbs. 364 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing A. Low beam headlamp bulb. B. Direction indicator bulb. C. High beam headlamp bulb. Maintenance Replacing Side Marker Bulb E183764 1. Make sure the headlamps are off. 2. With the hood open, locate the side marker on the top of the headlamp assembly. 3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Install the new bulb in reverse order. E183763 Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped) 1. Make sure the headlamps are off. 2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs, remove the rubber cap to access the bulbs. 3. Remove the bulb holder from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector. 5. Install the new bulb in reverse order. E163826 1. Make sure the fog lamps are off. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp. 4. Install the new bulb in reverse order. 365 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs (If Equipped) These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an authorized dealer. Replacing LED Direction Indicator and Side Marker Bulbs (If Equipped) These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an authorized dealer. Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs E187289 1. Make sure the headlamps are off. 2. Open the tailgate to access the rear lamp assemblies A. Brake, rear and direction indicator bulb. B. Reverse lamp bulb. 1. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the rear lamp assembly. 2. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing LED Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped) These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an authorized dealer. Replacing Cargo Lamp and Highmount Brake Lamp Bulbs E187288 3. Remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly. Then, carefully pull the lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar by releasing the two retaining tabs. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb. 1. Make sure the lamps are off. 2. Remove the four screws and move the lamp assembly away from the vehicle to expose the bulb sockets. 366 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance E187290 E187794 3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the lamp assembly. 4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 5. Install the new bulb in reverse order. 1. Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb. 2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull to remove it from the lamp assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped) Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an authorized dealer. These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact an authorized dealer. Replacing the License Plate Lamp Bulb BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Note: The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper. Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time. 367 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Exterior Lamps Lamp Front direction indicator and parking lamps. Daytime running lamps. Headlamp high beam. Headlamp low beam. Specification Power (Watt) 7444NA 21/5W LED LED 9005 65W H11 55W Front fog lamps. 9140 55W Front side marker lamps. W5W 5W LED LED Side direction indicator. Puddle lamp. LED LED Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicator 3157 27/8W 921 16W LED LED 3156K 27W 168 5W 1 and rear side marker lamps. Central high mounted brake lamp. 1 Central high mounted brake lamp.Vehicles with cargo box lamp. Reversing lamps. License plate lamp. 1 May have optional LED lamps. Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. Interior Lamps Lamp Specification Power (Watt) Glove compartment lamp. LED LED Map lamp. LED LED Rear dome and courtesy lamps. LED LED Rear cargo box lamps. LED LED Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. 368 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER - GASOLINE WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do not allow foreign material to enter the air induction system. The engine is susceptible to damage from even small particles. When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element listed. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). x2 E191820 Change the air filter element at the proper intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). 1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter cover to the housing. 2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. 3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 4. Install in the reverse order. CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER - DIESEL WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. Use the correct specification air filter element. See Motorcraft Parts (page 419). 369 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Air Filter Restriction Gauge Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Change the air filter element at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). E254171 1. Remove the clips that secure the air filter housing cover. Lift and rotate the air filter housing cover. E254173 The air filter restriction gauge is in the upper housing of the air filter assembly. Check the air filter restriction gauge whenever you open the hood to carry out general engine maintenance or at least every 7,500 mi (12,000 km). If you operate your vehicle in extremely dusty conditions, check the gauge at least every 500 mi (800 km) or two weeks, whichever occurs first. Change the air filter element when the restriction gauge reads near the change filter line and the gauge is yellow. Allowing the restriction gauge to reach maximum affects engine performance and fuel economy. E254172 2. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. 3. Install in the reverse order. 4. After installing a new air filter element, you must reset the air filter restriction gauge by pressing the reset button. 370 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintenance Operating your vehicle in heavy snowfall or extreme rain conditions may allow excessive amounts of snow or water into the air intake system. This could restrict air flow and cause the engine to lose power or shut down. After installing a new air filter element, you must reset the gauge by pressing the reset button. After operating your vehicle during heavy snowfall or extreme rain, do the following: • Snow: At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and clear any snow and ice from the air filter housing inlet and reset the air filter restriction gauge. • Extreme rain: The air filter element dries out after approximately 15–30 minutes of driving at highway speeds. At the earliest opportunity, open the hood and reset the air filter restriction gauge. 371 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS Your dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. Materials For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Name Specification Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada) • CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. • 372 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to the touch, or during strong or direct sunlight. Vehicle Care • • • • Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting. Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. When filling with AdBlue®, remove any residue on painted surfaces immediately. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. Exterior Plastic Parts For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped) Hand washing your vehicle is preferred however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions: • Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible. • • • Cleaning the Headlamps Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa). Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C). Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern. Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface. Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface. Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody • Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle using water. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. • • Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended. Using non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. Under Hood For removing black rubber marks from under the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface. 373 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations. • Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year. When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax. • • • • • • Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax. Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles. Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. • Roof racks. • Bumpers. • Grained door handles. • Side moldings. • Mirror housings. • Windshield cowl area. Do not apply wax to glass areas. After waxing, your car's paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges. CLEANING THE EXHAUST WARNING: Failure to keep the holes in the exhaust tailpipe clean and free of debris or foreign material may result in blocked holes. Blocked holes may result in increased exhaust gas temperatures, vehicle damage, property damage or personal injury. CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. 374 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water. • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate. WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter. The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. E231484 CLEANING THE INTERIOR The visible holes in the exhaust tailpipe and the holes under the shield just inboard of the right rear tire are functional. You must keep the holes clean and free of debris or foreign material to maintain the correct operation of the exhaust system. When washing your vehicle, spray the holes with clean water from a hose. This helps to keep the holes clean and free of debris or foreign material. WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash. CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. 375 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care • For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats equipped with side airbags: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner. • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. • • • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens. Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be covered by your warranty. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows: CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS 1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth. 2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors. 3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes. 4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds. WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas. 376 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care With King Ranch Edition 5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth. Your vehicle has seating covered in premium, top-grain leather that is extremely durable, but still requires special care and maintenance in order to preserve longevity and comfort. CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If Equipped) Regular cleaning and conditioning maintains the appearance of the leather. Without King Ranch Edition Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. Cleaning For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution. For cleaning and removing spots and stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. • • • Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. You should: • • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible. • Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather: • • • • Clean spills as quickly as possible. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather. Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather. Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics. Scratches Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides, there may be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and are considered to be proof of a genuine leather product. Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners. Household cleaners. Alcohol solutions. Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section. 377 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care Conditioning CLEANING THE WHEELS (If Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or call 1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United States. If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium leather conditioner. Equipped) • • • 1. Regularly clean them with a wheel cleaner. We recommend that you use Ford approved wheel cleaner if available. 2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a sponge. 3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and tar remover. We recommend that you use Ford approved bug and tar remover if available. 4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water after cleaning. Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section. Make sure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of conditioner to a clean, dry cloth. Rub the conditioner into the leather until it disappears. Allow the conditioner to dry, then repeat the process for the entire interior. If a film appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean cloth. If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Do not clean the wheels when they are hot. Note: Some car washes could damage wheel rims and covers. Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel cleaners or abrasive materials could damage wheel rims and covers. Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. Always read the instructions before using cleaning products. We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components. 378 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Vehicle Care General • • • • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. Protect from sunlight, if possible. If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. • Fuel system • Body • • • • • • • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. • Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. Cooling system • • Protect against freezing temperatures. When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level. Battery • • Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if battery cables are disconnected. Engine • With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Brakes • Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. Tires • 379 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Maintain recommended air pressure. Vehicle Care Miscellaneous • • BODY STYLING KITS Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. The distance between the underside of your vehicle and the ground is less than that of other models. Drive with extreme care to avoid damage to your vehicle. Removing Vehicle From Storage When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. • Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. • If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. 380 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to utility vehicle and truck owners WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Study your owner's manual and any supplements for specific information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury. WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Four-wheel drive system (if equipped) A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive (when selected) has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. Note: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. On some four-wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and are not cause for concern. Note: In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the spare tire relative to the remaining tires can have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there is a significant difference between the size of a spare and the remaining tires, four-wheel drive functionality may be limited. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 212). E145298 381 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires How your vehicle differs from other vehicles • Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: • • Higher - to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. Shorter - to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. All other things held equal, a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase. Narrower - to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces, particularly in off-road use. E145299 E168583 382 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. As a result of the above dimensional differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition. These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 ½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. 383 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Traction AA A B C temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Glossary of Tire Terminology *Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. Temperature A B C WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high 384 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires *Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers). *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. 385 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Information on P Type Tires C D B E F G H A I J M L K E142543 P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. 386 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. Letter rating mph ( km/h) M 81 (130) N 87 (140) Q 99 (159) R 106 (171) S 112 (180) T 118 (190) U 124 (200) H 130 (210) V 149 (240) W 168 (270) AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: Y 186 (299) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number: This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and 387 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless. *Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B C A D E142544 388 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing B Wheels and Tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below. A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single; defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. B A C D E E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. These differences are described below: A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. Information on T Type Tires T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. 389 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. Location of the Tire Label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver's door. See Load Carrying (page 270). WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company. Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label (affixed to either the 390 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. To check the pressure in your tire(s): 1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile. door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver's door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change the ride characteristics of the vehicle. If you do not maintain the inflation pressure at the levels specified by Ford, your vehicle may experience a condition known as shimmy. Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation in the steering wheel after the vehicle travels over a bump or dip in the road that does not dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result from significant under-inflation of the tires, improper tires (load range, size, or type), or vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the event that your vehicle experiences shimmy, you should slowly reduce speed by either lifting off the accelerator pedal or lightly applying the brakes. The shimmy will cease as the vehicle speed decreases. Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure and the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended 391 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (for example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure. 3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure. Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. 4. Replace the valve cap. 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly information for a description. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges. Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case 392 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Tire Wear Age WARNING: Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters). WARNING: In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. 393 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Tire Replacement Requirements WARNING: You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver's door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. 394 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again. WARNING: Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle. The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a pair, except if the vehicle is equipped with four wheel drive. Vehicles equipped with four wheel drive should have all four tires replaced simultaneously. Unevenly worn tires, mismatched makes, models or brands can be different in size, resulting in potential damage to the four wheel drive system. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged. WARNING: When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: • • • • Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. Use both eye and ear protection. WARNING: For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. 395 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Safety Practices If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension may require alignment of all four wheels. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. *Observe posted speed limits *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns *Avoid potholes and objects on the road *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. 396 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles (front tires at left of diagram) Tire Rotation WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring system, then you need to update the settings for the system sensors. Always perform the system reset procedure after tire rotation. If you do not reset the system, it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary. Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. E142548 Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index and speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels can cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. Follow the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification 397 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires • Label (on the door hinge pillar, door latch post or the door edge that meets the door latch post, next to the driver seat), or Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. • • Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. • The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and cables. If you need to use cables, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as cables may chip aluminum wheels. If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please contact your authorized dealer. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: • • • • • • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or less if recommended by the chain manufacturer while using snow chains. Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions. The snow chains or cables must be mounted in pairs on the rear tires only. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. Conventional link type chains may contact and cause damage to the vehicle's wheel house and/or body. Do not install chains on the front tires as this may interfere with suspension components. Only certain snow cables or chains have been approved by Ford/Lincoln as safe for use on your vehicle with the following tires: 245/70R17, LT245/70R17, 265/70R17 and 265/60R18. You should install snow cables or chains that have been rated as SAE Class S. Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Check each tire, including the spare if applicable, monthly, when cold and inflate to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. 398 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale flashes for approximately one minute and then remains continuously illuminated. This sequence continues upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. E142549 399 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor. The low tire pressure warning light turns on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked. You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed Periodically check the tire pressure, at least monthly, using an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. When you replace one of your road tires with the temporary spare, the system continues to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle. To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: E224333 400 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Possible Cause Customer Action Required Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label, on the edge of driver door or the B-Pillar, drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed, in this section. Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light system malfunction remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Flashing warning light Tire rotation without sensor training On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures, the system must be retrained following every tire rotation. See Tire Care (page 383). Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed, in this section. Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are properly inflated and the system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. 401 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure. When Inflating Your Tires WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. When putting air into your tires, such as at a gas station or in your garage, the tire pressure monitoring system may not immediately respond to the air added to your tires. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Procedure WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the Safety Compliance Certification Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seat) or the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure. How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. When driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. Note: You need to perform the tire pressure monitoring system reset procedure after each tire rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires. Overview To provide the vehicle's load carrying capability, some vehicles require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning light at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the rear tires. Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures. 402 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires System reset tips: • • • 5. Train the tire pressure monitoring system sensors in the tires using the following system reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order: Left front driver side front tire, Right front passenger side front tire, Right rear passenger side rear tire - Left rear, driver side rear tire. 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Note: The single horn tone confirms that the sensor identification code has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and you must repeat it. To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, perform the system reset procedure at least three feet, one meter, away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the system reset procedure at the same time. Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system can time-out and you need to repeat the entire procedure on all four wheels. A double horn sounds indicating the need to repeat the procedure. Performing the System Reset Procedure 7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. 8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds. Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained, driver side rear tire, the system indicator stops flashing, and a message shows in the information display. 10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful and you must repeat it. If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer. Read the entire procedure before attempting. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes, then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires and have access to an air pump. 2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition. 3. Cycle the ignition to the on position with the engine off. 4. Switch the hazard flashers on then off three times. You must accomplish this within 10 seconds. If you successfully enter the reset mode, the horn sounds once, the system indicator flashes and a message shows in the information display. If this does not occur, please try again starting at Step 2. If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not sound, the system indicator does not flash and no message shows in the information display, seek service from your authorized dealer. 1. 403 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires 11. Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label, affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. Note: The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies. Full-size dissimilar spare Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light illuminates when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time. • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. If you get a flat tire when driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, 4WD functionality may be limited, especially when driving in a mechanically locked 4WD mode. You may experience the following: • Additional noise from the transfer case or other drive components. • Difficulty shifting out of a mechanically locked 4WD mode. Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 398). Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the system sensor for damage. 404 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is recommended that you do not: • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) in 4WD. • Engage 4WD unless the vehicle is stationary. • Use 4WD on dry pavement. WARNING: To help prevent your vehicle from moving when changing a wheel, shift the transmission into park (P), set the parking brake and use an appropriate block or wheel chock to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. For example, when changing the front left wheel, place an appropriate block or wheel chock on the right rear wheel. The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • Four-wheel drive capability. WARNING: Do not work on your vehicle when the jack is the only support. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to: • Towing a trailer. • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body. • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack. WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate, contact the authorized dealer. Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible. Tire Change Procedure WARNING: No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack. WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P). WARNING: The jack supplied with this vehicle is only intended for changing wheels. Do not use the vehicle jack other than when you are changing a wheel in an emergency. WARNING: The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible. 405 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Remove the Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag WARNING: Check that the vehicle jack is not damaged or deformed and the thread is lubricated and clean. The vehicle jack and tool bag are on the rear passenger side of your vehicle, behind the passenger seat. WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and the ground. WARNING: Never place anything between the vehicle jack and your vehicle. WARNING: It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked. WARNING: Switch off the running boards before jacking or placing any object under your vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended running board and your vehicle. A moving running board may cause injury. E233621 1. Remove the foam top. Note: Only use the spare tire carrier to stow the tire and wheel combination provided with your vehicle. Other tire and wheel combinations can cause the tire carrier to fail. Note: Do not use impact tools or power tools operating at over 200 RPM on the spare tire carrier, this may cause a winch malfunction and prevent a secure fit. Override the winch at least three times, there's an audible click each time, to make sure the wheel and tire have been tightened securely. E233622 2. Release the strap securing the vehicle jack and tool bag to the vehicle. 3. With slight downward pressure, slide the vehicle jack and tool bag outward, toward the passenger side of the vehicle. 4. Lift the vehicle jack and tool bag off the floor posts and remove from your vehicle. Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Park on a level surface, activate the hazard flashers and set the parking brake. Then, place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. 406 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires E270943 E233626 5. With the vehicle jack and tool bag removed from your vehicle, remove the fuel funnel. 8. Remove the tools from the tool bag. Note: Only F-150 Raptor trim vehicles receive a wheel chock with the tool bag. Note: No maintenance or addition lubrication of your jack is required over the service life of your vehicle. Removing the Spare Tire Note: Remove the hook end from the assembled jack handle before continuing. The spare tire is located under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper. 1. E233624 6. Release the D-ring straps. E233625 7. Lift the tool bag off of the vehicle jack. 407 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Use your key to remove the lock cylinder from the access hole of the bumper to allow access to the guide tube. Wheels and Tires E175447 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire. For example, if the left front tire is flat, block the right rear wheel. 7. Obtain the spare tire and vehicle jack from their storage locations. 8. Loosen each wheel lug nut on the affected flat tire one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them. E188735 2. Assemble the jack handle as shown in the illustration. Jacking the Vehicle E184020 3. Fully insert the jack handle through the bumper hole and into the guide tube through the access hole in the rear bumper. 4. Turn the handle counterclockwise until the tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack to allow the tire to be slid rearward from under the vehicle. 5. Remove the retainer from the center of the wheel. E166722 408 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires Front Jacking Points Rear Jacking Points E272477 E183709 Note: Use the frame rail as the front jacking location point, not the control arm. The frame rail is marked with an arrow. Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle. 1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point next to the tire you are changing. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. 2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 409 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires 5. Remove the vehicle jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 412). 6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire. 7. Stow the vehicle jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is securely fastened before you drive. See Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag. 8. Unblock the wheels. 1 the best of your ability, to the point where the ratchet or slip occurs, if possible. The spare tire carrier does not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort, contact your authorized dealer. 4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it does not move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire. 5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure, every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance information, or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components. 6. If removed, install the spare tire lock into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key and jack handle. 4 3 6 5 2 E166719 Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire Note: Failure to follow the spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of the cable or loss of the spare tire. 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up. 2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable. 3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to E184021 1. 410 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Adjust the jack up or down by rotating the lead screw located on the end of the jack. The stowage markings should line up with the bottom channel. Wheels and Tires E233626 E270943 2. Place the tools inside of the tool bag. 5. Install the fuel funnel. 6. Position the jack base so the key hole slots align with the posts in the floor. 7. With slight downward pressure, slide the vehicle jack and tool bag inwards toward the driver side of the vehicle until it stops. E233625 3. Install the tool bag to the top of the vehicle jack. E233622 8. Secure the strap that holds the vehicle jack and tool bag to the vehicle. E233624 4. Install the D-ring straps that secure the tool bag to the vehicle jack. 411 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires 9. Install the foam top. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS E233621 Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death. 1 Bolt Size lb.ft (Nm) M14 x 1.5 150 lb.ft (204 Nm) 1 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal. 412 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Wheels and Tires E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 413 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Measurement Specification Cubic inches 164 Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap .028-.031 in. (0.7 - 0.8 mm) Compression ratio 10.3:1 Drivebelt Routing E176088 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L V6, DIESEL Measurement Specification Cubic inches 183 Required Fuel Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Compression ratio 16:1 414 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing E249449 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L DURATEC - V6 Measurement Specification Cubic inches 201 Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap .049-.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm) Compression ratio 12:1 Drivebelt Routing E167467 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ 415 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Measurement Specification Cubic inches 213 Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap .030-.033 in. (0.75 - 0.85 mm) Compression ratio 10.5:1 Drivebelt Routing E263466 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L MODULAR - V8 Measurement Specification Cubic inches 307 Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 Ignition system Coil on plug, coil near plug Spark plug gap .049-.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm) Compression ratio 12:1 416 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing E249450 MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Component Part Number Air filter element. FA-1883 Oil filter. FL-2062 Transmission oil filter. FT-188 Battery. BAGM-48H6-760 BAGM-94RH7-800 Spark plugs. SP-542 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247 Cabin air filter. FP-79 If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.0L V6, DIESEL 417 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Component Part Number Air filter element. FA-1883 Oil filter. FL-2081 Battery. BAGM-49H8-850 Glow plugs. ZD-22 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247 Cabin air filter. FP-79 Fuel filter kit FD-4627 If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. For glow plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.3L DURATEC - V6 Component Part Number Air filter element. FA-1883 Oil filter. FL-500-S Battery. BAGM-48H6-760 BAGM-94RH7-800 Spark plugs. SP-520 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247 Cabin air filter. FP-79 418 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Component Part Number Air filter element. FA-1883 Oil filter. FL-500-S Transmission oil filter. FT-188 Battery. BAGM-48H6-760 BAGM-94RH7-800 Spark plugs. SP-534 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247 Cabin air filter. FP-79 If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 5.0L MODULAR - V8 419 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Component Part Number Air filter element. FA-1883 Oil filter. FL-500-S Transmission oil filter. FT-188 Battery. BAGM-48H6-760 BAGM-94RH7-800 Spark plugs. SP-551 Windshield wiper blade. WW-2247 Cabin air filter. FP-79 For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your authorized dealer or at fordparts.com. The parts engineered for your vehicle meet or exceed our specifications. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 560). E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 420 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL E142477 A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations C Make, vehicle line, series, body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number E167469 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position. 421 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION E167814 Description Code Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80 6 Ten-speed automatic transmission 10R80 G 422 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant 15.1 qt (14.3 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive) 3.5 pt (1.7 L) Rear axle fluid 5.5 pt (2.6 L) Automatic transmission fluid 13.1 qt (12.4 L) Transfer case fluid Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-theFly) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) Transfer case fluid Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on demand) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) Windshield washer fluid 1 Fill as required Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab) 23.0 gal (87.1 L) Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab) 26.0 gal (98.4 L) Fuel tank (Optional) 36.0 gal (136.3 L) A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada) 29 oz (0.82 kg) A/C Refrigerant (Mexico) 31 oz (0.88 kg) A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil 2.7 fl oz (80 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 423 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C946-B1 Recommended Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-B1 Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-B WSS-M2C946-B1 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 WSS-M6C65-A2 Front axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Rear axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Automatic transmission fluid: WSS-M2C949-A Motorcraft MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® ULV XT-12-QULV Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV 424 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification CXT-10-LV12 Transfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Transfer case fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B 425 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Lock cylinders (U.S.): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Lock cylinders (Mexico): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 - If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Reduced brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. 426 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates (If Equipped) Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-30 XO-0W30-QSP WSS-M2C953-A1 E240523 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L V6, DIESEL Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. 427 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter). 6.5 qt (6.15 L) Engine coolant. 13.7 qt (13 L) Brake fluid. Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Automatic transmission fluid. 13.1 qt (12.4 L) Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive). 1.8 qt (1.7 L) Rear axle fluid. 2.7 qt (2.6 L) Transfer case fluid. Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-theFly). 1.5 qt (1.4 L) Transfer case fluid. Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on demand). 1.5 qt (1.4 L) 1 Windshield washer fluid. Fill as required Fuel tank. 26 gal (98.4 L) Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). 22.5 qt (21.3 L) A/C refrigerant. 29 oz (0.82 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil. 2.7 fl oz (80 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Diesel Motor Oil XO-5W30-QFA WSS-M2C214-B1 Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Diesel Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LFA WSS-M2C214-B1 Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 428 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (U.S.): Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid PM-27-GAL / PM-27-JUG WSS-M99C130-A Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (Canada): Motorcraft® Diesel Exhaust Fluid CPM-27-J WSS-M99C130-A Brake fluid: Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 WSS-M6C65-A2 Front axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Rear axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Automatic transmission fluid: Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-12-QULV WSS-M2C949-A MERCON® ULV Transfer case fluid (U.S.): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Transfer case fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A 429 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - The use of correct oil viscosities for diesel engines is important for satisfactory operation. Determine which oil viscosity best suits the temperature range you expect to encounter for the next service interval from the following SAE viscosity grade chart. If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Reduced brake performance. 430 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications 1. For severe duty service, use SAE 5W-40 API CK-4. 2. For bio-diesel fuel blends (B20 max), use SAE 5W-40 API CK-4. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. E258300 The American Petroleum Institute (API) service symbol is used to identify the proper engine oil for your engine. The API service symbol will be displayed on the oil container you purchase. The API symbol displays the oil performance category in the top half of symbol and the viscosity grade in the center of the symbol. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. Note: An engine block heater is recommended at temperatures below -9°F (-23°C). E276509 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.3L DURATEC - V6 Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. 431 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant 13.6 qt (12.86 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive) 3.5 pt (1.7 L) Rear axle fluid 5.5 pt (2.6 L) Automatic transmission fluid 13.1 qt (12.4 L) Transfer case fluid Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-theFly) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) Transfer case fluid Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on demand) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) 1 Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab) 23.0 gal (87.1 L) Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab) 26.0 gal (98.4 L) Fuel tank (Optional) 36.0 gal (136.3 L) A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada) 29 oz (0.82 kg) A/C Refrigerant (Mexico) 31 oz (0.88 kg) A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil 1 Approximate 4.1 fl oz (120 ml) dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 432 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-B1 Recommended Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-B1 Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-B1 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 WSS-M6C65-A2 Front axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Rear axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Automatic transmission fluid: Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-12-QULV WSS-M2C949-A MERCON® ULV Transfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Transfer case fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A 433 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B 434 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Lock cylinders (U.S.): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Lock cylinders (Mexico): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 - If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Reduced brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. 435 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-20 XO-0W20-QSP WSS-M2C947-B1 E240522 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. 436 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant 15.2 qt (14.35 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive) 3.5 pt (1.7 L) Rear axle fluid 5.5 pt (2.6 L) Automatic transmission fluid 13.1 qt (12.4 L) Transfer case fluid Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-theFly) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) Transfer case fluid Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on demand) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) 1 Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab) 23.0 gal (87.1 L) Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab) 26.0 gal (98.4 L) Fuel tank (Optional) 36.0 gal (136.3 L) A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada) 29 oz (0.82 kg) A/C Refrigerant (Mexico) 31 oz (0.88 kg) A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil 2.7 fl oz (80 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 437 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C946-B1 Recommended Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-B1 Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-B WSS-M2C946-B1 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 WSS-M6C65-A2 Front axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Rear axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Automatic transmission fluid: WSS-M2C949-A Motorcraft MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® ULV XT-12-QULV Transfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Transfer case fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV 438 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Lock cylinders (Mexico): - 439 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Reduced brake performance. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® ULV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® ULV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. E142732 Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-30 XO-0W30-QSP WSS-M2C953-A1 440 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications E240523 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L MODULAR - V8 Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 8.8 qt (8.3 L) Engine coolant 13.9 qt (13.2 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive) 3.5 pt (1.7 L) Rear axle fluid 5.5 pt (2.6 L) Automatic transmission fluid 13.1 qt (12.4 L) Transfer case fluid Four-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-theFly) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) Transfer case fluid Automatic four-wheel drive (Torque on demand) 1.5 qt (1.4 L) 441 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank (Regular Cab and SuperCab) 23.0 gal (87.1 L) Fuel tank (SuperCrew Cab) 26.0 gal (98.4 L) Fuel tank (Optional) 36.0 gal (136.3 L) A/C Refrigerant (U.S. and Canada) 29 oz (0.82 kg) A/C Refrigerant (Mexico) 31 oz (0.88 kg) A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil 2.7 fl oz (80 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Recommended motor oil (U.S.): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-B1 Recommended motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-B1 Recommended motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-B1 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 WSS-M6C65-A2 Front axle fluid: WSS-M2C942-A 442 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL Rear axle fluid: Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic Hypoid Gear Lubricant XY-75W85-QL WSS-M2C942-A Automatic transmission fluid: WSS-M2C949-A Motorcraft MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® ULV XT-12-QULV Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Transfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Transfer case fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): R-1234yf Refrigerant YN-33-A WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-1234yf Refrigerant HS7Z-19B519-BA WSS-M17B21-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A 443 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada): Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil YN-35 WSS-M2C300-A2 A/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Motorcraft® Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Motorcraft® Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Lock cylinders (Mexico): Motorcraft® Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 - We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN service category unless the label also displays the API certification mark. If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Reduced brake performance. 444 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. E142732 An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-20 XO-0W20-QSP WSS-M2C947-B1 445 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Capacities and Specifications E240522 446 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: • AM: 530-1710 kHz • FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Listening to loud audio for long periods of time could damage your hearing. Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in the vehicle’s CD player. Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an authorized dealer for more information. 447 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode. • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. • Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in the current folder. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present (files with extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here. Note: Some features, such as satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. Note: Your audio system may not have a CD player. 448 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System E176103 A Display screen: Shows audio information. B Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone number. C Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode). 449 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing D OK and cursor arrows: Press the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set, or press MENU to exit. E TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. F Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In CD mode, press to Audio System select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. In satellite mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. G CD slot: Insert a CD. H Eject: Press to eject a CD. I Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and off. J PHONE: Press to access the phone features. K MENU: Press to access different audio system features. See Menu Structure. L MEDIA Press to open the media source menu. You can press this multiple times to change to CD or scroll through the media sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source. M CLOCK Press to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes. You can also set the clock by pressing MENU and scrolling to Clock Settings. N RADIO Press to listen to the radio or change radio stations. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions. Press and hold to select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active radio band. O MUTE Press to mute the playing audio. P CD Press to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle. Q SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently. Menu Structure Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different. Press MENU. Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options. Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. Press OK to confirm a selection. 450 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System Radio Manual Tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band. Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands. Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country). RDS Text Display Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. Satellite Radio Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). You need this number when communicating with SiriusXM to activate, modify or track your account. Check Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel. Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN. Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category. Alerts Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts. Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations. Skip No Stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped. Parental Lockout Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. 451 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System Audio Settings Speed Compensated Volume Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7. Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position. DSP Choose between the stereo modes. CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections. Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. Clock Settings Set Date and Time Select to set the time and calendar date. 24 Hour Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode. Display Settings Language Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish. Temp. Setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius. 452 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/SYNC WITHOUT TOUCHSCREEN road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the Note: Depending on your vehicle option package, your system may look different from what you see here. E253670 A RADIO: Press to select radio mode. Press again to display the available radio sources. Repeatedly press the button to scroll through the available radio sources. B Sound settings: Press to access the sound settings. Follow the on-screen prompts to make your selection. 453 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing C Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In phone mode, enter a phone number. D Display: Press to switch the display on and off. E Repeat: Press to repeat the current media source. F Shuffle: Press to shuffle the current media source. Audio System G Play/Pause: Press to either play or pause a track when listening to a CD. H Settings: Press to access the settings menu. Follow the on-screen prompts to make your selection. I Apps: Press to access the apps menu. Follow the on-screen prompts to make your selection. See your SYNC information. J CLOCK: Press to display the clock. K PHONE: Press to access the phone features. Follow the on-screen prompts to make your selection. See your SYNC information. L Info: Press to access the information menu. Follow the on-screen prompts to make your selection. M AUX: Press to access or switch between devices you plug into your vehicle. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/TOUCHSCREEN DISPLAY WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. 454 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System E176105 A Vol and Power: Turn to adjust the volume. Press to switch the system on and off. B Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. 455 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing C Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. D TUNE: In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. Audio System E MEDIA: Press to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM. F CD slot: Insert a CD. G Eject: Press to eject a CD. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. DIGITAL RADIO Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: • Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast. • Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access a station you save if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. 456 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. 457 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System Potential Station Issues Issues Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Cause Action This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. The previously stored No action required. The multicast preset or direct station is not available in tune is not available in your your current location. current reception area. Text information does not match currently playing audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Fill out the station issue form at website listed below. * There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency. Fill out the station issue form at website listed HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. No action required. This is normal behavior. below. * * http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped) SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. 458 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute. SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0. E208625 459 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio System Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present. tion key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. SIRIUS system failure No action required. This message should disappear shortly. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel or choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna. The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated All the channels in the Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. function on that station. SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle. 460 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing No action required. Audio System USB PORT WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E205592 Note: The rear console USB ports are for charging only. See Center Console (page 167). The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See your SYNC information. 461 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ Driving Restrictions GENERAL INFORMATION For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km). SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows you to: • Make and receive calls. • Access and play music from your portable music player. • Use 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance * and applications via SYNC AppLink. • • • • • Safety Information WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands. Stream music from your connected phone. Text message. Use the advanced voice recognition system. Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. * These features are not available in all markets and may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. Support SYNC support is available at your regional Ford website. See SYNC™ Troubleshooting (page 471). SYNC Owner Account Privacy Information Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC. • Access to customer support for any questions you may have. When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages 462 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the section on 911 Assist. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 466). USING VOICE RECOGNITION The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is around you. Initiating a Voice Session System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a E142599 Press the voice button. A list of available voice commands appears in the display. Global Voice Commands These voice commands are always available. You can say them at any time. Global voice commands Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen. List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands. Cancel This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by pressing seek up, seek down, or holding the voice button for two or more seconds. 463 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ Helpful Hints System Interaction and Feedback • The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. • • • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish, followed by a single tone. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can cancel a voice session by pressing and holding the voice button. The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. Adjusting the Interaction Level Press the voice button. When prompted, say: E142599 Voice Command Action and Description Voice Settings Then either of the following: Interaction Mode Standard Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. (Recommended for first time users.) Interaction Mode Advanced Provides less audible interaction and guidance. Phone Confirmation Using phone confirmations the system asks you to verify before placing any calls. 464 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description Voice Settings Then any of the following: Phone Confirmation Off When enabled, this feature will prompt you to confirm any voice initiated call command prior to the call being placed. Phone Confirmation On The system will make a best guess; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. • Call waiting notification. • Caller ID. Using the Audio System Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. 6. Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Pairing a Phone Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. 465 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Press the Settings button. Select Bluetooth from the menu. Press the OK button. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device. SYNC™ 7. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Voice Command ___ List of Commands Help Call ___ Dial ___ Text Messages Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone and downloading your phonebook. __ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a contact or phone number. Using Voice Commands Phone Controls Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature E142599 before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Use the phone buttons on your steering wheel to answer, reject, or hang up a call. Press the voice button and when prompted say: You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages, as well as access phone and system settings. Voice Command Pair Phone Accessing Features through the Phone Menu Action and Description Press the PHONE button to enter the phone menu. 2. Scroll through the menu to view contacts, text messages, and the phone dialer. 1. Follow the instructions on the audio display. Phone Voice Commands SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES Press the voice button. You can do things like place a phone call E142599 and access text messages. When prompted, say a command. See the following table for example commands. • • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications such as Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is compatible). These features may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. 466 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 911 Assist Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 47). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. See Roadside Emergencies (page 320). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. Setting 911 Assist On or Off WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. Press the Settings button then select: Menu Item Action and Description 911 Assist Select the desired option, on or off. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. To make sure that 911 Assist works properly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either a voice message plays or a display message or an icon comes on when your vehicle is started and after a previously paired phone connects. 467 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ • • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC then attempts to call the emergency services. SYNC Mobile Apps The system enables voice and steering wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. When an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel". Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford website. Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps will vary by region. Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps work automatically with no setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. 468 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ To Access Using the SYNC Menu Menu Item Press the Mobile Apps button to access the menu on-screen. Then select: Menu Item Find Mobile Apps Action and Description Action and Description available applications and select a particular app. Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC AppLink app, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Scroll through the list of To Access Using Voice Commands Press the voice button then when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description Mobile Applications Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip". List Applications SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps. Find Applications Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible mobile apps. Help Use this command to discover the available voice commands. When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example: • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel consumption, engine speed, rain sensor, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, and head lamp status. • To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information such as, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine revolutions per minute, gear position, braking events, steering wheel angle, and accelerator pedal position. App Permissions App permissions are organized by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. 469 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ • • To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed. To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state. Push notifications may be particularly useful for news or location based apps. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER SYNC supports digital media sources including: iPod, Bluetooth devices, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. Media Sources Note: You only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC. The AUX button allows you to view and select available media sources. Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve Ford to provide to an app. Press the AUX button to view your sources. Use the directional arrows and OK button to select your source. You can also use the steering wheel audio controls. Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps Audio Voice Commands In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Press the voice button. You can do things like play a specific song E142599 or album, skip to the next song, or tune to a radio station. When prompted, say a command. See the following table for example commands. Not all commands may be available on your vehicle. Data is sent to Ford in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place automatically. Command ___ List of Commands Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Help Pause Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Play Next Track Previous Track AM ___ FM ___ CD Player 470 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ Use your regional Ford website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Command Sirius Channel ___ USB Bluetooth Audio __ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as an artist, station, or media source. Market Website(s) North America www.SYNCMyRide.com www.SYNCMyRide.ca www.syncmaroute.ca SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) There is excessive background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC performance. Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. SYNC is not able to download my phonebook. This may be a possible phone malfunction. 471 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. SYNC™ Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device memory. The system says Phonebook Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. empty or missing contacts. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying again. I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device's firmware. Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting. 472 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ Phone issues Issue Text messaging is not working on SYNC. I cannot return to the Phone menu when selecting a contact. Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) This is a phone-dependent feature. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. You are on the Select a Character screen. Press the Phone button to return to the Phone menu. USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. I am having trouble connecting my device. This may be a possible device malfunction. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the device and the USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings. SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car. Bluetooth audio does not stream. This is a device limitation. Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your feature. phone supports the Bluetooth audio streaming function. 473 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The device is not connected. Make sure you correctly connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on your device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information. SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device. I cannot change the Sirius station. Make sure that all song details are populated. The file may be corrupted. The song may have copyright protection, which does not allow it to play. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class. Sirius Replay is active. Switch radio bands and return to Sirius or switch the feature off. You can then change the Sirius station using the directional buttons. Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You may be using the wrong voice commands. Review the phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. SYNC does not understand what I am saying. Review the media voice SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong commands at the beginning the name of a song or artist. voice commands. of the media section. 474 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You may be saying the name differently than the way you saved it. Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to The system may not be say "L-O-L-A". reading the name the same way you are saying it. Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them. Review the Phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section. You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are voice commands. listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe or is calling the wrong Wilson". contact when I want to Using the SYNC phone make a call. menu, open the phonebook and scroll to the name You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble name differently than the understanding. SYNC will way you saved it. read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is expecting. 475 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. The system works better if you list full names, such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as may be very short and similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them. special characters. Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS. If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE requires you to say "Call JA-K-E". AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone paired and connected to New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC. SYNC in order to find find any applications. AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an Apple USB cable. Ensure you have downloaded and installed the AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app My phone is connected, but not installed and running on from your phone's app store. I still cannot find any apps. your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or 476 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.' over ignition cycles, for cannot find any apps. Don't forget to restart the example. app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth bug on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off Bluetooth. 477 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable My iPhone phone is back in to the phone. After a connected, my app is The USB connection to few seconds, the app should running, I restarted the app SYNC may need to be reset. appear in SYNC's Mobile but I still cannot find it on Apps Menu. If not, "Force SYNC. Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of phone listed in SYNC's available Bluetooth ports, Mobile Apps Menu. you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu. Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. SYNC System Reset The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC system. 478 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Getting to Know Your System GENERAL INFORMATION The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact with a variety of features using the touchscreen and voice commands. By integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled phone, the touchscreen provides easy interaction with audio, multimedia, climate control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC 3 compatible apps. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Using the Touchscreen To operate the touchscreen, you can simply touch the item or option that you want to select. The button changes color when you select it. The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly select the feature you wish to use. E205444 479 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Menu Item Action and Description A Status Bar This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages. B Home This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view. C Clock This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See Settings (page 527). D Outside Temperature This displays the current outside temperature. E Feature Bar You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature. The Status Bar The touchscreen allows you quick access to all of your comfort, navigation, communication and entertainment options. Using the status and feature bar you can quickly select the feature you want to use. Additional icons also display in the status bar depending on market, vehicle options and current operation. If a feature is not active, the icon does not display. Certain icons may move to the left or right depending on what options are active. Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open). 480 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 i E249671 Callout Item Description A Driver Temperature This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system. B Heated steering wheel When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering wheel. (If equipped) C Passenger Temperature When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are linked, the passenger's temperature does not display. D Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you. E Mute This icon displays when the audio system is muted. 481 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Callout Item Description F Download This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details about the new software. G Wi-Fi This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected. H Wi-Fi in Range An available Wi-Fi network is within range. I Signal Strength This icon displays the phone and roaming signal strength. J Text Message This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone. K 911 Assist Off This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC. L In-Call This icon displays when a phone call is active. M Bluetooth This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth connection. Messages may also appear in the status bar to provide you with notifications. You can select the message to view the associated feature. Feature Bar Feature Bar Item Functions Audio Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs, and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB connection. Climate Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within the vehicle. Phone Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook of your connected device. 482 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Feature Bar Item Navigation (If equipped) Functions Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along your route. Apps Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped). Settings You can customize your system with various settings for the touchscreen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact with your vehicle. When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the status bar indicating the status of the voice command session. See Using Voice Recognition (page 491). Cleaning the Touchscreen You can remove fingerprints with a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again. Using the Steering Wheel Controls Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use different controls on your steering wheel to interact with the touchscreen system in different ways. Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen. Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen. VOL: Control the volume of audio output. Mute: Mute the audio output. Using Voice Recognition Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press again to stop the voice prompt and immediately begin speaking. Press and hold to end a voice session. Using voice commands allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings). SEEK NEXT: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. 483 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 SEEK PREVIOUS: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. • • PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or switch between calls. 911 Assist PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject an incoming call. Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE ACCEPT. WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media sources (modes). WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Steering Wheel (page 83). Using Your Bezel Controls Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these controls on your instrument panel: • • • • • • • DISP: Switch the display on or off. You can also touch the screen to switch the display back on. Temperature, fan and climate control buttons: Control the temperature, fan speed or settings of the climate control system. See Climate Control (page 142). Power: Switch the audio system on and off. VOL: Control the volume of playing audio. Seek and Tune: Use as you normally would in audio modes. Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system. SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to advance through available media modes. SOUND: Press to access the Sound menu where you can adjust sound and other audio settings. 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory preset. See Audio System (page 447). WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. 484 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 • Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar. • Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. • If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting: A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel." See Supplementary Restraints System (page 47). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. See Roadside Emergencies (page 320). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. To switch 911 Assist on and off please view the settings information. See Settings (page 527). If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. 485 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 • 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. • • 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. Have an authorized dealer check your vehicle. Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's user guide for further information. For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC 3. Speed-restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary. Safety Information • WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. • • Screens crowded with information, such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports scores, movie times or ski conditions. Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as entering a navigation destination or editing information. All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries). See the following table for more specific examples. 486 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Restricted features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone. Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls. System Functionality Editing the keypad code. Enabling Valet Mode. Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active. Wi-Fi Editing Wi-Fi settings. Editing the list of wireless networks. Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network. Text Messages Viewing received text messages. Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination. Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas. Website Creating a SYNC Owner Account www.syncmaroute.ca Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • • • Essential for keeping up with the latest software and connected features. Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Maintain account permissions. SYNC Connect (If Equipped) With a SYNC® Connect-equipped vehicle, you can use FordPass® to track your vehicle’s location and remotely access vehicle features such as start, lock and unlock and vehicle status including fuel level and approximate mileage. You can also schedule specific times to remotely start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road as soon as you are. SYNC Connect is an optional feature on select 2017 MY vehicles. FordPass® is available through a free download via the Apple App Store® or Google Play™. Message and data rates may apply. Services may be limited by mobile phone network coverage area. Visit the website to sign up and register. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca 487 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 • • FCC: LHJ-FAN IC: 2807E-FAN Updating Over Wi-Fi Updating Your System To update your System over Wi-Fi your vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi access point. Data rates may apply. You can choose to download the update onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic updates. To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select: Menu Item USB Updates Settings To use the USB update you need to log into your owner account and visit the SYNC software update page. Wi-Fi Available Wi-Fi Networks Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca The website notifies you if an update is available. You can then select to download the update. You can then select your Wi-Fi network. You may have to enter the security code if the network is secured. The system confirms when it has connected to the network. You must also give the system permission to update automatically. Upon vehicle delivery, the System asks you if you would like to use the automatic update feature. If you agree to automatic updates, you can press OK to confirm. If this selection does not appear upon vehicle delivery you can access it through the General Settings. See Settings (page 527). You can also perform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 541). You will need an empty USB drive. Please check the website for minimum requirements. Once you have inserted the USB drive into your computer, choose to start the download. Follow the instructions provided to download the files to the USB drive. The installation of most files occurs in the background, and does not interrupt your use of the system. Navigation updates cannot be installed in the background, because the files are too large. To install the update in your vehicle, remove anything that is plugged in the USB ports on the media hub and plug in the USB drive containing the update. When the USB drive is plugged in, the installation should begin immediately. After a successful installation, the update is available the next time the vehicle is started. Please refer to the website for any further actions. 488 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Support If you would like to switch this feature on later, select: The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own. Menu Item Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST. Settings For Ford: General Automatic System Updates United States: 1-800-392-3673. From this menu, you can enable automatic updates. If you have not done so already, the system prompts you to set up a Wi-Fi connection when you enable this feature. Canada: 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. Privacy Information When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This profile helps in offering you more cellular features and operating more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are enabled, your system checks for software updates periodically. If a new version is available, it downloads at that time. Software downloads can take place for up to 30 minutes after you have switched your vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download does not complete for any reason, the download continues where it left off at the next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon activation of an update, a banner displays on the touchscreen indicating the system update. Select the icon to see more detail. This icon displays for two ignition cycles. To switch this feature off: The cellular profile, media device index, and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. Menu Item Settings General Automatic System Updates In this menu selection, you can change the selection for automatic updates to OFF. If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. You can find more information about the Master Reset in General Settings. See Settings (page 527). System 489 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. HOME SCREEN E205446 Item A Tile Audio Home screen display Shows the active media source. 490 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Tile Home screen display If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass. B C 1 The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging and roaming. Phone Navigation 1 This map displays your current location or current route in real time. When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and distance to your destination. If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information. If equipped. You can access each feature controlled by SYNC 3 through a variety of commands. You can touch any of the feature displays to access that feature. To activate the SYNC 3 voice commands push the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel and wait for the prompt. Anytime you select the home button, the system returns you to this screen. USING VOICE RECOGNITION ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can be the name of anything, such as artist, the name of contact or number. The context and the description of the command tell you what to say for this dynamic option. The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice commands, to control features like audio and climate controls. By using voice commands, you can keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road. Voice Command There are some commands that work for every feature, these commands are: Action and Description Main Menu Brings you to the main menu. Go back Returns you to the previous screen. Cancel Ends the voice session. List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands. ___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For example, you could say: 491 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice Command Action and Description Phone List of Commands Navigation List of Commands Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen. Audio Voice Commands Included here are some of the most popular commands for each SYNC 3 feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for audio voice commands it can be the name of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a radio frequency number, or the name of an artist, album, song or a genre. To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Sirius Channel ___ Description 1 You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16". You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse". AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580". FM ___ FM ___ HD ___ 1 Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”. Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth connected device. USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device. Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song, Penny Lane". Play Playlist ___ Play Artist ___ Play Album ___ 492 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command Description Play Podcast ___ Play Song ___ Play Audiobook ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk". Browse ___ 1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for climate voice commands it can be the desired degrees for the temperature setting. Climate Voice Commands You can control the temperature of the vehicle using voice commands. To adjust the temperature, say: Voice command Description Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C). Phone Voice Commands Pairing a Phone You can use voice commands to connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system. To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Pair Phone Description Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 527). Making Calls ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for phone voice commands it can be the name of the contact you wish to call or the digits you want to dial. 493 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following: Voice command Description Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny". Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home". Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”. Please make sure that you are saying the contact name exactly as it appears in your contact list. Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands: Voice Command Description <0-9> If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you can continue saying the number. Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call. Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state. Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number. Text Message Voice Commands To access text message options, press the voice button and say: Voice command Description Listen to Message Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you would like to hear. Reply to Message 494 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Navigation Voice Commands (If point of interest. Equipped) ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for navigation voice commands it can be a POI category or a major brand name, where major brand name is a chain with more than 20 locations Setting a Destination You can use any of the following commands to set a destination or find a You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category: Voice command Description Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific state or province. Find a ___ State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants". Find a POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality. Find an Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality. Find the NearestState the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for. Show Previous Destinations Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations. Show Favorites Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations. Drive Home Allows you to route to your home address. Drive to Work Allows you to route to your work address. In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active: Voice command Description Cancel Route Cancels the current route. Detour Allows you to select an alternate route. Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt. Show Route Displays the active route. Route Summary Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers. 495 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command Description Where Am I Provides current location. Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map. Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map. Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped) The following voice commands are always available: Voice command Description Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3. List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps. Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3: Voice command Description Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the app mobile app on SYNC 3. Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3. help SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Activation and a subscription are required. 496 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link: Voice command Show Traffic Description Displays a list of traffic incidents. Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map. Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices. Show 5 Day Forecast Displays the 5 day weather forecast. Help Voice Settings Commands You can say the following commands to access the voice settings: Voice command Description Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality. Interaction Mode Standard Sets standard prompting with longer prompts. Interaction Mode Advanced Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts. Call Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call. Call Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call. Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands. Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands. Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. You can adjust the fan speed during a voice session, simply press the fan buttons (or turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease the fan speed to the setting you prefer. You can use the volume control to adjust the volume of the system voice prompts. While prompt is active, adjust the volume control up or down to your desired setting. 497 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence. ENTERTAINMENT E242502 Message Message and description A Sources B Direct Tune C Presets 498 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Sources Note: Your vehicle may allow you to save presets from different audio sources on the same page. Press this button to select the source of media you want to listen to. You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands. Menu item AM FM SIRIUS 1 CD 1 USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here. Bluetooth Stereo Apps 1 This If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections. feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. Once you have entered the station's call numbers, you can select: AM/FM Radio Tuning a Station Menu item You can use the tune or seek controls on the radio bezel to select a station. Action and description Enter Press to begin playing the station you have entered. Menu item Cancel Press to exit without changing the station. A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of a station. You can only enter a valid station for the source you are currently listening to. Presets To tune a station using the touchscreen, select: Direct Tune To set a new preset, tune to the station and then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and then returns. You can press the backspace button to delete the previously entered number. 499 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 There are two preset banks available for AM and three banks for FM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated) Note: This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. This includes canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. E234451 Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. The following buttons are available for SiriusXM: Menu item Action and description Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations. Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station. Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select: Enter The system tunes to the station you select. Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play. You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number. 500 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu item Replay Action and description Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio. When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you to the live broadcast. Live ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel. Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 527). There are three preset banks available for SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. Memory Presets To set a preset, tune to the station then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and returns once the station is stored. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. See Settings (page 527). SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interference Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute. 501 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting tips Message Acquiring Signal Cause Action Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or system failure present. SIRIUS system failure Invalid Channel No action required. This message should disappear shortly. If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or able. choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. Satellite acquiring signal… The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area, tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call 1888-539-7474 Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. None found. Check channel guide. All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on locked. that station. SIRIUS Subscription updated SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle. No action required. HD Radio™ Information (If Available) To activate HD radio, please see the Radio Settings in the Settings Chapter. See Settings (page 527). Note: This feature may not be available in all markets. Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. 502 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit: The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station, and then changes to orange when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. Website www.hdradio.com Note: There is also an additional feature for stations that have more than 1 HD multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this button allows you cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency. For example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly causes the radio to cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic increasing order. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen: E142616 When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: Message Presets Action and description Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. 503 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. Potential station issues Issues Cause Action Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Sound fading or blending in and out. The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. 504 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. SYNC™ 3 Potential station issues Issues Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. Cause Action The previously stored multicast No action required. The station preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current available in your current recep- location. tion area. 1 Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. not match currently broadcaster. playing audio. There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. 1 information shown for broadcaster. currently selected frequency. 1 You can find the form here: Website http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback CD (If equipped) HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. Once you select this option, the system returns you to the main audio screen. The current audio information appears on the screen. The following buttons are also available: Button Function Browse You can use the browse button to select a track. Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat. 505 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Function For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays). Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order. Bluetooth Stereo or USB You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to access media that you store on your Bluetooth device or USB device such as music, audio books or podcasts. The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB: Button Function Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number one). Shuffle Play the tracks in random order. For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide 30-second skip buttons when you listen to audio books or podcasts. These buttons allow you to skip forward or backward within a track. You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. To get more information about the currently playing track, press the cover art or Info button. While playing audio from a USB device you can look for certain music by selecting the following: Button Function Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist. New Search This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories. Play All 506 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Function Playlists Artist Albums Songs Genres Podcasts Audio books Composers A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the category you are browsing. Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your USB device. Select this option to play audio from your USB device. USB Ports Apps The system supports the use of certain audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or Bluetooth enabled device. Each app gives you different on-screen options depending on the app's content. See Apps (page 524). Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information E211463 The system is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including iPod, iPhone, and most USB drives. The USB ports are in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel. Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. This feature allows you to plug in USB media devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature. Supported audio file extensions include MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC. 507 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Supported USB file systems include: FAT, exFAT, and NTFS. CLIMATE SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media from your USB device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the file. Touch the climate button on the touchscreen to access your climate control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package, your climate screen may look different from one of the screens shown below. Your screen may not contain all of the features shown. If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty metadata tags as unknown. Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings (page 527). SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices. E206820 508 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 A Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature. B Heated steering wheel: Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F (23°C) in temperatures as low as -4°F (-22°C). The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F (32°C) and operates independently from the heated seats and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel. set to HI. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on. Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel may also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your vehicle off. D AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. E Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. F DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch it off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch the DUAL button. Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions. C Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically turn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature. Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options. MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the driver and passenger temperatures are 509 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing G Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature. H Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle. SYNC™ 3 J Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX A/C. I A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options. Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually, together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area you desire. Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents. MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. PHONE A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioning A/C button off. Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the interior. Hands-free calling is one of the main features of the system. Once you pair your cell phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone’s functionality. Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or the system may not allow Recirculated air to turn on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. 510 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 3. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Dialing a number. • Call waiting notification. • Caller identification. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. Alternatively, to add a phone, select: To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: Menu Item Add Phone Websites Then select: owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Discover Other Bluetooth Devices 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. Phone Menu This menu becomes available after pairing a phone. 511 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 E205447 Item Menu Item Action and Description A Recent Call List Displays your recent calls. You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list. You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose: All B Contacts Incoming Phone Settings Missed All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order. A-Z Jump C Outgoing Selecting this button allows you to choose a specific letter to view. Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options. From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts. See Settings (page 527). 512 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Menu Item Action and Description D Text Messages Displays all recent text messages. E Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number. Use the backspace button to delete numbers. Call F Do Not Disturb Press this button to begin a call. Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail. Calls are rejected if you do not have voicemail set up on your phone. New text message notifications are not displayed on the screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent. Users with phones having voice services may see a button to access the feature. For example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A press and hold of the voice button on the steering wheel also accesses this feature. Note: Certain features are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is moving. Making Calls There are many ways to make calls from the SYNC 3 system, including using voice commands. See Using Voice Recognition (page 491). You can use the touchscreen to place calls as well. 513 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 To accept the call, select: To call a number in your contacts, select: Menu Item Contacts Menu Item Action and Description Accept You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call. Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To reject the call, select: Menu Item Reject Note: You can also reject the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To call a number from your recent calls, select: Menu Item Action and Description Recent Call List You can then select an entry that you want to call. The system begins the call. Ignore the call by doing nothing. The system logs it as a missed call. During a Phone Call During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration. To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select: Menu Item The phone status items are also visible: • • • Action and Description Phone Keypad Select the digits of the number you wish to call. Call The system begins the call. Signal Strength. Battery. 911 Assist (United States and Canada only). See Settings (page 527). You can select any of the following during an active phone call: Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed. Receiving Calls During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available. 514 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Item End Call Privacy Immediately end a phone call. You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel. Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to SYNC 3. Text Messaging Keypad Press this to access the phone keypad. Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are cell phone-dependent features. Mute You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you. Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h). Receiving a Text Message When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select: Menu Item Action and Description Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you. View View the text on the touchscreen. Call To call the sender. Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully. Close To exit the screen. Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable some SYNC 3 features. SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto to access your phone. Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto features use mobile data. When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, you can: • Make calls. • Send and receive messages. • Listen to music. • Use your phone's voice assistant. Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest iOS version is recommended. 1. 515 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Plug your phone into a USB port. See USB Port (page 461). SYNC™ 3 2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen. 3. Follow the prompts that appear on your phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay. To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select: Menu Item Android Auto Preferences After completing the setup, your phone connects to CarPlay automatically when plugged into a USB port. Your device is listed if SYNC detects Android Auto. Select the name of your device and select: To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select: Disable Menu Item Note: You may need to slide your Settings screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay Preferences or Android Auto Preferences. Apple CarPlay Preferences Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your device and select: To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch the option to return to SYNC. Disable To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC app. Note: Contact Google for Android Auto support. Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay support. NAVIGATION Android Auto Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination mode and map mode. Android Auto is compatible with most devices with Android 5.0 or newer. Map Mode 1. Download the Android Auto app to your device from Google Play to prepare your device (this may require mobile data usage). Note: The Android Auto App may not be available within your current market. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks and 3D city models (when available). 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use, landscape features, and detailed railroad infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe. 2. Plug your device into a USB Port. See USB Port (page 461). 3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen. 4. Follow the prompts that appear on your device. Note: You may be prompted to update additional apps on your device. This may require mobile data usage. 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourism value. 516 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 3D city models are complete 3D models of entire city areas including navigable roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D landmarks and city models appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage of these varies and improves with updated map releases. E207751 Select the zoom in icon to see a closer view of the map. E251780 Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle’s current location. Mute: Press to mute the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute the guidance. E207752 Select the zoom out icon to see a farther away view of the map. E251779 Points of Interest (POI) grouping icon: You can choose up to three POI icons to display E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs are located close together or are at the same location a box is used to display a single category icon instead of repeating the same icon, in order to reduce clutter. When you select the box on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how many POIs are in this location. Select the pop up to see a list of the available POIs. You can scroll through and select POIs from this list. E207753 You can adjust the view in preset increments. You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the map. The information bar tells you the names of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over them with the crosshair curser. You can change your view of the map by tapping on the location indicator icon on the right hand side of the screen. You can choose from the following options: E207750 Heading up (2D map) This always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km). If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel, station icons automatically display on the map. If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow will be indicated on the map by green (clear), yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the information is available and varies across the US. North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen. E207749 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. Adjust this viewing angle and rotate the map 180 degrees by E207748 touching the map twice, and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map. You can choose to display traffic icons on the map representing twelve different types of incidents. See Settings (page 527). You can set a destination by hovering above a location and selecting: 517 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Button Start Destination Mode To set a destination, press: Menu Item Description Destination Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats: Search Street Address (number, street, city, state) For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI" Partial Address (number, street) if searching in current state (number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane". City (name or zip code) Point of Interest (name or category) Intersection (street 1 / street 2) (street 1 and street 2) (street 1 & street 2) (street 1 @ street 2) (street 1 at street 2) Latitude and Longitude (##.###### , ##.######) This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted. You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type. 518 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Description If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections. Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here. tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination. Delete All Home Select this option to remove all previous destinations. Select to navigate to your set Home destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays. To set your Home, press: Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Work Select to navigate to your set Work destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays. To set your Work: Work A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Favorites Favorites include any location you have previously saved. To add Favorites: Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination Favorite bar. Search Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered. Save Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen. The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the favorites screen. Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle (POI) Categories configuration): Food 519 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Description Fuel Hotel ATM See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking for. Inside of these categories you can search by: Nearby Along Route Near Destination In a City Once you have chosen your destination, press: Menu Item Action and Description Save This saves the destination to your favorites. Start This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options. Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads possible. Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible. Economical Route Uses the most fuel-efficient route. The time and distance for each route also displays. Cancel On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode screen. Once you have chosen you destination, press: Menu Item Start Action and Description The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination. 520 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving. The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your destination. SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually. During active navigation, touch the bottom of the screen to view the menu and other buttons. Navigation Menu In map mode and during active navigation you can access the navigation menu. To access the Navigation menu, press: Button Menu You can then select: Screen View Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation. Highway Exit Info Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation. Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations. You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired. Turn List Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route. You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears and you can press: Avoid The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list. Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. 521 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present). When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route. Navigation Settings Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 527). Where Am I? Provides your current location city and the nearest road. The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route: Cancel Route The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen. View Route Press this to see a map of the full route. Detour An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route. Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set waypoints. Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints. You can also have the system set the order for you by pressing: Optimize Order To return to Go your route press: 1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass) while on an active route. This brings up the destination menu. 2. Set your destination using any of the given methods. Once the destination has been selected, the screen allows you to set the destination as a waypoint by selecting: Waypoints You can add a waypoint to a navigation route as a destination along your route. To add a waypoint: 522 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Add Waypoint The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the location. You can select up to five waypoints. You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order for you by pressing: To return to your route, press: Go SYNC AppLink cityseeker (If Equipped) The AppLink app allows you to use some SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone. Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI) information is limited to approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in Mexico). First Mile Navigation When you switch your ignition off, the location of your vehicle is recorded and sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of your vehicle can be viewed within the app. You can also view walking directions to your vehicle. Last Mile Navigation E225487 When you park near your destination, the system provides walking directions to your destination. POI Search cityseeker, when available, is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants, hotels and attractions. Your paired phone can be used to access additional points of interest (POI). These points of interest can only be access when your phone is paired. When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information appear, such as address, phone number and a star rating. Send To Car Press More Information to see a photo, a review, a list of services and facilities, the average room or meal price and the web address. This screen displays the point of interest icons. You can send destinations to your navigation system using a computer or phone using AppLink. 523 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 The system calculates a reasonable efficient route based on available speed limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may know a local short cut that is more efficient at a given time than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight difference in minutes or miles with the SYNC 3 route. For restaurants, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address. For hotels, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and checkout times, hotel service icons and website address. Hotel service icons include: • • • • • • • • • • Navigation Map Updates Restaurant Business center Handicap facilities Laundry Refrigerator 24 hour room service Fitness center Internet access Pool Wi-Fi Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also visit: Website www.navigation.com/sync You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available. Attractions include nearby landmarks, amusement parks, historic buildings and more. cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation and admission price. HERE is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data errors, you may report them directly to HERE by going to www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available on vehicles equipped with navigation and only in select markets. You must activate and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information. It helps you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see current sports scores. See Apps (page 524). Map coverage includes the USA (including Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands), Canada and Mexico. APPS The system enables voice, steering wheel, and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. 524 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will vary by market. Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to access AppLink. Menu Item Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Find Mobile Apps Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit: Websites Action and Description SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps will work automatically with no setup. Other apps will want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites.We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. The connected device sends data to Ford in the United States. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, odometer, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain this data for only as long as necessary to provide this service, troubleshoot, and improve products and services and to offer you products and services that may interest you where allowed by law. Note: We encourage you to review the smartphone app’s terms of service and privacy policies because Ford is not responsible for your app or its use of data. Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system feature. Accessing mobile apps through AppLink is only possible when Android Auto or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps may only be accessible in the car through AppLink and others only through Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the Smartphone Connectivity information to disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Note: Ford reserves the right to limit functionality or deactivate mobile apps at any time. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, the app needs to be running in the background of your phone. If you shut down the app on your phone, it shuts down the app on SYNC 3 as well. 525 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 You can enable and disable apps through settings. See Settings (page 527). operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. App Permissions The system organizes the App permissions into groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. While in the settings menu, you can also see the data included in each group. Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, your vehicle must have navigation. When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example Vehicle information, Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You can enable all groups or none of them during the initial app permissions prompts. The settings menu offers individual group permission control. Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features. Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information. Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. Note: You are only prompted to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC 3. Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in vehicles. Note: If you disable group permissions, apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings menu. When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, it can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped) WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe 526 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Traffic on Route Traffic Nearby Action and Description Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if programmed. Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route. Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available. Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the chosen area. Map Select to see the weather map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. Area Select to choose from a listing of weather locations. Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress. Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area. Sound SETTINGS Pressing this button allows you to adjust the following: Under this menu, you can access and adjust the settings for many of the system features. To access additional settings, swipe the screen left or right. Sound Settings Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels. Treble Adjusts the high frequency level. Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level. Bass Adjusts the low frequency level. Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back. 527 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Sound Settings Speed Compensated Vol. Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off. Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners. Sound Settings Stereo Surround Your vehicle might not have all of these features. Media Player This button is available when a media device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is the active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following options for active devices only. Menu Item Podcast Speed Action and Description For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose: Slower Normal Faster Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose: Cover Art Priority Gracenote® Management Slower Normal Faster Media Player Cover art displays from your device’s music files. If no cover art for the files exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art. Gracenote® The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files. This overrides any cover art from your device. Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist and album. 528 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. base Info Device Information This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device. Update Media Index Erase the stored media information in order to re-index. You can adjust the following features: Clock To adjust the time, select the up and down arrows on either side of the screen. The arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows on the right adjust the minute. You can then select AM or PM. Menu Item Action and Description Clock Format Select how time displays. Auto Time Zone Update When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes. This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation. Reset Clock to GPS Time When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time. Bluetooth The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings. Pressing this button allows you to access the following: Menu Item Bluetooth Action On Off Phone You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Bluetooth enabled device. Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a device and the available options. 529 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. 3. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. Once you have paired a device you can adjust the following options. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: Website owner.lincoln.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone Once you have paired a device you can adjust the following options. Then select: Discover Other Bluetooth Devices Menu Item Action and Description View Devices You can then select: Add a Bluetooth Device You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in the previous table. You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options: 530 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Connect Disconnect Action and Description Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected device. Make Primary Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device. Delete Removes the selected device from the system. Press the info icon next to the device name to see phone and device information. Menu Item Action and Description Manage Contacts You can then select: Auto-Download Contacts Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to date. Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose: First Name Last Name Re-download Contacts Select this option to re-download your contact list manually. Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone. Menu Item Action and Description Set Phone Ringtone You can then select: No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone. Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting. You can also select one of the three available ringers. 531 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Text Messaging You can then select: No Alert (Silence) No sound plays when a message comes to your phone. You can select one of the three available notification sounds. Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message. You can enable and disable the following options as well: Menu Item Action and Description Mute Audio in Privacy When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy. Roaming Warning When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call. Low Battery Notification When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low. To activate 911 Assist from the settings screen select: 911 Assist Enabling 911 Assist Note: For this feature to work, your cell phone must have Bluetooth and connect with SYNC3. Menu Item 911 Assist Action and Description Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can switch this feature on and off by sliding the scrollbar as follows. Setting Emergency Contacts Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature on. Ensure the phone book of your cell phone downloaded to SYNC 3. You can set your contacts in the phone book for emergency quick dialing. From the settings screen select: 532 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item 911 Assist Action and Description Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. Set Emergency Select this option as it displays on the screen. Contacts Menu Item Select a Contact Action and Description Select this option under . The screen lists contacts in the phone book. Select the contact that you want to set as emergency contact. You can set Emergency Contact 2 by same process. You can set two Emergency Contacts in total. Note: If the vehicle is equipped with navigation, a map with your current street information displays on the screen when 911 Assist is in process. Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an emergency call, the Emergency Contact button displays on the touch screen. You need to press the button to call the contact through your Bluetooth phone. This button is available if a Radio source such as AM or FM is the active media source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features: Menu Item FM HD Radio Radio Action and Description Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts. AM HD Radio (Dependent on current radio source, If Available) Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio text. Autoset Presets Refresh (AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source. 533 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 SiriusXM active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features: This button is available if SiriusXM is the Menu Item Action and Description Set Category for If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that Seek category. Parental Lockout Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. Edit Alerts Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an alert or delete all alerts. Navigation You can also view your satellite radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this screen. You need this number when communicating with SiriusXM to activate, modify or track your account. You can adjust many of the Navigation preferences by selecting the following menus. Map Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Map Preferences Then select any of the following: 3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings. Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots. POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon is displayed on the map regardless of this setting. Once this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed by selecting: Incident Map Icons Select POIs This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map. 534 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Route Preferences Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions Route Preferences Then select any of the following: Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type. Shortest Always Use ___ Route Fastest Eco Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred route setting. When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination. Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance. Automatically Find Parking The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination. Eco Time Penalty Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route. Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow Guidance information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible. Navigation Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts You can adjust how the system provides prompts. Then select any of the following: Voice and Tones Voice Only Tones Only 535 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Navigation Source Selection The connected devices send data to us in the United States. The encrypted information includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place. The screen lists available alternative navigation sources using Applink. Mobile Apps You can enable the control of compatible mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Menu Item Mobile Apps Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible with the system. Note: Standard data rates apply. We are not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. Action and Description On Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. Off You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu. Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options: Update Mobile Apps This provides information on the current state of available app updates. There are three possible statuses: Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps… The system has No update is detected a new app required. requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. The system is trying to receive an update. Request Update Select this button if an update is required and you want to request this update manually. For example, when your mobile device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select: 536 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Request Update All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once. There may also be SYNC 3 enabled apps listed under these options. Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group. Note: We is not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve us to provide to an app. General Access and adjust the system settings, voice features, as well as phone, navigation and wireless settings. Menu Item Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French. Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit. Touch Screen Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen. Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection. 537 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software. Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system. Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data. System Wi-Fi Wi-Fi & Hotspot (If Equipped) You can access the following: Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot settings and information. Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates. Available Networks This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range. Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may require a security code to connect. When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such as the signal strength, connection status and security type. Wi-Fi Available Notifications The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already connected. Vehicle Hotspot You can access the following: 538 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off. Settings Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password. Data Usage Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage. Manage Devices Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot. Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle Hotspot) may be operational while ignition is On and may remain operational while the ignition is Off. Note: We may need to update operating system software on your vehicle, including security updates and bug fixes, to keep connected services current, like Vehicle Hotspot, without prior notice to you. Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided by the vehicle network carrier, subject to your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability. Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) Tap a color once to active ambient lighting. This sets the color to the highest intensity. Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility to remove the vehicle from the vehicle network carrier account when ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would like to remove the vehicle from the account for any reason, please contact your vehicle network carrier for more information. You can drag the colors up and down to increase or decrease the intensity. To switch ambient lighting off, press the active color once or drag the active color all the way down to zero intensity. Vehicle Note: Data, such as the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan usage, is shared between us and the vehicle network carrier to provide the Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability, and may be used to enable a seamless transition from an old to new embedded modem and to confirm any updates are successfully delivered. Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these features. You can select the following features to update their settings. Door Keypad Code Select this button to add or erase a personal door keypad code. To add or erase a personal code, you first need to enter the five-digit factory set code. You can find this code on the owner's wallet card in the glove box or from your authorized dealer. Note: For your convenience data usage may be available for monitoring under Settings but may not reflect actual or current usage. The vehicle network carrier is responsible for providing information about your account. Please contact the vehicle network carrier for more information. 539 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Camera Settings To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Camera Settings Then select from the following: Rear Camera Delay You can enable or disable this option using the slider. You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner's manual. Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) Selecting this button on the settings menu shows you the ESN number for your system. You need this number for certain registrations such as Satellite Radio. Display To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Menu Item Action and Description Display Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen to switch it back on. Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer. Mode You can select: Auto Dim Auto The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside light level. Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing. Night The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier. Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions. 540 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice Control You can adjust the voice control settings by selecting the following options. Menu Item Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations. Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's name with you before making a call. Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands when you press the voice. Valet Mode Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN. When you select valet mode, a pop up appears informing you that a four digit code must be entered to enable and disable valet mode. You can use any PIN you chose but you must use the same PIN to disable valet mode. The system asks you to input the code. Ford Lincoln United States and Canada: 1-800392-3673 United States: 1800-521-4140 Canada: 1-800387-9333 To enable valet mode, enter your chosen PIN. The system then asks to confirm your PIN by reentering it. The system then locks. To unlock the system, enter the same pin number. The system reconnects to your phone and all of your options are available again. Note: If the system is locked and you cannot remember the PIN, please contact the Customer Relationship Center. For Lincoln United States: 1-800-521-4140 Canada: 1-800-387-9333 SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below. To check your cell phone's compatibility, refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website. 541 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution There is background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting SYNC 3 performance. Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the Possible cell phone other person malfunction. but they cannot hear me. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. During a call, I cannot hear the The system may need to other person be restarted. and they cannot hear me. To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off. This is a cell phonedependent feature. SYNC 3 is not able to download my phone- Possible cell phone book. malfunction. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone icon on the phone screen. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability. book is empty or is missing contacts. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to your cell phone's memory. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. 542 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause This is a cell phonedependent feature. Possible solution Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to SYNC 3. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again. Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone. Update your cell phone's firmware. Switch the auto download setting off. Text messaging is not working on SYNC 3. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. iPhone • • • • • Go to your cell phone's Settings. Go to the Bluetooth Menu. Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your vehicle make and model to enter the next menu. Turn Show Notifications on. Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system to activate this settings update. Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3. Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application. Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone. 543 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Audible text messages do not work on my This is a cell phone limitacell phone. tion. Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider and software version. USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. I am having trouble connecting my device. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's Possible device malfunc- cable. tion. Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your vehicle's USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings. The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. SYNC 3 does not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold I start my temperatures. vehicle. Bluetooth audio This is a devicedoes not dependent feature. stream. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have started the media player on your device. 544 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution The device is not connected. The device is in a bad state. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated. information. The file may be corrupted. Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version. SYNC 3 does The song may have not recognize copyright protection that music that is on does not allow it to play. my device. The file format is not supported by SYNC 3. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to media transfer protocol class. Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 498). The device needs to be re-indexed. Update media index. See Settings (page 527). The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3. When I connect my device, I To listen to Apple devices through USB, sometimes do This is a device limitation. select AirPlay from the devices Control not hear any Center, then select Dock Connector. sound. To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC. SYNC 3 does not display the The device or media song informaplayer is incompatible. tion, repeat, or shuffle buttons. Connect a compatible device or media player. 545 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Wi-Fi Issues Issue Failed connection. Possible cause Possible solution Password error. Verify password. Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal. Multiple Access points within range with the same SSID. Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address. Weak signal probably Disconnecting after successful due to distance from the hotspot, obstruction or connection. high interference. Position the vehicle close to the hotspot with the front of the vehicle facing the hotspot direction and remove obstacles if possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may cause interference. Poor signal seen There may be an by SYNC 3 obstruction between despite being SYNC 3 and the hotspot. near a hotspot. If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows are tinted, you can open the windows in the direction of the hotspot if that is feasible. Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such as opening the garage door. A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try listed in the list as a hidden network. again. of available networks. 546 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Wi-Fi Issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 is not SYNC 3 does not seen when currently provide a searching for hotspot. Wi-Fi networks from your phone or other devices. SYNC 3 currently does not provide a hotspot. Software down- Poor signal strength, too far from the hotspot, load takes too hotspot is supporting long. multiple connections, slow Internet connection or other problems. Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped hotspot where the environment is more predictable. SYNC 3 seems to connect with a hotspot and the signal strength is excellent but the software is not being updated. It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if no new software. The the hotspot requires a subscription, you connected hotspot may may contact the service provider. be a managed one and it requires either a subscription or agreeing to the terms and conditions. 547 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You did not connect an Applink Compatible phone to SYNC 3. Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable. My phone is connected, but I still cannot find any apps. AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and running on your mobile device. Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. My phone is connected, my app(s) are running, but I still cannot find any apps. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select it and restart the app. If the app does not have that option, select the phone's Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.' properly close and reopen their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3. SYNC 3, over ignition cycles, for example. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu. AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find Mobile Apps," SYNC 3 does not find any applications. 548 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth issue on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you did not switch Bluetooth off. Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. My iPhone is connected, my app is running, I You may need to reset the USB connection to restarted the SYNC 3. app but I still cannot find it on SYNC 3. Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC 3, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. The Bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. I can only see some of the AppLink apps running on my phone listed in the SYNC 3 Mobile Apps Menu. Some Android devices have a limited number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to connect. If you have more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of available Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3 mobile apps menu. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. 549 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You may be using the SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there. Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command. You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section. Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device. For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain". You may not be saying SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it not understand appears on your device. the name of a song or artist. SYNC 3 does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call. Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N". The song or artist name may have some special characters that are not being recognized by SYNC 3. Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom". The contact name may contain special characters. Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. 550 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign names stored on my cell phone. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist names from my media player or USB flash drive. You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC 3. The system generates voice prompts and SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt ation of some technology. words may not be accurate for my language. Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE. Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting. SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists. SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice. SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). 551 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Personal Profiles Issue Possible cause and solution Personal Profiles have not been set up. An invalid profile name was entered. I cannot create a profile. A memory button was not selected when prompted. The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while creating a profile. Personal Profiles is turned off. The lock button was not selected on a keyfob when prompted. The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and an overwrite was declined. I cannot link a keyfob. A profile recall was performed while linking a keyfob. The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while linking a keyfob. The old linking method is used. The unsaved setting is not supported by Personal Profiles. My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active than expected. Another user has changed settings for the wrong Personal Profile. A Personal Profile has not been created. Personal Profiles is turned off. My profile will not recall. The requested profile is already active. The memory button being used is not linked to a profile. 552 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 Personal Profiles Issue Possible cause and solution The keyfob being used is not linked to a profile. The wrong keyfob is being used. A button other than unlock or remote start is being pressed on a linked keyfob. The Personal Profile was deleted. My preset positions recall but my profile does not. My profile recalls but my preset positions do not. I lost a keyfob. I lost all profiles. Personal Profiles is turned off. The vehicle is in motion. The preset positions are the same as the Guest or previously active profile. Unlink and relink your keyfob in the Personal Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer. Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed. This could happen if you let dealership add a new keyfob to replace lost one. Master Reset had been performed without your acknowledgement. 553 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing SYNC™ 3 General Issue The language selected for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display does not match the SYNC 3 language (phone, USB, Bluetooth audio, voice control and voice prompts). Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most popular SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the the currently selected language for the instru- current active language. ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages. display. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). SYNC 3 System Reset The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system. For additional assistance with SYNC 3 troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website. 554 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site: • • • • • Web Address (United States) www.Accessories.Ford.com Interior Style • • • Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca Ambient lighting. Floor mats. Premium floor liners. Lifestyle Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. • • • • • • • • • • Ford Motor Company will warrant your Ford Original Accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: • 24 months, unlimited mileage. • The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. • • • • • • • • • Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Exterior Style • • • • • • • • • Splash guards. Tailgate dampener. Tow hooks. Trailer tow mirrors. Trim kits. Bed rails. Chrome exhaust tips. Custom graphics*. Door sills*. Fender flares*. Fog lamps*. Hood deflector. Running boards. Side window deflectors*. • • • 555 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Audio upgrade*. Bed divider. Bed extender. Bed lighting. Bedliners and bedmats. Bed ramps. Bed side step. Ford Telematics™*. Hitch balls and towbars. Interior cargo organization and management. In-vehicle safe*. Racks and carriers*. Rear-seat entertainment*. Smoker's package. Sportliner cargo liner*. Tablet cradle* Tonneau/Bed cover*. Trailer brake controller. Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories. Truck bed camping tent*. Truck bed cargo organization and management. Wireless charging*. Accessories Peace of Mind • • • • • • • • • • • Footnote Back-up alarm*. Bed hooks*. Bumper and hitch-mounted parking sensors*. Keyless entry keypad. Protective seat covers*. Remote start. Roadside assistance kits. Tool or cargo boxes*. Vehicle security systems. Wheel locks. Wheel well liners. *Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer's limited warranty details, and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer. For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. 556 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Accessories • • Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if their manufacturer did not design them specifically for automotive use. If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability, and may adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. 557 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Ford Protect PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership. • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts. Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only) Rental Car Reimbursement Ford Protect extended service plan means peace of mind. It’s the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides more protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford Protect extended service plans! 1st day Rental Benefit If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the day. Extended Rental Benefits Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions. One trip to the Service Center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Protect extended service plan. With Ford Protect extended service plan you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components • There are four mechanical Ford Protect extended service plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • • 1. • PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it’s probably easier to list what’s not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts. Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage or other transportation. Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Protect extended service plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Which should give you and your potential buyer a little more peace of mind. Ford Protect extended service plans are honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico. 558 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Ford Protect Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY) Ford Protect extended service plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect extended service plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Protect extended service plan provides benefits such as: Covered maintenance includes: • Windshield wiper blades. • Spark plugs. • The clutch disc (if equipped). • Brake pads and linings. • Shock absorbers. • Struts. • Engine Belts. • Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. • Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if equipped). • Cabin air filter replacement every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric vehicles only). • • • • Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. There are several Ford Protect extended service plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Protect extended service plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford Protect extended service plan has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect extended service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Protect extended service plan coverage. This information is subject to change. For more information; visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect extended service plan that is right for you. Ford Protect Extended Service Plan P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 559 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance. We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs. It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 414). Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Factory-Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received. Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km). 560 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of the message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 352). We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. Additives and Chemicals This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change intervals. Oils, Fluids and Flushing You can drive high performance vehicles in such a way that may lead to higher oil consumption this includes extended time at high engine speeds, high loads, engine braking, hard cornering maneuvers, track and off-road usage. Under these conditions, oil consumption of approximately 1 quart per 500 miles (1 liter per 800 km) is possible. As a result, you need to check the engine oil level at every refueling and adjust to maintain proper levels to avoid engine damage. In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals. 561 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Check Every Month Air filter restriction gauge. Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires including the spare for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level. Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary or if indicated by the information display. Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris. Check Every Six Months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps, brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. Multi-Point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. 562 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Multi-Point Inspection Accessory drive belt or belts Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage Tires including the spare for wear and 1 Fluid levels ; fill if necessary 2 proper pressure 1 For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer 2 If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor Diesel Engines Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display. 563 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use. When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message Interval Vehicle Use and Example Normal 7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km) Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling Severe 5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km) 3,000–5,000 mi (5,000–8,000 km) Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation Extreme Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation 564 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Normal Maintenance Intervals 1 At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display 2 Change engine oil and filter. Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth. Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended). Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult your dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake. Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel drive vehicles). Inspect the half-shaft boots. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings. Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display). Refill the diesel exhaust fluid tank. Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary. 1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 352). Other Maintenance Items Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) 1 Replace cabin air filter. Replace engine air filter. Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters. 565 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Other Maintenance Items At 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Change engine coolant. 1 2 Replace spark plugs. Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles). Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km) Change rear axle fluid. Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles). Replace accessory drive belt(s). 1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. 2 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or 50,000 mi (80,000 km). 3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced. Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the information display. SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE • If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance, as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. • 566 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Example 1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at 28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic transmission fluid replacement. Example 2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Perform the engine air filter replacement. Scheduled Maintenance Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect and lubricate U-joints. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace spark plugs. (Gasoline Engine). See axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use (Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery) As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Replace engine air filter. (Gasoline Engine). Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace spark plugs. (Gasoline Engine). Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary (Diesel Engine). Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads) Inspect frequently, service as required Replace engine air filter. (Gasoline engine). Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary (Diesel Engine). Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1 or six months 1 Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change. 567 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Off-road Operation Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings. Replace engine air filter. (Gasoline engine). Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary (Diesel Engine). Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1 or six months Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. 1 Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change. Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only) Every oil change interval If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel. (Gasoline Engine). Diesel Engine If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. 568 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. See the axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km) or six months, filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra(48,000 km) or 1200 engine tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion hours inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. Frequent or Extended Idling (Over 10 Minutes Per Hour of Normal Driving) or Frequent Low-speed Operation if your Vehicle is Used for Stationary Operation As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra(48,000 km) or 1200 engine tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. hours Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. 569 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Frequent Low-speed Operation, Consistent Heavy Traffic Under 25 mph (40 km/h) or Long Rush-hour Traffic As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra(48,000 km) or 1200 engine tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. hours Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. Sustained High-speed Driving at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Maximum Loaded Weight for Vehicle Operation) As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Inspect the engine and cooling system coolant concentra(48,000 km) or 1200 engine tion (freeze-point protection) and additive (corrosion hours inhibitor) strength. Add coolant additive if necessary. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours Flush and refill the coolant. Do not add coolant additive. Note: After the initial coolant flush and fill at 60,000 mi (96,000 km) or 2400 engine hours, flush and fill every 45,000 mi (72,000 km) or 1800 engine hours thereafter. 570 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Operating in Sustained Ambient Temperatures Below -9°F (-23°C) or Above 100°F (38°C) As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads) Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km) Rotate the tires1, inspect the tires for wear and measure tread depth. Inspect the brake system pads and rotors. Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary. Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods. Lubricate any grease fittings. Every 7,500 mi (12,000 km), Change the engine oil and filter.2 six months or 300 engine hours Inspect and lubricate the U-joints. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km), 6 months or 600 engine hours Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel filters. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace the air inlet foam filter. 1 Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels only if unusual wear is noted. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. 571 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Off-road Operation Inspect functional holes in exhaust tip to make sure they are clean and clear of debris or foreign materials. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter of your owner’s manual for more information. (Diesel Engine). As required Inspect the steering and suspension ball joints and tie rods. Lubricate any grease fittings. Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km), Rotate the tires, inspect the tires for wear and measure six months or 300 engine tread depth. hours Inspect the brake system pads and rotors. Inspect the air filter restriction gauge. Replace the filter if necessary. Every 7,000 mi (12,000 km) Change the engine oil and filter.1 or 300 engine hours Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km), six months or filters. 600 engine hours Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) 1 Replace the air inlet foam filter. Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. Using Biodiesel, up to and Including 20% Biodiesel (B20) As required Change the engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display, and perform the services listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Every 30,000 mi Replace the engine-mounted and frame-mounted fuel (48,000 km), six months or filters. 300 engine hours Axle and Transfer Case Maintenance Exceptions Axle(s) and transfer case (Four-wheel drive vehicles) fluid changes or level checks are not required unless a leak is suspected or the assembly has been submerged in water. Contact an authorized dealer for service. There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. 572 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance California Fuel Filter Replacement Engine Air Filter Replacement If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. The life of the engine air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter. Diesel Particulate Filter Over time, a slight amount of ash builds up in the diesel particulate filter, which is not removed during the regeneration process. The filter may need to be replaced with a new or remanufactured part at approximately 250,000 mi (400,000 km). Actual mileage varies depending on engine and vehicle operating conditions. Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km). In this case, the engine control system sets a service light (wrench icon) to inform you to bring your vehicle to the dealer for service. If there are any issues with the oxidation catalyst or particulate filter system, a service light (wrench or engine icon) sets by the engine control system to inform you to bring your vehicle into a dealer for service. If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 1,800 mi (2,900 km). SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 573 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 574 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 575 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 576 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 577 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 578 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 579 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 580 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 581 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 582 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 583 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY WARNING: Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic modules and airbags. WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Note: We test and certify your vehicle to meet electromagnetic compatibility legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment an authorized dealer installs on your vehicle complies with applicable local legislation and other requirements. WARNING: Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes. Note: Any radio frequency transmitter equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular telephones and amateur radio transmitters) must keep to the parameters in the following table. We do not provide special provisions or conditions for installations or use. Car E239120 584 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Van E239122 Truck E239121 585 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) Antenna Positions 1-30 50 1 50-54 50 2, 3 68-88 50 2, 3 142-176 50 2, 3 380-512 50 2, 3 806-870 10 2, 3 Note: After the installation of radio frequency transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in your vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Check all electrical equipment: • With the ignition ON. • With the engine running. • During a road test at various speeds. • VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements. • 586 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. Appendices IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. Description of Other Rights and Limitations • Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR • • 587 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • • • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES. Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional • • 588 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (I) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES. Appendices UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. 589 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices • SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions: • Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries. • General Operation • Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road. • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. • Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. • Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. • • • 590 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Appendices Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk • You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway. • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) – (e) above. Disclaimer of Warranty YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL 591 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver (a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration. Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction • The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA. (c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first. (d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up 592 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award. may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim. (g) Arbitration fees and incentives. • (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings. (f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator • • 593 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts. ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all Appendices 1. Safe and Lawful Use filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves. You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred. (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (I) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect. (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 594 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices 2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. I. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, 3. Software License • ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. 4. Disclaimers • 3.1 License Limitations • (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) 595 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others Appendices • • is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. Arbitration and Governing Law • 5. Limitation of Liability • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY 596 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit Appendices to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. 7. Assignment 8.3 • By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 8.5 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or 597 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices 8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4 The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions • 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:: The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights reserved Terms and Conditions 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. 598 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. No Warranty. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A 599 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: I. US/Canada Territory A. United States Data. The End-User Terms for any Application containing Data for the United States shall contain the following notices: “HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.” “©United States Postal Service® 20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.” 600 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices 2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved.” B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors (“Third Party Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party Data is subject to the following provisions: a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors of such data, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. 3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms (set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan: b. Limitation on Liability: The Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the Data. The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, 601 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data. II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice: “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” III. Latin America Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement. To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail. Territory Notice Argentina IGN “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL ARGENTINO” Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO MILITAR DEL ECUADOR AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO DE 2011” “source: © IGN 2009 - BD TOPO ®” Guadeloupe, French Guiana and Martinique Mexico “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” IV. Middle East Territory 602 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country Notice Jordan “© Royal Jordanian Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement, HERE shall have the right to terminate Client’s license with respect to the Jordan Data. V. Europe Territory A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe 1. General Restrictions Applicable to Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the Data incorporating Traffic Codes to Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights. 2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Transports.” B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing HERE’s database for the country of Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services. B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client’s complying with the OS copyright notice requirements; (b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to Data for the Territory of Czech Republic 603 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of Germany, Topografische Dienst of the Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland, Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land Survey of Sweden. Austria Croatia Cyprus, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldova, Poland, Slovenia and/or Ukraine “© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen” “© EuroGeographics” France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD TOPO ®” Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen” Great Britain “Contains Ordnance Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010” C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement. D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country(ies) Notice 604 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Greece “Copyright Geomatics Ltd.” Hungary “Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd.” Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.” Norway “Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority” Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal” Appendices Spain “Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG” Sweden “Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.” Product incorporates data which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User Terms for any Application containing RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice: “Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.” Switzerland “Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie. E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon Client’s compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries. AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics Disclosure END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS, EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR VI. Australia Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au). 605 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING CARRIER. (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE DEVICE. (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES VII. China Territory THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT GUARANTEE ANY END USER UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER Personal Use Only You agree to use this Data together with [insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i) 606 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices rigCustomer Remedies view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source. Restrictions Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions. No Other Warranty: EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Limited Warranty NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues. Limited Liability: TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR 607 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Governing Law. FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People’s Republic of China, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International Economic and Trade Arbitration Commission for arbitration. Gracenote® Copyright CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523. Export Control You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. IP Protection Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) Entire Agreement This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers 608 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, 609 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Taiwan Territory IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. Note: In accordance with the management approach of low-power radio wave radiation motors: Article 12: For approved and certified low-power radiation motor models, companies, firms or users must not alter the frequency, increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design without authorization. Article 14: The usage of low-power radio-frequency motors must not affect aviation safety and interfere with legal telecommunications. Should interference be detected, immediately stop using the device and only resume usage after ensuring that there is no longer any interference. For the legal telecommunication and wireless telecommunication of the telco, the low-power radio frequency motor must be able to tolerate legal limits of interference from telecommunication, industrial, scientific and radio wave equipment. Radio Frequency Statement FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND CONDITIONS By activating, using and/or accessing the SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or other content or material provided by Intelematics (together, SUNA Products and/or Services), you must accept certain terms and conditions. The following is a brief summary of the terms and conditions that apply to you. To view the full terms and conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, please consult: WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 1. Acceptance 610 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices By using SUNA Products and/or Services, you will be deemed to have accepted and agreed to be bound by the terms and conditions fully detailed at: 5. Service Continuity and Reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel We will use reasonable endeavours to provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic Channel may occasionally be unavailable for technical reasons or for planned maintenance. We will try to perform maintenance at times when congestion is light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA Products and/or Services at any time. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services are for your personal use. You may not record, or retransmit the content, nor use the content in association with any other traffic information or route guidance service or device not approved by Intelematics. You obtain no right of ownership in any Intellectual Property Rights (including copyright) in the data that is used to provide SUNA Products and/or Services. Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel RDS-TMC signal at any particular location. 6. Limitation of Liability Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the manufacturer of your device (the “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any third party for any damages either direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or otherwise arising out of the use of or inability to use SUNA Products and/or Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised of the possibility of such damages. You also acknowledge that the neither Intelematics nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any warranties that relate to the availability, accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products and/or Services, and to the extent which it is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each Supplier excludes any warranties which might otherwise be implied by any State or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA Products and/or Services. 3. Appropriate Use SUNA Products and/or Services are intended as an aid to personal motoring and travel planning, and do not provide comprehensive or accurate information on all occasions. On occasions, you may experience additional delay as a result of using SUNA Products and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is not intended, or suitable, for use in applications where time of arrival or driving directions may impact the safety of the public or yourself. 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services while driving You, and other authorised drivers of the vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Services are available or installed and active, remain at all times responsible for observing all relevant laws and codes of safe driving. In particular, you agree to only actively operate SUNA Products and/or Services when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and it is safe to do so. 7. Please Note Great care has been taken in preparing this manual. Constant product development may mean that some information is not entirely up-to-date. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. 611 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices TYPE APPROVALS Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) E253824 Ghana E253823 Jordan E207816 Argentina E253822 Malaysia E253812 E197509 Brazil E253813 Mexico E207818 European Union EU E197811 612 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Moldova E197844 Serbia E207821 Morocco E253820 E253817 Singapore Oman E198002 South Africa E198001 Philippines E253819 E253816 South Korea Russia 613 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Mid Range Radar E203679 Taiwan E269659 Argentina E253818 Ukraine E269662 Ghana E207817 United Arab Emirates E269660 Jordan 614 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Passive Anti-Theft System E269661 Morocco E274065 Argentina E269664 South Africa E269675 Brazil E269663 United Arab Emirates E274068 Djibouti 615 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices E269674 E269673 Ghana Malaysia E274067 E269670 Jamaica Morocco E269666 E274066 Jordan Paraguay 616 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices E275754 E269667 Pakistan South Africa E269672 E269671 Serbia Ukraine E269676 E269668 Singapore United Arab Emirates 617 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices E269677 E272194 Vietnam Jordan Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Radio Transceiver Module E269683 Morocco E272192 Djibouti E269684 Pakistan E272193 Jamaica 618 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices E272195 E269682 Paraguay Ukraine E269681 E272196 Serbia United Arab Emirates Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Blind Spot Information System E269685 South Africa E269695 Ghana 619 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices E269697 E269693 Malaysia Vietnam Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Wireless Charging E269696 South Africa E272903 United Arab Emirates E269694 United Arab Emirates E273475 South Korea 620 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Appendices Radio Frequency Certification Logos for SYNC 3 E252722 Brazil 621 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing 622 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index 3 360 Degree Camera...................................240 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Power Adjustable Steering Column............................................................83 Camera Views......................................................241 Front Camera.......................................................241 Side Camera........................................................242 Airbag Disposal...............................................54 Air Conditioning End of Travel Position........................................84 See: Climate Control.........................................142 4 Air Filter See: Changing the Engine Air Filter Diesel................................................................369 See: Changing the Engine Air Filter Gasoline...........................................................369 4WD See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................212 A Alarm A/C Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................80 See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................80 Arming the Alarm................................................80 Disarming the Alarm..........................................80 Using the System.................................................80 See: Climate Control.........................................142 About This Manual...........................................7 ABS Appendices....................................................584 Apps..................................................................524 See: Brakes...........................................................222 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes................................................................222 ..................................................................................524 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................526 Accessories....................................................555 At a Glance........................................................16 Audible Warnings and Indicators..............111 Exterior Style.......................................................555 Interior Style........................................................555 Lifestyle.................................................................555 Peace of Mind.....................................................556 Airbag Secondary Warning...............................111 Beltminder Warning.............................................111 Door Ajar Warning................................................111 Headlamps On Warning.....................................111 Key in Ignition Warning.......................................111 Keyless Warning Alert.........................................111 Parking Brake On Warning.................................111 Rear Park Aid Warning........................................111 Service AdvanceTrac Warning.........................111 Accessories See: Replacement Parts Recommendation............................................12 ACC See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............244 Active Park Assist........................................233 Automatic Steering into Parking Space.................................................................235 Deactivating the Park Assist Feature.........236 Troubleshooting the System.........................236 Using Active Park Assist..................................234 Audio Control..................................................84 Adjusting the Headlamps.........................362 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ Touchscreen Display...............................454 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ CD..................................................................448 Media........................................................................85 Seek, Next or Previous.......................................85 Audio System................................................447 General Information.........................................447 Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................363 Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................362 Adjusting the Pedals.....................................87 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Manual Adjustable Steering Column............................................................83 Menu Structure..................................................450 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/ SYNC Without Touchscreen................453 Autolamps.........................................................91 Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps.........................................................91 623 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Bonnet Lock Automatic Climate Control.......................143 Automatic High Beam Control..................92 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........344 Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................93 Switching the System On and Off.................93 Booster Seats...................................................31 Automatic Transmission..........................206 Brake Fluid Check........................................358 Brakes...............................................................222 Types of Booster Seats......................................32 Brake-Shift Interlock........................................209 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow....................................................................211 Understanding the Shift Positions of your Automatic Transmission...........................206 Understanding your SelectShift™ Automatic Transmission...........................208 General Information..........................................222 Breaking-In......................................................313 Bulb Specification Chart...........................367 C Automatic Transmission Fluid Check.............................................................357 Auto-Start-Stop...........................................180 Cabin Air Filter...............................................148 Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................423 Disabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................181 Enabling Auto-Start-Stop..............................180 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates............................................................427 Specifications.....................................................424 Autowipers.......................................................88 Auxiliary Power Points................................165 Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L V6, Diesel.............................................................427 110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC Power Outlet.................................................................165 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................165 Locations...............................................................165 Specifications.....................................................428 Capacities and Specifications - 3.3L Duratec - V6................................................431 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................436 Specifications.....................................................433 B Battery Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................436 See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................359 Bed Access.....................................................275 Bed Extender....................................................75 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates..........................................................440 Specifications.....................................................438 Grocery Mode.........................................................76 Tailgate Mode........................................................75 Capacities and Specifications - 5.0L Modular - V8...............................................441 Bed Ramps.....................................................276 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................445 Specifications.....................................................442 Box Side Step......................................................275 Installing the Ramp Holder............................278 Stowing the Bed Ramp....................................277 Using the Bed Ramp.........................................276 Capacities and Specifications.................414 Car Wash Blind Spot Information System.............256 Blind Spot Information System with Trailer Tow.....................................................................257 Switching the System On and Off..............260 System Errors.....................................................260 Using the Blind Spot Information System..............................................................256 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................372 Catalytic Converter......................................194 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................195 Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing...................................................195 Center Console..............................................167 Changing a Bulb...........................................363 BLIS See: Blind Spot Information System..........256 Accessing the Halogen High Beam, Low Beam and Direction Indicator Bulbs.................................................................364 Body Styling Kits.........................................380 624 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Child Safety.......................................................18 Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs..........................366 Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................366 Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror Direction Indicator Lamp Bulbs..................................367 Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs............................365 Replacing LED Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs.................................................................366 Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs...............367 Replacing LED Direction Indicator and Side Marker Bulbs..................................................366 Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs.................366 Replacing Side Marker Bulb..........................365 Replacing the Halogen High Beam, Low Beam and Direction Indicator Bulbs.................................................................364 Replacing the License Plate Lamp Bulb....................................................................367 General Information.............................................18 Child Safety Locks.........................................35 Left-Hand Side......................................................35 Right-Hand Side...................................................35 Cleaning Leather Seats..............................377 With King Ranch Edition..................................377 Without King Ranch Edition...........................377 Cleaning Products........................................372 Materials................................................................372 Cleaning the Engine....................................374 Cleaning the Exhaust..................................374 Cleaning the Exterior...................................372 Cleaning the Headlamps................................373 Exterior Chrome Parts......................................373 Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................373 Stripes or Graphics............................................373 Underbody............................................................373 Under Hood..........................................................373 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens.........................376 Cleaning the Interior....................................375 Cleaning the Wheels..................................378 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades............................................................375 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................64 Climate...........................................................508 Climate Control.............................................142 Coolant Check Changing a Fuse...........................................342 Fuses......................................................................342 Changing a Road Wheel..........................404 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information.....................................................404 Jacking the Vehicle...........................................408 Remove the Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag....................................................................406 Removing the Spare Tire................................407 Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire......................410 Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag......................................................................410 Tire Change Procedure...................................405 See: Engine Coolant Check............................353 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......54 Creating a MyKey............................................63 Programming/Changing Configurable Settings...............................................................63 Changing the 12V Battery.........................359 Cross Traffic Alert........................................260 Battery Management System........................361 Blocked Sensors.................................................262 Switching the System Off and On..............262 System Errors......................................................262 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts.................................................................262 System Limitations...........................................262 Using the Cross Traffic Alert System.........260 Changing the Engine Air Filter Diesel............................................................369 Air Filter Restriction Gauge............................370 Changing the Engine Air Filter Gasoline.......................................................369 Changing the Wiper Blades......................361 Checking MyKey System Status..............64 Checking the Wiper Blades......................361 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance.................................................44 Child Restraint Positioning.........................33 Cruise Control..................................................85 Principle of Operation......................................243 Cruise control See: Using Cruise Control...............................243 Customer Assistance..................................327 625 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index D Electronic Locking Differential...............220 Event Data Recording..........................................10 Service Data Recording........................................9 Activating the Electronic Locking Differential......................................................220 Operating ELD With a Spare or Mismatched Tires.....................................................................221 Daytime Running Lamps.............................92 Electronic Tailgate..........................................72 Type One - Conventional (Non-Configurable).......................................92 Type Two - Configurable...................................92 With the Outside Control Button....................72 With the Remote Control...................................72 Data Recording..................................................9 Emission Law.................................................193 Oxidation Catalytic Converter and Diesel Particulate Filter System............................201 Regeneration......................................................200 Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance..........194 Tampering With a Noise Control System...............................................................193 Digital Radio..................................................456 End User License Agreement.................586 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting............................................457 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................586 Direction Indicators.......................................94 Doors and Locks.............................................67 Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap................................................................358 Drive Control.................................................268 Engine Block Heater.....................................178 Diesel Particulate Filter.............................200 Using the Engine Block Heater......................179 Engine Coolant Check................................353 Adding Coolant...................................................353 Coolant Change.................................................355 Engine Coolant Temperature Management..................................................356 Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................355 Recycled Coolant...............................................355 Severe Climates.................................................355 Selectable Drive Modes..................................268 Driver Alert.......................................................251 Using Driver Alert................................................251 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................48 Children and Airbags..........................................49 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment.......................................................48 Engine Emission Control............................193 Engine Immobilizer See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................77 Driving Aids.....................................................251 Driving Hints....................................................313 Driving Through Water................................315 DRL Engine Oil Check - Diesel...........................351 Adding Engine Oil...............................................351 Engine Oil Check - Gasoline....................350 Adding Engine Oil..............................................350 See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................92 Engine Oil Dipstick - Diesel......................350 Engine Oil Dipstick - Gasoline................349 Engine Specifications - 2.7L EcoBoost™..................................................414 E Economical Driving......................................313 Electric Parking Brake.................................223 Drivebelt Routing................................................414 Engine Specifications - 3.0L V6, Diesel.............................................................414 Applying the Electric Parking Brake............223 Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking Brake..................................................224 Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Brake..................................................................223 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the Vehicle Battery is Running Out of Charge...............................................................224 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™..................................................415 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............584 Drivebelt Routing................................................416 Drivebelt Routing................................................415 Engine Specifications - 3.3L Duratec V6....................................................................415 Drivebelt Routing................................................415 626 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Engine Specifications - 5.0L Modular V8....................................................................416 Puddle Lamps.....................................................100 Spot Lamps.........................................................100 Telescoping Mirrors.............................................99 Drivebelt Routing................................................417 Entertainment..............................................498 F AM/FM Radio......................................................499 Apps........................................................................507 Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................506 CD (If equipped)................................................505 HD Radio™ Information (If Available)........................................................502 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated).......................................................500 Sources.................................................................499 Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information................................507 USB Ports.............................................................507 Fastening the Seatbelts...............................37 Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................38 Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................40 Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................39 Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................38 Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue (Front Center Seat)........................................37 Flat Tire See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404 Floor Mats.......................................................316 Fog Lamps - Front Environment......................................................15 EPB See: Front Fog Lamps........................................93 Foot Pedals See: Electric Parking Brake.............................223 Essential Towing Checks..........................303 See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................87 Before Towing a Trailer...................................309 Hitches..................................................................304 Integrated Trailer Brake Controller..............305 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC).......................................309 Safety Chains......................................................305 Trailer Brakes.......................................................305 Trailer Lamps......................................................308 Trailer Towing Connector...............................303 Using a Step Bumper.......................................308 When Towing a Trailer.....................................309 Ford Credit..........................................................11 US Only......................................................................11 Ford Protect..................................................558 Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY)..........................................559 Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only)..................................................................558 See: Data Recording..............................................9 Four-Wheel Drive..........................................212 Front Fog Lamps............................................93 Front Passenger Sensing System............49 Front Seat Armrest......................................159 Fuel and Refueling.......................................183 Fuel Consumption........................................192 Export Unique Options.................................14 Exterior Mirrors................................................98 Advertised Capacity..........................................192 Fuel Economy......................................................192 360-Degree Camera........................................100 Auto-dimming Feature....................................100 Blind Spot Information System.....................101 Clearance Lamps ..............................................100 Direction Indicator Mirrors .............................100 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................98 Heated Exterior Mirrors ...................................100 Integrated Blind Spot Mirror..........................100 Memory Mirrors ..................................................100 Power Exterior Mirrors........................................98 Power-Folding Mirrors.......................................99 PowerScope™ Power Telescoping Mirrors.................................................................99 Fuel Filler Funnel Location - Regular Cab.................................................................188 Fuel Filler Funnel Location - SuperCab/ SuperCrew...................................................188 Fuel Filter - Diesel........................................359 Fuel Filter - Gasoline..................................359 Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................183 Event Data Recording Biodiesel................................................................184 Diesel Fuel Additives ........................................185 Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Not Required .........184 627 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Fuel Requirements - Choosing The Right Fuel: Vehicles Operated Where Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel Is Required (United States/Canada/Puerto Rico/U.S. Virgin Islands And Other Locales) ......................183 Getting the Services You Need...............327 Fuel Quality - E85........................................186 Hazard Flashers.............................................321 Headlamp Adjusting Away From Home..............................................327 H Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles.............................................................186 Switching Between E85 and Gasoline.............................................................187 See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................362 Headrest See: Head Restraints........................................150 Head Restraints............................................150 Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................187 Choosing the Right Fuel...................................187 Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................151 Fuel Shutoff....................................................321 Fuses................................................................334 Fuse Specification Chart..........................334 Heated Exterior Mirrors..............................148 Heated Rear Window..................................148 Heated Seats..................................................157 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.................................................................340 Power Distribution Box....................................334 Heated Steering Wheel...............................86 Heated Windshield......................................148 Rear Heated Seats.............................................158 Windshield Wiper De-Icer...............................148 G Heating Garage Door Opener Hill Descent Control...................................230 See: Climate Control.........................................142 See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............161 Principle of Operation......................................230 Gauges.............................................................104 Hill Start Assist.............................................224 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge..............106 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........106 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge.............................105 Fuel Gauge............................................................106 Information Display...........................................106 Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge................................................................106 Turbo Boost Gauge...........................................106 Type 1 and 2..........................................................104 Type 3.....................................................................105 Switching the System On and Off...............225 Using Hill Start Assist.......................................225 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate..........................................................145 Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather.............................................................147 General Hints.......................................................145 Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................147 Quickly Heating the Interior............................146 Recommended Settings for Cooling...........147 Recommended Settings for Heating..........146 Gearbox Intelligent Access.................................................55 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................222 Home Screen................................................490 Hood Lock General Maintenance Information.......560 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........344 See: Transmission.............................................206 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................55 Multi-Point Inspection.....................................562 Owner Checks and Services...........................561 Protecting Your Investment..........................560 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................560 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?....................................................560 I Ignition Switch...............................................169 In California (U.S. Only)............................328 Information Display Control......................86 Information Displays.....................................112 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada.........................................................330 General Information............................................112 628 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Information Messages................................124 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab).....................................................................20 Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front Center Position of Super Cab and Crew Cab)......................................................................22 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)............................................27 Using Tether Straps.............................................28 4WD........................................................................140 Active Park.............................................................125 Adaptive Cruise Control...................................125 AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............126 Airbag......................................................................126 Alarm and Security............................................126 Battery and Charging System.........................127 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System.....................................................127 Diesel Messages..................................................128 Doors and Locks...................................................131 Driver Alert..............................................................131 Drivetrain.................................................................131 Engine......................................................................132 Fuel...........................................................................132 Keys and Intelligent Access............................132 Lane Keeping System........................................133 Maintenance.........................................................133 MyKey......................................................................134 Off Road.................................................................135 Park Aid..................................................................135 Park Brake.............................................................136 Power Steering....................................................136 Pre-Collision Assist............................................137 Pro Trailer Backup Assist..................................137 Remote Start........................................................138 Seats.......................................................................138 Side-Wind.............................................................138 Starting System .................................................139 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................139 Trailer.......................................................................139 Instrument Cluster.......................................104 Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................91 Instrument Panel Overview........................16 Interior Lamps.................................................95 Front Interior Lamps...........................................95 Rear Interior Lamps............................................96 Interior Mirror...................................................101 Automatic Dimming Mirror..............................101 Manual Dimming Mirror....................................101 Introduction.........................................................7 J Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................322 Connecting the Jumper Cables....................322 Jump Starting......................................................323 Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................322 Removing the Jumper Cables.......................323 K Keyless Entry....................................................70 SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD (if Equipped).....................................................70 Installing Child Restraints............................19 Keyless Starting.............................................170 Child Seats...............................................................19 Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats....................................................................28 Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Regular Cab)...................................................29 Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Crew Cab and Super Cab)......................................30 Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outermost Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) ....................................................28 Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear Seat Outermost Positions)....................................24 Ignition Modes.....................................................170 Keys and Remote Controls.........................55 L Lane Keeping System.................................252 Switching the System On and Off...............253 System Display...................................................254 System Settings.................................................253 Troubleshooting.................................................255 Lighting Control..............................................90 Flashing the Headlamp High Beam...............91 Headlamp High Beam.......................................90 629 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Load Retaining Fixtures.............................270 Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™.......417 Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L V6, Diesel..........417 Motorcraft Parts - 3.3L Duratec V6....................................................................418 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™..................................................419 Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L Modular V8....................................................................419 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................65 MyKey™.............................................................62 BoxLink™ Cleats................................................270 Principle of Operation........................................62 Lighting..............................................................90 General Information...........................................90 Load Carrying................................................270 Load Limit........................................................271 Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles.............................................................275 Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer..................................................................271 Locking and Unlocking.................................67 N Activating Intelligent Access............................67 Autolock..................................................................69 Battery Saver.........................................................70 Illuminated Entry..................................................69 Power Door Locks.................................................67 Remote Control.....................................................67 Smart Unlock........................................................68 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys......................................................................68 Navigation.......................................................516 cityseeker..............................................................523 Destination Mode...............................................518 Map Mode.............................................................516 Navigation Map Updates................................524 Navigation Menu.................................................521 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................524 SYNC AppLink.....................................................523 Waypoints.............................................................522 Lug Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404 M Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........563 Maintenance.................................................344 O Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................563 Normal Maintenance Intervals....................565 General Information.........................................344 Manual Climate Control.............................142 Manual Seats.................................................152 Off-Road Driving...........................................314 Basic Off-road Driving Techniques..............314 Crossing Obstacles............................................315 Hill Climbing.........................................................315 Manual Lumbar ..................................................153 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward.............................................................152 Recline Adjustment...........................................153 Oil Change Indicator Reset......................352 Oil Check Manual Tailgate...............................................72 Memory Function.........................................156 See: Engine Oil Check - Diesel.......................351 See: Engine Oil Check - Gasoline................350 Easy Entry and Exit Feature.............................157 Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key.............156 Saving a PreSet Position.................................156 Opening and Closing the Hood..............344 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature......................................................332 Message Center Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual..........332 Overhead Console.......................................168 See: Information Displays.................................112 Mirrors P See: Windows and Mirrors................................97 Mobile Communications Equipment.......13 Moonroof.........................................................102 Parking Aids...................................................232 Bounce-Back.......................................................103 Opening and Closing the Moonroof............103 Principle of Operation......................................232 630 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Rear Seat Armrest.......................................160 Rear Seats........................................................157 Passive Anti-Theft System..........................77 SecuriLock™...........................................................77 PATS Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ...............157 Returning the Seat to the Seating Position..............................................................157 See: Passive Anti-Theft System......................77 Pedals.................................................................87 Perchlorate.........................................................11 Personal Safety System™.........................46 Rear View Camera.......................................237 Camera guidelines............................................238 Manual Zoom.....................................................240 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................239 Rear Camera Delay...........................................240 Using the Rear View Camera System........238 How Does the Personal Safety System Work?..................................................................46 Phone...............................................................510 During a Phone Call...........................................514 Making Calls.........................................................513 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time...................................................................510 Phone Menu...........................................................511 Receiving Calls.....................................................514 Smartphone Connectivity...............................515 Text Messaging....................................................515 Rear View Camera See: Rear View Camera...................................237 Recommended Towing Weights............291 Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight for Your Vehicle..............................303 Refueling.........................................................189 Post-Crash Alert System..........................324 Power Door Locks Refueling System Overview...........................189 Refueling System Warning..............................191 Refueling Your Vehicle.....................................190 See: Locking and Unlocking.............................67 Remote Control..............................................55 Power Running Boards.................................81 Power Seats....................................................153 Car Finder................................................................59 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................55 Intelligent Access Key.........................................56 Remote Start.........................................................60 Replacing the Battery.........................................57 Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................59 Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................154 Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion ......................................154 Power Steering Fluid Check....................358 Power Windows..............................................97 Remote Start.................................................148 Accessory Delay...................................................98 Bounce-Back..........................................................97 One-Touch Up or Down.....................................97 Window Lock.........................................................98 Automatic Settings............................................149 Removing the Tailgate..................................73 Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............378 Replacement Parts Recommendation........................................12 Pre-Collision Assist.....................................264 Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist Settings............................................................266 Blocked Sensors................................................266 Distance Indication and Alert.......................265 Using the Pre-Collision Assist System..............................................................264 Collision Repairs....................................................12 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs..................................................................12 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control.............................................................61 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)..............................................................332 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)..............................................................332 Roadside Assistance..................................320 Protecting the Environment........................15 Puncture See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404 R Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance........................................................321 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage..................321 Rear Axle.........................................................220 Rear Parking Aid...........................................232 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................233 631 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Settings............................................................527 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance........................................................321 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance...................................320 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance...................................320 911 Assist...............................................................532 Ambient Lighting...............................................539 Bluetooth..............................................................529 Clock.......................................................................529 Display...................................................................540 General...................................................................537 Media Player........................................................528 Mobile Apps.........................................................536 Navigation............................................................534 Phone.....................................................................529 Radio......................................................................533 SiriusXM................................................................534 Sound.....................................................................527 Valet Mode............................................................541 Vehicle...................................................................539 Voice Control........................................................541 Wi-Fi & Hotspot.................................................538 Roadside Emergencies..............................320 Running-In See: Breaking-In..................................................313 Running Out of Fuel....................................188 Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container..........................................................188 Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................188 S Safety Canopy™.............................................52 Safety Precautions......................................183 Satellite Radio..............................................458 Side Airbags......................................................51 Sitting in the Correct Position..................150 Sliding Windows...........................................102 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)................................................................459 Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............459 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service.................459 Troubleshooting................................................460 Power Sliding Back Window..........................102 Snow Chains See: Using Snow Chains.................................397 Scheduled Maintenance Record............573 Scheduled Maintenance..........................560 Seatbelt Extension........................................44 Seatbelt Height Adjustment.......................41 Seatbelt Reminder.........................................42 Snowplowing..................................................317 Engine Temperature while Plowing.............318 Installing the Snowplow...................................317 Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow Attached...........................................................318 Outside Air Temperature While Plowing..............................................................319 Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped Vehicle...............................................................318 Snowplow Mode.................................................317 Transmission Operation while Plowing..............................................................319 Belt-Minder™........................................................42 Seatbelts...........................................................36 Principle of Operation........................................36 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime...............................................................41 Conditions of operation.....................................42 Seats.................................................................150 Security...............................................................77 Selective Catalytic Reductant System..........................................................196 Spare Wheel See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404 Special Notices................................................12 Contaminated Diesel Exhaust Fluid or Inoperative Selective Catalytic Reduction System.............................................................200 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Guidelines and Information......................................................199 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Level..............................196 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Warning Messages and Vehicle Operations...............................198 Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank..........196 New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12 Special Instructions..............................................12 Using a Slide-In Camper.....................................13 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance..............................................566 Diesel Engine......................................................568 Exceptions............................................................572 Speed Control See: Cruise Control............................................243 632 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index SYNC™ Applications and Services.......................................................466 Spot Lamps.....................................................94 Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................94 Stability Control............................................227 911 Assist...............................................................467 SYNC Mobile Apps...........................................468 Principle of Operation.......................................227 Starter Switch SYNC™...........................................................462 See: Ignition Switch...........................................169 General Information.........................................462 Starting a Diesel Engine.............................174 SYNC™ Troubleshooting...........................471 ....................................................................................174 Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................175 Cold Weather Operation..................................176 Cold Weather Starting.......................................175 Diesel Engine Fast Start Glow Plug System...............................................................175 Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................174 T Tailgate Lock.....................................................72 Tailgate Step....................................................74 Closing the Step....................................................75 Opening the Step.................................................74 Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................171 Tailgate...............................................................72 Technical Specifications Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................173 Failure to Start......................................................172 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................174 Important Ventilating Information...............174 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving................................................................173 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................................................173 Vehicles with an Ignition Key...........................171 Vehicles with Keyless Start..............................171 See: Capacities and Specifications.............414 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only).......................329 Tire Care..........................................................383 Steering...........................................................263 Glossary of Tire Terminology........................384 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading.............................................................383 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall...........................................................385 Temperature A B C............................................384 Traction AA A B C..............................................384 Treadwear............................................................383 Electric Power Steering...................................263 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........398 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles With: Push Button Start......................................170 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System.......................................399 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System .....................................400 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........169 General Information..........................................169 Unlocking the Steering Wheel.........................171 Steering Wheel Lock - Vehicles Without: Push Button Start......................................170 Steering Wheel...............................................83 Storage Compartments.............................167 Sunroof Tires See: Wheels and Tires......................................381 Towing a Trailer.............................................279 Load Placement................................................280 Towing Points................................................325 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels..........................................................310 See: Moonroof.....................................................102 Sun Visors........................................................102 Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................102 Supplementary Restraints System..........47 Emergency Towing.............................................310 Recreational Towing..........................................310 Principle of Operation.........................................47 Switching Off the Engine...........................178 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 SYNC™ 3........................................................479 Towing..............................................................279 Traction Control...........................................226 General Information.........................................479 Trailer Reversing Aids..................................281 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................541 Principle of Operation.......................................281 Pro Trailer Backup Assist™.............................281 Principle of Operation......................................226 633 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist..........281 Troubleshooting.................................................286 Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist...................285 Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop...................................................................246 Hilly Condition and Trailer Tow Usage................................................................248 Overriding the Set Speed................................247 Park Brake Application.....................................247 Resuming the Set Speed.................................247 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............245 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed When Your Vehicle is Stationary..........................245 Setting the Gap Distance...............................246 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off......................................................................248 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On.......................................................................244 Switching to Normal Cruise Control..........250 System Not Available......................................249 Trailer Sway Control....................................291 Transfer Case Fluid Check........................357 Transmission Code Designation............422 Transmission.................................................206 Transporting the Vehicle...........................324 Type Approvals..............................................612 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Blind Spot Information System...............619 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Mid Range Radar....................................................614 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Passive Anti-Theft System........................615 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Radio Transceiver Module..........................618 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for SYNC 3...............................................................621 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)................612 Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Wireless Charging........................................620 Using Cruise Control...................................243 Switching Cruise Control Off.........................243 Switching Cruise Control On.........................243 Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................212 4WD Indicator Lights.........................................212 Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles.............................................................216 How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles..............................................................215 Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD System...............................................................213 Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD system................................................................212 U Under Hood Overview - 2.7L EcoBoost™.................................................345 Under Hood Overview - 3.0L V6, Diesel............................................................346 Under Hood Overview - 3.3L Duratec V6....................................................................347 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................348 Under Hood Overview - 5.0L Modular V8...................................................................348 Unique Driving Characteristics...............180 Universal Garage Door Opener................161 Using Hill Descent Control.......................230 Hill descent modes...........................................230 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................65 Using Power Running Boards.....................81 Automatic Power Deploy...................................81 Automatic Power Stow.......................................81 Bounce-back.........................................................82 Enabling and Disabling......................................82 Manual Power Deploy.........................................81 HomeLink Wireless Control System.............161 USB Port..........................................................461 Using Adaptive Cruise Control...............244 Using Snow Chains.....................................397 Using Stability Control...............................228 Automatic Cancellation...................................247 Blocked Sensor...................................................249 Canceling the Set Speed.................................247 Changing the Set Speed.................................247 Detection Issues................................................248 Following a Vehicle...........................................245 AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC™)............................................................228 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player............................................................470 Audio Voice Commands.................................470 Media Sources....................................................470 634 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index W Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............465 Accessing Features through the Phone Menu.................................................................466 Pairing a Phone..................................................465 Phone Controls..................................................466 Phone Voice Commands...............................466 Warning Lamps and Indicators...............107 Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator................107 Anti-Lock Braking System...............................107 Automatic Headlamp High Beam Indicator............................................................107 Automatic Regen Control Off........................107 Auto-Start-Stop Indicator...............................107 Battery....................................................................107 Blind Spot Monitor.............................................107 Brake System Warning Lamp........................108 Check 4X4............................................................108 Cruise Control Indicator...................................108 Diesel Exhaust Fluid..........................................108 Direction Indicator.............................................108 Door Ajar Warning Lamp.................................108 Electric Park Brake.............................................108 Electronic Locking Differential......................108 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp..................................................................108 Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp....................109 Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................109 Front Airbag.........................................................109 Front Fog Lamp Indicator...............................109 Headlamp High Beam Indicator...................109 Hill Descent..........................................................109 Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp......................109 Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp................109 Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Lamp..................................................................109 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp...........................109 Parking Lamps......................................................110 Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power/Electronic Throttle Control..........110 Service Engine Soon...........................................110 Sport Mode............................................................110 Stability Control and Traction Control Indicator.............................................................110 Stability Control and Traction Control Off Warning Lamp.................................................110 Tow Haul Indicator..............................................110 Wait To Start.........................................................110 Water In Fuel.........................................................110 Using Traction Control...............................226 Switching the System Off .............................226 System Indicator Lights and Messages.........................................................226 Using Voice Recognition...........................463 Audio Voice Commands.................................492 Climate Voice Commands.............................493 Initiating a Voice Session................................463 Mobile App Voice Commands.....................496 Navigation Voice Commands.......................495 Phone Voice Commands................................493 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands.....................................................496 System Interaction and Feedback.............464 Voice Settings Commands............................497 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only)........................330 V Vehicle Care....................................................372 General Information..........................................372 Vehicle Certification Label........................421 Vehicle Identification Number...............420 Vehicle Storage.............................................378 Battery....................................................................379 Body........................................................................379 Brakes.....................................................................379 Cooling system...................................................379 Engine.....................................................................379 Fuel system..........................................................379 General..................................................................379 Miscellaneous....................................................380 Removing Vehicle From Storage.................380 Tires.........................................................................379 Ventilated Seats...........................................159 Ventilation See: Climate Control.........................................142 VIN Washer Fluid Check....................................358 Washers See: Vehicle Identification Number............420 Voice Control...................................................85 See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................372 Waxing.............................................................374 635 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing Index Wheel Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................404 Wheels and Tires..........................................381 General Information..........................................381 Technical Specifications..................................412 Windows and Mirrors....................................97 Windshield Washers.....................................89 Windshield Wipers........................................88 Speed Dependent Wipers................................88 Wiper Blades See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................361 Wipers and Washers....................................88 636 F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201709, Fourth-Printing
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : Unknown Create Date : 2018:04:19 15:39:35Z Modify Date : 2018:06:07 10:04:06-05:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Format : application/pdf Title : Untitled Creator : Unknown Producer : XEP 4.16 build 20090723 Trapped : False Creator Tool : Unknown Metadata Date : 2018:06:07 10:04:06-05:00 Document ID : uuid:95a87e4b-4fab-4cff-a5ae-697673ca8bd2 Instance ID : uuid:830fcbc0-d8cf-4fd8-b99d-c0851bb2fa3f Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 639EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools